Home

Manual de treinamento - EGV

1. Record 1 User defined database lists must contain a number from the range 4501 to 4999 The numbers for custom graphical lists must be between 3501 and 3999 GG Introdu o P gina 265 sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados GG 2 SORTING OF DOCUMENTS IN THE WORKSPACE TREE You can change the order of appearance of the lists in the workspace tree For example you can order the workspace tree in the following way Ag CiProgram Files X65 SsE XA4A0 5EE Electrical Project cover sheet Documents ap Cabinets gy Circuit diagrams EN wy Installations gy Other documents Graphical Lists Products Terminals ep Connectors 4 Connector Pins Cables Cable cores F To sort the lists as desired change the list order number in the respective field i ERES Workspace Properties pe Component text P Object types Show ListOrder 1000 List definition List id Description 1000 Circuit diagrams EN General Workspace text Page text 1001 4010 4100 1300 200 3000 300 3011 3020 3025 3026 _ 3030 3034 3050 Circuit diagrams IEEE Installations Cabinets Project cover sheet Other documents Graphical Lists Documents Products Terminals Connectors Connector Pins Cables Ca
2. nae ajuda pressionar Fi SP NOM Para visualizar uma lista va para a guia Projeto expanda o item Banco de dados e selecione a lista desejada com um duplo clique Voc pode alternar entre as abas Projeto Simbolos Componentes e Comandos A Introducao Pagina 13 Tii Jaa Eelectrical a pr i Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Voc pode modificar o posicionamento das abas Projeto S mbolos Propriedades e Comandos arrastando as e soltando as no local desejado Use as setas que aparecer o na tela para solt las na sua nova posi o E EMMA SEE Electrical Meu Projeto 0001 Arquiva Origem Geral Editar visualizar Desenhar Fun es Diagrama El trico Legendas e Detalhes Estilo je i Mova Cel Excluir das Anterior E Projeto E M dulo mpo Es EY visualizar 34 Abrir ag Fechar Ca Pr xima A Pagina Fas Pagina mandos Ff Proprie j Pagina Informa o Propriedades visualizar 4 amp MeuProjeto 0001 EJ E E Propriedades x Mome Valor il Pisses ek au a PRM ES Condutores doca PP Contatos o ie Y Operandos CLP as OO Cat ocLPES Do Fios Conex es pr Para ajuda pressionar Fl AF UM SERI Para visualizar uma determinada area da p gina aberta clique em Origem e ative o comando Visualizar A janela Visualizar aparecer e voc poder ampliar ou diminuir o zoom na p gina Veja o ite
3. Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 6 b LIST OF PARTS WITHOUT TERMINALS Condition All the terminal strips belong to the same article group for example to X 1 If the fields for the list template are determined for List of parts simple define the filter using Project menu U Filter 2 Double click the Fields folder inthe left upper area and double click the field code you wish to define a filter for In the example for the article group this is the code F_12000006 The field code is transferred into the bottom area of the window 2 Type the expression 3 F 12000006 lt gt X in the bottom area of the window cd Edit Filter Condition i x Variables and Functions Functions Test Condi Date i FStr l fib F 12000007 Functions E 4 Ab F_160040 JA F 12000005 Numerical functions EB F 12000006 Date functions RE F 180040 String functions EB F Misc functions RR F 12000020 Barcode functions z Conversion funchons fae F 12000040 rt F 12000050 E Project and Print dependent functions REY F 12000120 Logical functions RES F 12000120 Drawing functions EB F 12000150 Currency functions Po Insert F 12000006 lt gt e A pos OF Cancel F P gina 346 QQ Introdu o ad e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE
4. Patterns Preview m Symbols symbol Preview Fifer aa X liaise EXE E pis E Patterns 1 3 w NO pneumatic doub E 25 Patterns amp NO preumatic single Tz e Coil a e NO positive g Lamp E NO pull detent Potential Ey amp NO pull left Product i bv amp Switch 1 a MO n cick Bescriphion Oo a E a ed by pushing Detent OF Cancel Respective symbol text 2 Choose a pattern text and a symbol text Via the id button you can assign them to each other The symbol text is taken from the list on the right side The assigned text is displayed in the Respective symbol text field Text Mapping x Pattern tests Symbol testa 13 14 5 Respective symbol text OK Cancel 3 After you have assigned the texts click OK to close the window VV Introdu o P gina 413 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV 2 3 RECOGNIZING PATTERNS RECOGNIZEDRAWINGPATTERNS AND RECOGNIZEWORKSPACEPATTERNS COMMANDS Exercise 44 4 Replace the patterns in the drawing and or the workspace with the previously defined SEE Electrical symbols 1 Load the page with the drawing in which you wish to recognize the patterns 2 Execute the RecognizeDraw ingPatterns command All the patterns found inthe PATTERNS SES symbol library are searched in the drawing and replaced by the symbols assigned
5. F_T O00 Functions E a F_ 100690 F 12000007 HE Humencal functions F 160040 Date functions F 12000005 String functions F 12000006 Misc functions F 180040 Barcode functions F Conversion functions F 12000020 a Project and Print dependent functions F 12000040 a Logical functions F 12000050 a Drawing functions F 12000120 Currency functions Insert F_ 12000007 Siemens es RM i The field code is displayed in the bottom window s pane Type here the manufacturer s name for the filter behind a sign The name must be between double quotation marks Uppercase and lowercase are taken into consideration F 12000007 Siemens You can type the expression Ask String too see below for example F 12000007 AskString Manufacturer F SIEMENS 200 The Ask String executes a question about the manufacturer You will find an illustration about the Ask String expression in the chapter List title with questions above how to enter the project name manually in the list lf you wish to be sure that the manufacturer will be found after using uppercase or lowercase you can use the command UpperS F 12000007 Upper AskString manufacturer F SIEMENS 200 The expression Upper converts all the letters into uppercase Close the dialogue box by clicking OK and save the list template QQ Introdu o Pagina 345 saae ectrical
6. When using the automatic wiring tool you are enabled to define the route direction of the connection pin by the Electrical O Connections O Direction command By analyzing the shape of a given symbol SEE Electrical in most cases calculates the possible directions for connecting the symbol up down right left However the shape of some special user defined symbols may cause SEE Electrical to fail the calculation In such case SEE Electrical looks for the basic definition of directions set by the user The command is used to set this parameter as a default one So after activating it specify the connection direction Connection Direction Setup x Direction a Cancel Important The command is only active and available when using the automatic wiring tool EE Introdu o P gina 239 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 3 ORTHOGONAL WIRING The Electrical Wire connections Orthogonal Wiring command allows you to draw multi mode wiring You are allowed optionally to draw direct orthogonal wiring Exercise 29 1 Draw an orthogonal wiring To do this open page 1 of your workspace and delete all wires between the symbols which represent the motor reverse protection columns 4 and 5 Proceed as follows 1 CA Electrical 3 CO Orthogonal Wiring Wire Connections panel 3 Position th
7. Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados IMPRESSAO 7 IMPRIMIR Exercicio 8 1 Ap s a conclus o do projeto ele pode ser impresso 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Imprimir 3 CO Imprimir MM Imprimir Diagrama Imprimir O Imprimir em arquivo Salvar como Imagem Impressora Area de Impress o Mome REAL Seus i Propriedades P gina atual Estado Pronta Tudo E C Sele o Tipo HF FSC 1500 series ai Local C Lista de Impress o ped USBOU1 m Receba oe Sele o Lista de Impress o Coment rio Tipo de Pagina Lieseri o Configura es l Diagrama El trico 1 Diagramme Atualizar texto s Imprimir em cores Inverter Ordem Usar propriedades da pagina para impress o Imprimir Zoom atual Imprimir linhas de guia nas P ginas Escala Margens Escala da Pagina 0 Escala de Impress o ie Margem esquerda 0 Margem direita ie Margem Superior O Margem Inferior ic Defini o de imagem Tipo de Imagem x Copias Resolu o da Imagem N mero de c pias Visualizar Impress o Cancelar I Introdu o P gina 61 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A visualiza o da impress o pode ser acionada para paginas individuais do projeto Esta fun o pode ser acessada clicando no bot o Visualizar Impress o a partir da caixa de di logo Imprimir ou executando o comando Arquivo O I
8. Type the text and click the Search text in Translation database button All the texts from the translation database Source language column beginning with this text are displayed and can be selected by double clicking with the mouse lf you activate Search any part of text the whole phrase is searched in the translation database For the text Cable the cable channel term will also be found Text x a Search any part of text Search text in Translation database cable conductor Cable description cable distribution cable form cable tray cable trunking system Cable type cabled system Cablename Pagina 254 EE Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 8 5 EXCHANGING THE SOURCE LANGUAGES OF A WORKSPACE Advanced Through the TransText2SourceT ext and TransText2SourceT extWsp commands available in the Commands pane you can transfer one existing translation language as a source language ina single page or a workspace The SwapSourceLanguagelnT ranslationDatabase command gives you the possibility to define as a source language each language available in the current translation database TranslationNew MDB inthe Templates folder of your SEE Electrical installation If the new source language contains empty or duplicated entries there will be a loss of data because the entry inthe source language colum
9. CC 1 DATABASE FOR FUNCTION LOCATION AND PRODUCT MANAGEMENT The Aspects command from the Commands tab allows you to define and manage functions and locations as well as the product database for the current workspace This command allows you to define the functions locations and the product database for the whole workspace before you start drawing or to add them later You can also add some descriptions as well as display the pages and or components which belong to a function location E Function Location Product Management Function Description a Unique product aspect on component E Ag Functions e i Function Location Product p Terminal Connector Function B1 Location E Ag Locations yay A 4 Circuit diagrams EN Installations Cabinets Location 43 Product Description El Ag Products Product D Description separator Notes 1 When you launch the command for the first time in case some functions locations already exist in the workspace they will be displayed Otherwise the window appears empty 2 If you use the Aspects command from the Commands explorer without activating the settings for function location management in the Workspace Properties window the Use function location management and Group pages according to function location options will be automatically activated In case you do now wish to group the pages according to their function location you ne
10. FN Ing Channeloo2 Location B Product Page 1 F1 Index Cell 5 ChannelDo3 lt lt Backward Forward gt gt By double clicking on an existing greyed out symbol in the symbol explorer section you will be navigated to the page where this part of the component is used If symbols for different modules are defined in the channel all are found in the tab referring to the module Pagina 228 CC Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados CC 2 USING NESTED ASPECTS Advanced An option within the Workspace Properties window offers you support of relative and absolute aspects nested aspects The option can be enabled if no pages exist in the workspace First Example for the use of nested aspects The aspects from the page are added to the aspect found on each object The box transfers its aspects to the components it contains Object Reference Designation Page Ful Lo1 Pri Fuse Ful Fu2 Lo1 Lo2 Pri F1 Box Ful Fu3 Lo1 Lo3 Pri Pr3 Switch Ful Fu2 Lo1 Lo3 Pri Pr3 S2 Lamp Ful Fu3 Fu4 Lo1 Lo3 Pri Pr3 P3 In this example all aspects seen at the components or the box are sub aspects of the aspects defined for the page they are relative aspects aea a a a Tool e Weel tee eum 2nd Example for the use of nested aspecis Only one aspect is used here but the rule is valid for all three of them A wo
11. P gina 114 O Introdu o 11 gt 12 gt 13 gt 14 gt 15 gt O Introducao electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Define Sections Select section 1 Section Name 1 Size X 10 00 Y 0 00 W 400 00 H 297 00 Columns Rows i Auto generate columns Auto generate rows Define Section Area Number of columns 1 Number of rows 1 Sort index O Cell 0 Double click the column header of the existing column to define the rules for the column RS Ih Header Definition 25 om Page number Page Index Used in front of amp will format the numerical value Section name Enter O zero as the column name Click OK Define the rules for the row in the same way For example add an A for the row name Double click the cell to define its rules P gina 115 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados E Define Sections E DS Select section 1 x Add Section Name 1 Size X 10 00 Y 0 00 W 400 00 H 297 00 e Columns Rows Auto generate columns Cell Definition Number of columns 1 Column name he cell 0 HR Row name RS Section name Sort index 0 Cell 0 OK Cancel 16 gt Insert O zero for the Sort index to sort from top to down and from lef
12. Terminal Strip 10 Cablelin iira iM Gi tm yw a ii Es Em I lf you want to add the graphical representation to both sides of the terminal you can insert the same objects used to insert the representation on the left side just use Target right instead of Target left Of course you also have to use cable core number right instead of cable core number left etc for the other necessary texts One text is orientated in the direction of the connection point of the terminal and the other is orientated in the direction of the connection point of the target side Pagina 282 Il Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 2 4 SHOWING THAT CABLE CORES ARE USED ON PREVIOUS NEXT PAGE The Terminal Plan can generate information showing whether cable cores of a cable are used on Wi Wi previous lt or next page Example D cb Cf E atc Sere Pe PEP Pre N o ma m E mi um no D a oP co E vl m m mi mi m m m mi rr Motor Wi In the page template you have to add two macro groups to each placeholder for left or right cable v group for cable reference symbol to previous page v group for cable reference symbol to next page Each cable reference group contains the following elements v text with attribute cable reference LAST or cable reference NEXT depends on which cable reference group you are preparing v geom
13. Type the letter of the column of the Excel sheet that contains the entries about the workspace information Page information tab Enter first the sheet of the Excelfile and the fields on this sheet where the page data come from All the pages of the project receive the same information P gina 320 PP Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example data are illustrated in the Excel file PLC XLS sheet Page Data ah a PP Introdu o gt bil Projectinfo Pagelnfo Symbols Alias a l olf Entries inthe Page information tab Range Sheet name From A Column Testid To N7 Column text From Type in the first field of the Excel sheet that contains data for page information To The last field from the Excel sheet that contains data for page information Sheet name For example Page Data name of the Excel sheet if you wish to change the sheet names in your Excel table you must type valid names Column TextID Enter the letter of the column in the Exce table that contains the TextlD records P gina 321 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Column Text Enter the letter of the column in the Excel table that contains the records about Page information Symbol data range Type the sheet of the Excelfile and the fields on this sheet where the data com
14. Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Excel list The information in an Excel file basically corresponds to the information in the graphical list Column A shows a counter number and the next columns display the wire properties as defined in the Text file and Excel Wire list area The next column shows whether a signal is present Then follow the columns with the targets A B C D E F G 1 Counter Wire number Wire color Wire size Wire type Potential Target 2 001 L1 BK 1 5 L1 F1 1 3 L1 BK 1 5 L1 F2 1 4 L1 BK 1 5 L1 F3 1 3 L1 BK 1 5 L1 Q1 1 5 002 L2 BK Lo L2 F1 3 f L2 BK 1 5 L2 F2 3 B L2 BK 1 5 L2 F3 3 9 L2 BK Lo L2 01 3 By using the Number of columns in the line field you can specify how many columns will be created for targets column Potential if it is present columns for targets If there are several destinations when columns are available a new line begins Excel Wire list Humber of columna m each row 0 By default the Excel file is saved in the Projects installation folder It receives the name lt Workspace name XLS gt Text file ASCII file By default the Excel file is saved in the Projects installation folder It receives the name lt Workspace name WiringList IXT gt E Example 1_WiringList TXT Notepad File Edit Format View Help Number L1 colorBk size 1 5 Types L1 POTENTIAL FLil Number L1 colorBk size 1 5 Types L1 POTENTIAL Feil Number
15. New Font Width and New Font Distance for each of the different fonts and the combinations of text attributes EE Introdu o P gina 257 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 11 In case you need to use a different code page than the default one it is possible to choose the appropriate script when defining the font The script you defined appears in the New Font Script field but cannot be changed Save your changes with the help of the Set font mapping button 12 Close the window with Cancel 13 CO FontToolChangeSymbol 14 Press the cai button within the Library area to define the projects to scan for fonts 15 Press the x button if you want to remove a library from the list 16 Choose the XML file to take the mapping information from in the Set XML file to export text field 17 Press the button to open and load the desired folder and then select the XML file 18 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button 19 Press the Replace symbols text button to start the replacing process Exercise 29 6 Finding and changing all fonts used in a single or in several templates 1 CO FontT oolReadT emplate 2 Press the cai button within the Templates area to define the templates to scan for fonts 3 Press the x x button if you want to remove a template from the list 4 gt Define the XML file to write the font
16. P gina 357 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 Define sum variables Compare the Cable length addition example and follow the steps there 3 Define group header It contains the record lf Contains F ObjectType 19102 Cable channel Rail F_160040 F 12000005 4 The expression defines to print the Cable channel text for objects of type 19102 only and otherwise the text Rail Syntax If Contains lt field gt value lt Result if condition is complied with gt lt Result if condition is not complied with can be omitted gt lt Field 1 gt lt Field 2 gt This is also a possibility to join different fields in one line 4 The data line must contain the length compare the Cable length addition example o Define a Footer Line as in the Cable length addition example 6 Define group change identification as inthe Cable length addition example but the change must be executed by changing the object type i e the condition is F ObjeciType QQ 4 4 MULTIPLE PRINTING OF LABELS lf you need to print labels multiple times print all the labels first and then once again or print the labels twice over 1 Print multiple labels List of products SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 i e the SELECT statement is repeated after UNION ALL The statement SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION
17. Release Workspace Aspects Bk Symbol ChangeFonts nFiles Cloud CompressedBOM CompressedBOM Des Compressed BOMFage Compressed BOM Pagel CompressedBOM Fage Des CompressedB MPFageDesAll Create Neutral mlS LO Create Rapsodie CUS DbList205V DB Lists From Excel DB Lists To Excel Del Wire List DL Drawing F DF Drawing Viewer DRWINFO Drw Info All DWalmport Ex DW Glmport From Excel DW Symbol ETINFO Exclude Text From Revision Expot2FNR Type command Rig wo rkspace aly symbols E Components Es Commands The commands are displayed alphabetically You can type in directly the name of the command in the Type command field at the bottom of the pane and press ENTER to execute the desired function P gina 402 UU Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados It is possible also to group the commands When you right click on a command in the Commands explorer a pop up menu appears This pop up menu contains functionalities to generate a group or delete one or all existing group s The grouping according to your needs helps to find commands quicker The commands can be copied and pasted to a group they can be cut from a group and pasted to another group or they can be removed from a group but they cannot be removed from the root level of the commands explorer This means that you will have the commands you grouped two times
18. 12 P gina 120 File Open Workspace Click the LJ in the Look in field of the dialogue box Look irr Projects aa You can search projects in another directory By default projects are saved in the Projects directory templates in the Templates directory Select the Templates directory under SEE Electrical SEE Electrical Select a workspace template Its properties appear in the right pane of the Open Workspace dialogue Open The workspace template is opened Select Circuit diagrams in the Workspace tree Home Module Properties panel Circuit diagrams EN Properties Ed General e Reference es Coil e Wires alin Cables Page Template Circuit diagrams EM 0 9 Logo Component Numbering Action for modify names Code Number De According setting Teminal Separator Separator Between Strip and Number PLC PLC Address Numbering Method Connections Connection Points Node Size Page Template Select your page template Verify all of the properties in this window and the properties of the circuit diagrams O Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Select a method for naming the componenis in the workspace from the Component Numbering pull down list within the Circuit Diagrams Properties dialogue box 13 gt OK Exercise 14 12 Save the new workspace template 1 CA File 2 CO Save
19. 4 gt Click in the line to add wires Define the wires sorting type in the connection of the first component the connection of the second component wire colour wire size and wire type To delete a wire select the line and press the Delete key 5 gt After you have defined all the wires in the multicore click OK to close the dialogue box Exercise 36 3 View the Multicores and Multicores wires lists within the Graphical lists 1 Select Multicores in the Graphical lists area of the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate P gina 302 The Multicores graphical list is generated Double click the page 001 in the Workspace Explorer to open it NN Introdu o asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados OO INSERTING COMPONENTS NOT IN THE DRAWING VIA THE DATABASE EDITORS Advanced You can insert components for the Part list or spare terminals via the database editors It is not necessary any more to insert them into the diagrams You can also import such components without graphic with the help of an Excel file OO 1 EDITOR FOR COMPONENTS WITHOUT GRAPHICS This Editor contains information about components without graphics in the workspace for example spare terminals separation and end plates for terminals inserted via the Terminal Editor a box for shipping of the designed machine added via the Component Without Graphic Editor etc It al
20. 7 gt Insert Channel 8 Place the cable channel in the desired place 9 Place the cable channel again in another place Through the or keys in the numeric block of the keyboard you can rotate the cable channels or other elements before placing them if you did not enter the correct angle when defining the width and length Pagina 370 RR Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 4 Insert components using the pick list that contains all the components from the circuit diagram When you insert a component it is deleted from the pick list The component name appears automatically next to the symbol When you delete a component from the cabinet drawing it appears in the list again RR Introdu o P gina 371 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 CA Functions 2 CO Pick List Other panel Pick List Function Location Product Type Component type Terminalstrip Amount i x Terminal KG mod 036091 Terminal AI 310 036091 Terminal HI 1F4 Component This MAO Component Td Component oe 2w E1010 Component vith Aux Contacts 150 S3 Component ZK Relay Coil 2K3 Relay Coil 2K4 Relay Coil 2FE Component 2PF Component 252 Component 255 Component Component tada tda _ _ tada tda tada tda da mada ia Position select
21. Export_3010 5F_ 140050 Export 3010 140050 Export 3010 5F 150110 Export 3010 5F 160400 Export_3010 76007 0 E 3010 F 1 l4 4 Record 1 The next step is to calculate the total number of each entry item which will be displayed in another column next to the respective item entry to show what the existing quantity of that is So close the Page Types dialogue and click the Compute tab Within the Function field select Count from the scroll down list that opens Then click within the Column field and select Export_3010 160030 from the pull down list In the Alias field type in ex Amount for the type Select afterwards the Compute field being already filled in and then click the Preview Test Query button HH Introdu o Pagina 271 sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The Page Types dialogue again appears but now showing also the number of each kind of item i e the amount of each grouped entry As well this is the way in which the respective database list will look within SEE Electrical Export 3010 Page Types pm Thermal relay lM 4 Record 1 H EO E Alias Compute ounti Export 3010 160030 as Amount Close the Page Types dialogue Column Export_3010 160030 Hint If you want to view the string of your query click the Show SQL string button a small message dial
22. FROM Export_3010 WHERE NOT Instr Export_3010 160010 M OR Instr Export_3010 160010 Q QQ 6 1 f UNION ALL UNION ALL can be used to execute a query in the same list twice or multiple times For example it can be used for multiple printing of labels Syntax SELECT lt selection gt UNION ALL SELECT lt selection gt Example SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 double printing or SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export_3010 triple printing VAL VAL converts a text into a number Syntax Val lt value gt Example SELECT FROM Export_3030A WHERE Val Export_3030A 160200 gt Val 4 00 and Val Export 3030A 160200 lt Val 8 00 Pagina 364 QQ Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 6 1 g UPPERCASE LOWERCASE It is not important for the SQL query whether upper case or lowercase is used inthe SEE Electrical database Example SELECT FROM Export 3100 WHERE Export 3100 12000005 COIL and SELECT FROM Export 3100 WHERE Export_3100 12000005 Coil provide the same result i e all records containing the Coil text are provided whether written in uppercase or lowercase QQ 6 1 h LOGICAL OPERATORS The operators AND OR and NOT are available QQ 6 1 i RELATIONAL OPERATORS The operators lt gt lt gt are avai
23. Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PE Function Location Product Management Function Description Unique product aspect on component El Ag Functions E q New Functi q New Fu 4 sofadofd ip New Functi ado A Function B1 Function Location Product Termina A 41 A 41 81 41 Location Description a l A El Ag Locations ee 284 ash fe to pa cm em li li li o im a li ak Kind of Document Page Function Page Location erminal Matrix C1 04 Terminal Matrix A4 Location A4 3 Cables list F amp L sorted rr 858 4 Cable Core list FEL sorted A4 Puid as 5 Terminal Plan 54 E Ag Products 5 Terminal Plan A4 we BI T Terminal Row Picture Plan 44 wy B2 8 Terminal Row Picture Plan 44 wy B3 wc AFI Product F Description separator If you double click on a page SEE Electrical opens it To load Function Location information trom project If the Function Location information from the project is not read properly when you open the Function Location Manager for the first time you can use this command to recover the missing data To collapse expand the Function Location tree If you click a function location and you execute the respective pop up command you can expand collapse the tree structure To use the Function Location Database
24. P gina 322 PP Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados To The last field in the Excel sheet that contains data about symbols You could specify a wider range than the just now defined one in order to avoid changes while adding component groups Sheet name For example Symbols name of the Excel sheet if you wish to change the sheet names in your Exceltable you must type valid names here Column Page template Enter here the letter of the column of the Exce table that contains the name of the page template that is to be used if needed Column module name Determine the letter of the column in the Excel table that contains the symbol names Column code Enter the column letter in the Exce table that contains s for page break Symbol database folder area PP Introducao Symbol database folder Database AutogenEN ses Folder E programs45EE Electrical Symbols Database Name of the symbol database that contains the groups for the automatic generation of circuit diagrams Folder Folder in the symbol database that contains all the groups needed for the automatic generation of the circuit diagrams Module positions area Module positions Use module begin and end markers Use and position Starts KO Column for position Start y 250 Column for position Mam 2 405 Pagina 323 Manual de treinamento electrical CO
25. Pagina 306 OO Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados OO 2 INSERTING SPARE OR GROUND TERMINALS VIA THE TERMINAL EDITOR A function allows you to insert spare ground terminals in the database Quick guide Insert spare terminals 1 Right click a line in the Terminal Editor list 2 Select the Add new component command The following dialogue appears Add new Spare Terminal Terminal row Chart value Function Terminal Humber Location Product Terminal Sorting teratior Amount of terminals Number offset Cancel This window allows you to easily define a lot of spare terminals in a single operation 3 Add the name of the terminal strip to which the spare terminals will belong Function Location and Product 4 Define the first terminal number and sorting in the Terminal number and Terminal sorting fields With Number offset you define the way in which terminal number if numerical value is given and terminal sorting are to be increased Please keep in mind that a terminal is uniquely specified by a terminal strip a terminal number and a terminal sorting If a terminal already exists it is not generated in here It is not possible to define the single levels of multilevel terminals here 5 Type in the desired values and click OK The spare terminals are inserted in the database list They al
26. This name replaces the symbol group name in the template placeholder text Cable Shield lt is used by all shields of this cable S Do not draw the shield in the cable plan The effect is the same as if this component text does not exist C lt n gt where lt n gt gives the number of the core which is connected to the shield n 1 the first core is connected to the shield n 2 the second core is connected to the shield n 0 the last core is connected to the shield 2 Template for the graphical Cable plan Add one or two placeholder texts Cable Shield to the template of the graphical Cable plan These placeholders mark the position of the Cable Shield right and or left The placeholder text can contain the following keywords S Name of the symbol library folder symbol name Default S Cables CablePlan Shield lf this placeholder exists the shield symbols defined in the circuit diagram cable symbols are not used Pagina 204 Y Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 Generate cable shield symbols for the graphical Cable plan A cable shield in the graphical Cable plan is constructed by symbols from a symbol group Such a symbol group consists of 7 symbols The default symbol group should be stored in the CABLES SES library in the folder CablePlan like follows Symbol from the library Description Cables CableP lan Shield This is the st
27. o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados H LEMBRETES A inser o de lembretes em objetos feita por meio de marca es gr ficas inseridas nos desenhos Esse comando tamb m est dispon vel no visualizador do software Os elementos marcados s o armazenados separadamente no banco de dados de forma que o desenho original n o seja modificado ou danificado Todos os objetos ficar o envoltos por uma nuvem em vermelho e s o salvos no plano 1 Ele consiste da parte gr fica e do texto de lembrete e s o processados em uma mesma opera o Exerc cio 7 1 Colocar um lembrete no motor da p gina 1 Abra a p gina 1 do projeto 1 CA Legendas e Detalhes 2 CO Nuvem 3 Clique o primeiro ponto da nuvem A nuvem definida por dois pontos diagonalmente opostos 4 Clique o segundo ponto da nuvem em um ponto oposto ao primeiro 5 Clique novamente para definir o ponto em que o texto de lembrete sera posicionado 6 Digite o texto de lembrete neste caso Informar pot ncia ki Tecle CTRL ENTER para iniciar uma nova linha de texto caso necess rio 8 Clique em OK para fechar a janela 9 Clique com o bot o esquerdo do moute ou tecle ENTER para finalizar o desenho A rea de lembrete ser mostrada Informar pot ncio Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para desabilitar a fun o Exerc cio 7 2 Editar e deslocar o lembrete inserido Existem coma
28. 3 If you want to recognize all patterns found in your workspace execute the RecognizeWorkspacePatterns command instead VV 2 4 DISPLAYING ALL ELEMENTS WITH LOGIC By using the MICAW command you can display all elements with electrical logic on the current sheet symbols potentials wires and standard sheets Exercise 44 5 Display all elements with electrical logic in the current sheet 1 Double click the command in the Commands explorer to execute it All logical elements are marked in green 12 Click anywhere in the drawing to display the elements without the green marking Pagina 414 VV Introdu o
29. 77 connection text Move the connection s text s if necessary Insert the required number of contacts Insert the contact symbol without a text placeholder for the component name from the symbol database Select all the elements of the symbol and group them into a Component symbol with auxiliary contacts SEE Electrical deletes the component names from the contact symbols Save the symbol in the symbol database M 5 8 PLC COMPONENTS For PLC components SEE Electrical differentiates between PLC racks and PLC signals inputs or outputs When the symbols are created properly the PLC racks receive cross references to the inputs and outputs and the inputs and outputs receive a back reference to the Rack A single input output always consists of the graphics and the following texts component name connection text s cross reference optional for the back reference to the Rack Address PLC comment optional description optional A PLC signal can be created via the Edit Actions Block command A PLC Rack consists of the component graphics the texts for the component component name connection texts comment and type and the number of PLC signals see above You can integrate the single elements into a PLC Rack using the Edit Actions Block command M Introdu o P gina 91 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservado
30. C E xK ht F_ 12000005 F_ 160040 F_1s0040 F 12000150 Estr Mal E 12000150 Wal F 150040 HEHHEE The result of the calculation Unit price x Number is a number This number must be formatted 2 decimal places by using the command Fstr lt value gt in the form 3 Edit Footer line The total for the whole project is recorded in the footer line Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 Line x i Eele Fatr oT otal HEHEHE HH TT The number is formatted by using the command Fstr lt value gt amp P gina 348 QQ Introdu o asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 8 LINE NUMBERING If you wish to print a current number per line each line number must be calculated Define a sum variable for the line numbers counter as described in the chapter Calculations using Project gt Sum variables 1 Define sum variable Sum Fariables E x Available sum variables a P E Counter Sums Over fi Edit E pression l correct Cancel 2 Edit data line After you define the sum variable the table can be edited The data line includes another record lt counter gt 1 in addition to the data lines Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 gt Line H K h p A F_12000005 F_160040 F_18004
31. COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 8 Inserir os bornes 2S f gt 8 9 gt 10 11 gt 12 13 gt 14 D Introdu o Movimente o cursor para a aba Simbolos Feche a pasta Relay contacis NO clicando no sinal de subtra o esquerda do nome da pasta D um duplo clique na pasta Terminals Clique no s mbolo 1 terminal 90 vertical Movimente o cursor para a area de desenho O s mbolo aparecer ligado ao cursor Solte o s mbolo na posi o desejada na coluna 2 entre o contato NA e o bot o Os dados do componente ser o solicitados Componente X Digite o nome da r gua de bornes N mero do borne j Preencha o n mero N mero de ordem O numero de ordem usado para classificar os bornes na lista de forma que components com identifica es como PE ou N apare am no local correto da lista de bornes Tipo 039061 Digite o tipo do borne P gina 35 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 15 gt OK Feche a caixa de di logo 16 Insira O pr ximo borne sob a chave O nome do borne ser perguntado 17 gt Componente 18 O nome do componente numero e indice do borne serao sugeridos 19 gt Tipo 20 039061 Digite o tipo do borne 21 gt OK A caixa de dialogo sera fechada Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para cancelar o modo de inser o Exerc cio
32. CRIANDO UM S MBOLO Tomaremos como exemplo um s mbolo composto por um ret ngulo e quarto retas Dicas 1 recomend vel o uso de um grid de 5 mm para o desenho de componentes de diagramas el tricos Voc pode desenhar novos componentes usando um grid de 5 mm 2 5 mm ou menos Certifique se de que o s mbolo criado se encaixa no grid de 5 mm especialmente se os pontos de conex o coincidem com ele Voc pode ajustar o grid no painel Estilos H tamb m uma fun o na categoria Visualizar que permite ligar ou desligar a visualiza o do grid 2 A largura da linha tamb m deve ser controlada A largura da linha para o desenho de conex es deve ser id ntica da usada no desenho dos fios A maior parte dos s mbolos inclu dos nas bibliotecas padr o do software possuem uma largura de linha de 0 25mm Exerc cio 12 1 Desenhe a parte gr fica do s mbolo Voc deve usar fun es simples de desenho como Linha Ret ngulo Circunfer ncia etc N o use conex es Crie uma nova p gina em seu projeto Desenhe a parte gr fica 1 CA Desenhar 2 CO Retangulo painel Elementos Desenhe um ret ngulo com 20 mm de largura e 5 mm de altura Isso poss vel com o grid padr o de 5mm A largura e altura do ret ngulo s o mostrados na barra de status abaixo da rea de desenho 3 Clique para definir o canto superior esquerdo do ret ngulo 4 Clique novamente para definir o canto inferior direito do retangulo 5 Clique c
33. FICA K 2 DEFINIR TEXTOS DA PAGINA PERMANENTEMENTE K 3 GERANDO TODAS AS LISTAS GR FICAS EM UM UNICO PASSO L INSERINDO OUTROS DOCUMENTOS M CRIANDO S MBOLOS M 1 CRIANDO UM S MBOLO M 2 MODIFICANDO S MBOLOS EXISTENTES M 2 1 APAGANDO ELEMENTOS M 2 2 ADICIONANDO ELEMENTOS M 2 3 ADICIONANDO TEXTOS M 2 4 DESLOCANDO TEXTOS 12 M 3 HANDLING GRAPHICS ERRO INDICADOR NAO DEFINIDO M 4 USING AVAILABLE COMPONENTS ERRO INDICADOR NAO DEFINIDO Pagina 3 A Introdu o Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados sea electrical M 5 INFORMATION ABOUT SPECIAL COMPONENTS AND THEIR CREATION ERRO INDICADOR N O DEFINIDO M 5 1 Contacts M 5 2 Terminals M 5 3 Multi Layer Terminals Standard M 5 4 Connectors M 5 5 Cross Reference Symbols M 5 6 Info Text Symbols M 5 7 Components with Auxiliary Contacts 12 Erro Indicador nao definido 12 Erro Indicador n o definido Erro Indicador n o definido Erro Indicador n o definido Erro Indicador n o definido M 5 7 a Symbols with cross reference as text 12 M 5 7 b Symbols with graphical contact symbols in it Erro Indicador nao definido M 5 7 c Examples of Components with Auxiliary Contacts Erro Indicador nao definido M 5 8 PLC Components 12 M 5 8 a Examples of PLC Components 12 M 5 9 Smart black box symbols 12 M 6 CABLE SYMBOLS 12 M 6 1 Creating User Defined Cable Symbols 12 M 6 2 Creating User Def
34. Graphical Symbol v Text placeholder for cable name for example W ID 180110 v Text placeholder for Type ID 180140 Example Type s where the placeholder s is replaced by the cable type v Text placeholder for Description ID 180142 Example Des s where the placeholder s is replaced by the cable description v Text placeholder for cable type ID 180144 Example Dim s where the placeholder s is replaced by the text cable type v Text placeholder for Length ID 180145 Example L s where the placeholder s is replaced by the length Block all these objects as Block Macro Group IL Introdu o Pagina 281 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Part 3 Generate routing information from cable to terminal This block consists of the same elements as the cable core left mirrored Block all these objects as Block Macro Group Select the blocks Routing information from cable to target Cable and Routing information from cable to terminal Block all these objects as Block Macro Group Position the number of lines on top of the minimum connection line Block all the objects as Page Template Title block 1 2 3 DESENHANDO CABOS GEOMETRY ON BOTH SIDES OF THE TERMINALS Torget right i 1 1 1 44 7 imo tol edit dtd ditt F 10 Coblelines ri p a E ER Ses E es ae i EEE AEA PEPER e EEEE
35. Multiple tables are separated with commas Example SELECT FROM Export 30104 Export 8011 Combine information with the help of SELECT Example for generation of combined result SELECT Export 3010 140050 Export 3010 140030 Export 3010 160010 AS NameCombined Export 3011 Manufacturer Export 3011 Goodsgroup AS Articledata FROM Export 3010 LEFT JOIN Export 3011 QQ 6 1 b SELECT DISTINCT The SELECT statement with the DISTINCT predicate allows you to avoid double records Syntax SELECT DISTINCT lt fields gt FROM lt table in Access database gt QQ Introdu o P gina 361 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example SELECT DISTINCT Export 3001 180015 Export_3001 180018 FROM Export_3001 QQ 6 1 c JOIN CLAUSE Databases usually contain a lot of tables JOIN clause is used for joining tables It enables you to list data that cannot be found in one table Example The list of cables contains information about the length of the cables but the list of cable cores does not contain such information If a list must contain information about cables length and cable cores it must be composed by matching data coming from both lists You can achieve this by joining the records of both lists You must define a SQL statement for example with a WHERE or ON clause Syntax of WHERE clause WHERE lt Condition for selectio n gt Conditio
36. Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 17 Desenhar mais uma coluna e copia la l Se E ey Insira novamente os bornes um contato NA e a lampada a partir do banco de dados de simbolos A l mpada esta na pasta Lamps Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o Para o contato NA selecione o nome 2K2 a partir da lista e numere os contatos como 13 e 14 Os bornes devem receber os nomes sugeridos e o tipo 036091 Desenhe a conex o executando o comando Diagrama el trico Conex o dos fios 1 1 Fio Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o Selecione o fio entre o borne e o potencial N para mudar o estilo e a cor da pena Voc poder copiar o conte do desta coluna conforme explicado anteriormente Aceite os nomes sugeridos para os bornes e preencha 2K3 como nome para o contato NA D Introdu o P gina 43 Manual de treinamento see electrical COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 18 Copie o terceiro contato NA 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt Dica Tis tibia ey AAEE Ap Ep Es or mt Clique no contato que voc deseja copiar Se o cursor n o aparecer como uma flecha clique em Geral Selecionar elementos Selecionar para ativar o modo de sele o O contato sera selecionado Mantenha a tecla CTRL e o bot o esquerdo do mouse pressionados e arraste o contato para a coluna 8
37. Workspace Properties l ES General List definition Workspace text Page text Object types Component text gt Revision Default for visualization of component types in drawings Ch ange Revison Date Automatically Show in muli line Function Location Function Location box 4 Use Function Location management 7 Group pages according to function Linetype Solid 4 Enable Function Location database J Enable Product database Change Function Location of cables Change Function Location of slaves Ln Win Meee T k Fik oe im a nline Messages Units Activate Messages 1 unt comespond to 1 mm Component properties Behavior for merging component Use properties from existing component If you work with function and location a component name consists of three parts function begins with location begins with and component name begins with In most cases the function and location are transferred from the legend of the standard sheet Exercise 25 1 Create a new workspace 1 CA File 2 CO New 3 gt File name Type ina name for the new workspace 4 gt Save 5 gt Choose the workspace template 6 gt Click OK to confirm AA Introducao Pagina 215 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 25 2 Change the properties of the workspace Y
38. eee sal DB Example 1 Product Amount by Description ved aah a J Description 00 Amount itor Wire E l Ta a Editor Document tl arara Editor PLC 1 0 B ap Editor Function amp Location isa 44 Editor Component without graphic o G 1 44 Check double naming O tor 2 pp Check overbooked contacts Bo Switch z 4 Check PLC Connections f Thermal relay 1 ap PrintList dp View Multicores 0 View Multicare wires 2 Product Amount by Description HH 1 1 DEFINITION OF GRAPHICAL FORMULAS Within the graphical lists the query is inserted as a normal text containing the following syntax QUERY lt name of query gt WHERE lt argument gt lt content gt HH Introdu o P gina 273 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados For example QUERY U APd WHERE APno 1 B Power electrical equipment Dascrigton of egupnent Power Ik QUERY U APd WHERE APno 1 QUERY UJ_APp WHERE APno 1 QUERY U_APd WHERE APnoo 2 OUER U_APp gWHERE 4Pno 2 EQUERT UU APPO WHERE APnoj 5 ZQUER 7 U APp WHERE APno 3 QUERY U 4Pd WHERE APno 4 QUERY U_APp WHERE APno 4 SUERY LU APd WHERE APnoJ 5 QUERY UU APp WHERE AFna 5 QUERY U_APd WHERE 4Pno E QUERY U_4Pp g WHERE 4Pno 67 OUERY U_APd WHERE 4Pne 7 HDUERY U_4Pp WHERE APra 7 QUERY U_APd WHERE APno 8 HQUERY U_APp gWHERE 4Pno a7 QUERY U_
39. mounted on right side you have to insert first the add on for the left side then the coil and after that the add on for the right side if a coil consists of the coil itself and an add on to be inserted on top of the coil you must insert the coil first and then the add on If you have to insert the first type of a component via the picklist and skip the others the component is not present in the pick list any more because the pick list contains only symbols inserted in the circuit diagram and not in the cabinet Then you have to use the Complete database component command to complete the component If symbols for the cabinet are used it is really important they have as much connection points as defined in the first line in the channel where is defined the cabinet symbol Pagina 374 RR Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados If you have to define a cabinet symbol for example in the first line in the channel definition and also in the second one the one defined in the first line needs to contain as much connection points as defined in the first line and the cabinet symbol attached to the second line needs to contain as much connection points as defined in the second line etc Hiding component names incase multiple symbols are used for a component lf you press the H key on the keyboard while placing the symbols the component name is hidden for all the follo
40. 14 gt Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next 15 The dimensions of the label are displayed Now you can make changes as needed You have to correct the respective record in the CMBTL901 INF file Adjust the format of your label if you have chosen User defined 16 gt Select the desired Print order 17 gt Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next 18 gt Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next 19 gt In most cases it is not necessary to generate a title line for the labels Uncheck the Add title line option 20 Done Close the window The designer for lists and labels appears Fie Ect Project Objects View 7 Oo BS sm S te et be ee Dija ba Finet Tet Double click here and replace this text with text in order to fill the label with data b D EBBk OO FE Select the fields to be printed on your label P gina 328 QQ Introdu o asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Open the variables list by clicking on the plus sign The displayed variables depend on the chosen database list List of variables BB Fo Drawingtypeid a fy F_180010 fi F 180015 BJ F 120010 BJ F 120020 Ab F 160020 BBY F 140020 BBY F 140050 BJ F 160010 SMi F FarsteO foounter BBY F_160030 AB F_160040 Ab F_160041 Ei 21 gt Click the desired variable You can find information a
41. 3 Control the assignment of patterns to SEE Electrical symbols 1 Execute the command The following window appears Patterns Symbol Browser x Pathernis Patterns Previews Symbols Symbol Previews alee a Xx Filter 4a gt lt Patterns 4 Relay coils a 5 5 Patterns i 1 pole a A e 1 pole AC relay g Lamp amp 1 pole contactor Potential K 1 pole detent Product i E Ipolebighspeed Description 00 ma 9 1 pole impedance 5 A eras ha 1 pole latched ta 1 pole non AC x 1 pole no voltage G o vg 1 pole overvoltage 1 pole polarized z One pole relay coil a a gt Test Mapping DK Cancel The e button exchanges a symbol you have chosen inthe SEE Elecirical symbol libraries with the one assigned to the pattern the one you see in Pattern Preview pane Via the Text Mapping button you can assign a text from the pattern to a text in the SEE Electrical symbol For instance in the example shown below you can define that the text Green foundin a position not commonly used by SEE Electrical is used later as a description All texts found ina similar position at a pattern similar to the switch will be recognized as Description P gina 412 VV Introdu o aaa S SC rica Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Text Mapping r Symbol texts E Patterns
42. 5 Insira as informa es do cabo Preencha as informa es na caixa de di logo conforme mostrado abaixo E Propriedades do Componente Fropredades visualizar Valor Exibir Componente WM 6 Descri o oo Fi Tipo U 1000 R2W 4 DE Ocul comprimento do T RR Descri o do Cabo N mero do Condut N mero do Condut N mero do Condut N mero do Condut Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor GNYE Se o do Condutor 2 0 SE O do Condutor 2 50 Se o do Condutor 2 50 Se o do Condutor 2 50 eleele SSG SSS5E08S8Se8sh Exibir Informa es do Componente Exibir Informa o de Cones es Exibir Informa o Avusiliar 6 gt Componente 74 Wi 8 gt Tipo 9 4 U 1000 R2V 4G2 5 Os n meros e cores ser o preenchidas automaticamente de acordo com o tipo de cabo selecionado Ative as caixas de verifica o na coluna Exibir para definir os dados que ser o mostrados no desenho 10 gt OK Desenhe o cabo W2 da mesma forma E Introdu o P gina 47 see trical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Preencha as informa es na caixa de di logo conforme mostrado abaixo E Propriedades do Componente Fropredades visualizar valor Exibir Componente wy Descri o DO 7 U 1000 R2 4 Ocul Comprimento doc o a Descri o do Cabo N mero do Condut N
43. 7 from this description again Pagina 116 O Introdu o Example for columns only gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Sort index O Sortindex 1 Sortindex 2 Sortindex 3 Sortindex 4 Sortindex 5 Sortindex 6 Sortindex 7 Sortindex 8 Sort index 9 Cell ER Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R Cell R 0 1 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 A Sort index O Sortindex 6 Sort index 12 Sort index 18 Sort index 24 Sort index 30 Sort index 36 Sort index 42 Sort index 48 Sort index 54 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R B Sort index 1 Sort index 7 Sort index 13 Sort index 19 Sort index 25 Sort index 31 Sort index 37 Sort index 43 Sort index 49 Sort index 55 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R c Sort index 2 Sort index 8 Sort index 14 Sort index 20 Sort index 26 Sort index 32 Sort index 38 Sort index 44 Sort index 50 Sort index 56 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R D Sort index 3 Sortindex 9 Sort index 15 Sort index 21 Sort index 27 Sort index 33 Sort index 39 Sort index 45 Sort index 51 Sort index 57 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Ce
44. ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 executes three times repeated printing 2 Print multiple labels serially List of products SELECT FROM Export 3010 ORDER BY Export 3010 160010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export 3010 ORDER BY Export 3010 160010 The same labels appear directly one after another for example S1 S1 F1 Fi Q1 Q1 M1 M1 P gina 358 QQ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3 For Labels for terminals List of spare parts it is necessary to create a link to the List of products in order to perform filtering on the components inthe circuit diagram SELECT FROM Export_3101 LEFT JOIN Export_3010 ON Export_3101 160010 Export_3010 160010 ORDER BY Export_3101 160010 UNION ALL SELECT FROM Export_3010 LEFT JOIN Export_3010 ON Export_3101 160010 Export_3010 160010 ORDER BY Export_30101 16001 0 QQ 4 5 LABELS FOR COMPONENT NAMES WITH DEFINED CONTENT It is possible to print labels only for defined component name content as follows P Only records with defined content SELECT FROM Export 3010 WHERE Instr Export 3010 160010 K OR Instr Export 3010 160010 S 2 Only records without defined content SELECT FROM Export 3010 WHERE NOT Instr Export 3010 160010 M OR Instr Export 3010 160010 Q QQ Introdu o P gina 359 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XA
45. Add a text with attribute description 00 to the block for the component inside the template the attribute is found in the Component section inthe Text Attributes Add a text with attribute type the attribute is found inthe Component section inthe Text Attributes If more than one type is defined in the component all types will be shown like type1 type2 etc Add texts with attributes function and location attribute is found in the Function amp Location section inthe Text Attributes Add a text with the attribute Connection text ID 180169 for example conn 1 This text defines the attributes for the connection point name and its position inside the symbol Add a text with the attribute Signal Name 1D 180170 for example S1 Pagina 298 MM Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados This text defines the attributes for the signal name and its position inside the symbol It can be used to add more information about the wire The value of the text defines the information which is shown You can position it max 6 times in the template and use the following codes N gt Cable core or wire number default flag C gt Cable core or wire colour C gt Cable core or wire colour and number if colour is empty S gt Cable core or wire size Q gt Cable core or wire signal P gt Cable core or wire potential CNN
46. COMMANDS IN LISTS AND LABELS 00 6 1 QQ 6 1 a QQ 6 1 b QQ 6 1 c QQ 6 1 d QQ 6 1 e QQ 6 1 f QQ 6 1 g QQ 6 1 h QQ 6 1 i 00 6 2 QQ 6 2 a QQ 6 2 b QQ 6 2 c QQ 6 2 d QQ 6 2 e QQ 6 2 f Q0 6 2 2 SOL Statements SELECT SELECT DISTINCT JOIN clause ORDER BY WHERE WHERE NOT UNION ALL Uppercase Lowercase Logical Operators Relational Operators Commands in Lists and Labels Conditions If Upper Lower Val Fstr AskString Len Left Right Relational Operators RR CABINET LAYOUT RR 1 DRAWING CABINET LAYOUTS RR 1 1 RR 1 2 With the Cabinets Module Without the Cabinets Module RR 2 USING LAYERS P gina 8 sea electrical A Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados RR 3 DIMENSION RR 4 COMPARISON BETWEEN CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND CABINETS SS USEFUL TOOLS SS 1 COMPRESSING PROJECTS SS 2 REORG ANIZE WORKSPACES TT SETTINGS TT 1 SYSTEM SETTINGS TI 2 WORKSPACE PROPERTIES TT 3 PROPERTIES FOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS TT 4 PAGE PROPERTIES TT 5 CUSTOMIZING THE INTERFACE TT 5 1 Quick Access Toolbar TT 5 2 Define Hotkeys TT 5 3 User Defined Categories UU COMMANDS EXPLORER VV INTELLIGENT DRAWING LEGACY MODULE VV 1 TOOLS FOR SCANNED DRAWINGS WTI Importing Multiple Scanned Drawings in One Step VV 1 2 Covering Scanned Symbols with an White Area BkSymbol Command VV 2 TOOLS FOR MAKING DXF DWG IM
47. Caso a numera o dos componentes esteja vinculada ao n mero da p gina os nomes dos itens j inseridos n o podem ser modificados O ndice da p gina permite a inser o sem mudan a da numera o das j existentes Exerc cio 6 8 Inserir a p gina 1A no projeto Crie uma nova p gina usando o procedimento j aplicado Informa o da pagina P gina indice A Data Cria o da P gina 62013 Data Revis o da P gina Revis o da P gina m P gina Criada p r Descri o da P gina Linha D Descri o da P gina Linha Descri o da P gina Linha Descri o da P gina Linha O Descri o da P gina Linha Ob Desig Fa ee en eta Data po ee ee Mt LEE dd 1 gt Pagina 2 4 1 oS Indice 4 A Digite o indice da pagina 5 gt OK A pagina sera criada F Introdu o P gina 53 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Dica Insira o s mbolo de uma l mpada na p gina 1A Se o projeto vincular o nome do componente com o n mero da p gina ele ser apresentado como 1AP0 Ao desenhar o potencial L1 na pagina 1A a refer ncia cruzada nas p ginas 1 e 2 ser o atualizadas O mesmo acontecer com as refer ncias cruzadas nas bobinas e contatos Pagina 1 Pagina 14 1K HEN taPo CX Exercicio 6 9 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar Pagina 54 F Introdu o as selectrical Manual de treina
48. Change the settings for New Font Name New Font Height New Font Width and New Font Distance for each of the different fonts and the combinations of text attributes In case you need to use a different code page than the default one it is possible to choose the appropriate script when defining the font The script you defined appears in the New Font Script field but cannot be changed 11 Save your changes with the help of the Set font mapping button 12 Close the window with Cancel 13 CO FontToolChangeSingleProject 14 Define the project to replace the fonts in the current project is suggested by default 15 Press the button to choose another project 16 Choose the XML file to take the mapping information from in the Set XML file to export text field 17 Press the Es button to open and load the desired folder and then select the XML file 18 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button 19 Press the Replace projects text button to start the replacing process Exercise 29 4 Finding and changing all fonts used in several workspaces 1 CO FontT oolReadProjects 2 Press the Es button within the Projects area to define the projecis to scan for fonis 3 Press the x button if you want to remove a project from the list 4 gt Define the XML file to write the font settings into in the Set XML file to export text field P gina 256 EE Introdu o sea electr
49. Clique com o bot o direito do mouse P gina 76 M Introdu o ag o ec rica Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3 CO Desagrupar Execute o comando a partir do menu suspenso 4 CA Desenhar 5 CO Novo texto painel Elementos Os novos textos poderao ser inseridos Pesquisar qualquer parte do texto BD de Tradu o Propriedades Propriedades B sicas Atributo Texto nomnal Fonte N mero fonte vetorial 1 Mus 350 Ditrcia 070 Ange 000 Dist ncia da Linha 350 CE E Ss a Exibir propriedades avan adas 6 gt Atributo Defina o atributo dos textos Selecione o a partir da lista Nela est o os seguintes grupos de atributos v Projeto Conte do v Fun o Localiza o Componente v Conex o e Outro 7 gt Componente Abra o n Componente Aqui est o textos como nome do componente ndice descri o e tipo assim como textos descritivos 8 gt Descri o 01 D um duplo clique no atributo Descri o 01 M Introdu o P gina 77 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 9 12V Digite o texto 10 gt Alinhado a direita O texto deve ser alinhado a direita 11 4 Insira o texto do lado esquerdo do simbolo Se a caixa de di logo Texto estiver sobre o local em que voc deseja inserir o texto poss vel mov la Clique com o bot o esquerdo do mouse
50. Electrical Exercise 42 6 Assign Change an icon for a command 1 gt In the Customizer window select the ETINFO command in your Training category 2 gt Right click and select the Set Image pop up command 3 gt New A new icon must be created Picture Load Select Color Clear Preview Cancel 6 Construct a new icon To change the default drawing colour click the Select colour button is OK Click OK to finish the construction of the new icon 7 gt Save Save the changes you made in the Customizer TT Introdu o P gina 401 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Zaa e ectrical UU COMMANDS EXPLORER The Commands explorer can be used to access commands provided with SEE Electrical or defined by the user In case it is not visible you can display it by executing the Home View Commands command E ri ri ri ri ri ri ra ri ri ri ri ra ra ri ra ri rs ro JF ra rt ri uP go ri ri r s r PE ar e ar e ar e ar e srta sto r a prt srta ar e ar e ar e srta ar Ta ar i ar Ta a 2 Ta a srta a oF ta ur Ta AR SF RF 4 SF SF SF SF SF SF OS R A OU OU ar A a her 7 SF Sn Tar e Sn a0 ew i ai he ai 7 a na na i o na a na na s 0 pe 2 i i 2 i I Ce I ne E sE th CeT Cei Cei L Pa gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt st st a a st i F a pk pk pak a a a jk jk F A a E Copy Commands Advanced
51. Explorer select the current page under Graphical Lisis File Save as P gina 123 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 CO Page Template 5 lt name gt 6 gt OK Exercise 15 14 Select a template for a graphical list as follows You can select the template for the graphical list in the Properties dialogue box 1 In the Workspace Explorer select the graphical list which you would like to select a new template for 2 Right click 3 CO Properties 4 gt Select your new template Click the icon to select the desired template A pop up list appears including all of the templates for graphical lists Select the template 5 gt OK The setting for the template has been saved within the workspace If you create a new workspace template you can select new templates for graphical lists too Examples for text placeholders from database lists You will find detailed information about all the lists in The Graphical Lists chapter of the software s Help List of products Function Location Pagina 124 P Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados P 2 FORMATTING TEMPLATES FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS The format of graphical lists except for Terminal matrix Terminal plan Terminal row picture Cable Terminal row plan connector matrix connector plan and Assembly list can be customized b
52. INSS Add a text with the attribute Target Name ID 180171 for example 77 This text defines the attributes for the target name and its position inside the symbol Placing distance ID 180172 dx O E F _ oo ZE Placing order ID 180173 Placing distance ID MB Project Oroving no aart ese sooo Londan 1234 Dole Page Graphical symbol MM Introdu o P gina 299 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The graphical symbol contains 3 parts P gina 300 Signal line Shite beametry Draw a line ID 1 and block it as Signal line The line has to be strictly vertical This line defines the length of the connection lines If in the parent group of this line there are other elements they will be placed in the symbol too aw a line ID 1 and block it as Symbol height The line has to be strictly vertical The line defines the height of the symbol Draw geometry by using the Draw Elements Line command part of a rectangle This geometry is used to generate the rectangle for the components Block the 3 parts as Block Macro Group MM Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados NN MULTICORES Advanced NN 1 USING MULTICORES Multicores are used for drawing a wire that must contain multiple c
53. L1 ColorBk sSize 1 5 Type L1 POTENTIAL J Fail Number L1 ColorBk size 1 5 Type L1 POTENTIAL 0 1 P gina 212 Z Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The following formatting options are available Pre Wire list Post Wire list Textile Wire list Pre wireList de WireList BEGI Formating Yalues General nse line Estab In this field you have the possibility to define a title for the wiring list v n defines the beginning of a new line v t defines if the values of this area should be inserted with a tabulation to the right For the Post Wire list the same rules apply If a line is not desired leave it empty Pre Wire Post Wire Vi ire Sha ia frivtire SH Formating Values Wire SH Swe counter In this field you have the possibility to specify a title for the wire network v n defines the beginning of a new line v t defines if the values of this area should be inserted with a tabulation to the right v displays the order number For the Post Wire the same rules apply If a line is not desired leave it empty Pre Wire Part Post WirePart Wire Part Preduire Part fret umber h Colorgl In this field you have the possibility to specify a title for a network part wires with the same wire properties v ndefines the beginning of a new line v t defines if the values of this area should be inserted with a tabulation to the right v
54. Language French Moteur Update text in translation database 0K Cancel M2 Motor Exercise 29 2 Update a translated text in your works pace 1 CO Functions O Other Update Translated Text Select the text whose translation you wish to update Select the language from the Language pull down list in the dialogue that appears Fillin the new text An additional option allows you to modify or add a text into the translation database 5 gt OK The modified translation is inserted into the translation database oy EE Introdu o Pagina 253 see elis ctrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 8 4 LOOKING UP TEXTS IN THE TRANSLATION DATABASE lf you use a text frequently it must be written at all the places in the same way When you use the Draw Elements New or Edit Text Edit Text commands you can look up inthe translation database while entering the text if the text is available and how it was written exactly In this way you can avoid different spellings and reduce errors F ee aj Search any part of text Search text in Translation database Properties Basic Properties attribute MomalTet Font Vectorfont number 1 Height Distance Angle Width Line Distance Show advanced properties
55. Location and or Product to a component without graphic Make sure the Amount value is 1 otherwise you generate duplicated components If you want to create a component spare terminal or cable with a name already existing in the diagrams the entry will not be created v add an amount to a component without graphic for example add 1000 labels Make sure not to define a component name in this case otherwise you generate duplicated components v add new component properties to the components without graphic 4 Select a row on the left pane of the window o In the right pane open the pull down list of properties in the last row Text Value Product Description 00 Type Amount 1 Description 1 Description 02 Description 03 Description 04 Description OS Description DE Description OF Description 08 Description 09 Description 10 Description 11 Description 12 6 Type a text value for the property and press Enter A new row appears automatically allowing you to add more component properties Notes 1 You can also add terminals without graphic using this Editor For further details about creating terminals see also Erro Fonte de refer ncia nao encontrada 2 You can also add cables without graphic using this Editor For further details about creating cables see also Erro Fonte de refer ncia nao encontrada P gina 304 OO Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento CO
56. M Introdu o P gina 87 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados v S mbolos de refer ncia cruzada em projetos com potenciais S mbolos de ref ncia cruzada consistem da parte gr fica e textos de Componente e Refer ncia Folha Coluna caixa de di logo Texto Atributos Componente e um s mbolo de conex o Se o s mbolo de conex o for inserido manualmente o campo ficar vazio Se o s mbolo for inserido automaticamente o texto de conex o ficar vis vel Neste caso o texto de conex o deve ser apagado de forma que apenas o s mbolo de conex o permane a Tecle F6 para ativar o comando Selecionar parcial selecione o texto de conex o e apague o Se v rios s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada possu rem o mesmo nome poss vel definir um ndice para que exista uma sequ ncia de v nculos entre eles Deve haver sempre apenas dois s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada com o mesmo nome e ndice pois esta a unica maneira para que exista o endere amento correto j O campo de texto de ndice precisa ter o atributo Indice do componente pode ser encontrado na divis o Componente O texto deve ser posicionado manualmente antes que o s mbolo seja agrupado Se voc renomear um s mbolo de refer ncia cruzada que possua ndice apenas o nome do simbolo que possui o mesmo nome e ndice ser modificado v S mbolos de refer ncia cruzada em projetos c
57. M 8 5 FAVORITES SYMBOL FOLDER You can create your own user defined symbol folder named Favorites By adding a symbol to this folder you will create a shortcut to the referred symbol whichever database it belongs to Right click the desired symbol and execute the Add to Favorites pop up command The selected symbol is added to the Favorites symbol folder You can add any symbols selected according to your needs to the Favorites symbol folder Favorites are stored in the registry settings as a string list inthe General Favorites key The Favorites symbol folder is related to every module e g Circuit Diagram Installation etc It automatically expands and clears and collapses at filtering When you right click a symbol from this folder and execute the Properties command the favourite symbol properties for the present case will display the full link path Component Properties Name EN61 346 2UE4LampssLamp Description 0K TE Cancel M 8 6 SYMBOL DATABASE CONNECTION TO MODULES Since the number of the symbol databases within SEE Electrical is considerable the symbol databases are allocated to the respective modules before they are displayed So a particular symbol database is connected to the module used Pagina 102 M Introdu o Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados You can specify which databases to allocate To do t
58. Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 4 Desenhar o potencial N 1 CA Diagrama El trico 2 CO Inferior barra Potencial 3 gt Componente 4H 5 gt OK A caixa de dialogo sera fechada Modifique o estilo e cor da pena novamente S lida e preta 6 Na barra Estilos modifique para S lida 7 Na barra Estilos modifique a cor para preta Exerc cio 4 5 Inserir o s mbolo da bobina Inserir a primeira bobina P gina 30 Selecionar o banco de dados de s mbolos EN61346 2UK Movimente o cursor para a aba S mbolos D um duplo clique no banco de dados de s mbolos EN61346 2Uk ou Pegue no sinal de adi o a esquerda do banco de dados de s mbolos O banco de dados de s mbolos ser aberto e suas pastas ficar o vis veis D Introdu o gza e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 D um duplo clique na pasta Relay coils para abri la Se a pasta de s mbolos desejada n o estiver aberta use a barra de rolagem para encontr la 3 Selecione o componente 1 pole 4 Movimente o cursor para o desenho O s mbolo aparecer ligado ao cursor 5 Solte o s mbolo na posi o desejada do desenho na coluna 2 A refer ncia em cruz aparecer em baixo da bobina Dica Voc poder mudar a posi o da refer ncia em cruz se necess rio Exerc cio 4 6 Inserir o
59. Nesta pasta est o arquivo de banco de dados de tradu o TRANSLATIONNEW MDB usado pelo SEE Electrical Advanced para a tradu o de projetos A Introdu o P gina 15 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados B CRIANDO UM NOVO PROJETO Exerc cio 2 1 Criar um novo projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Novo Novo Projeto Salvar em E Projects X A ed caderno 1 Nes WB Caderno 2 Documentos ed Caderno 5 recentes WB convers o NB Example 1 NB Example Z NB Example 3 4ukoList NB Example converter terminals with header far PE Example Houseinstallation Deskto i Example mixed terminals EB Example Multi layer terminals WB Example SpareTerminals not in Grafic NB Example Terminals on rails Meus documentos Meu computador Meus locais de sale Nome do arquivo Meu projeto EE Salvar como tipo Projeto El trico sep Cancelar 3 gt Nome do arquivo 4 Meu Projeto Voc podera dar um novo nome ao projeto se desejar 5 gt Salvar P gina 16 B Introdu o 6 gt f gt 12 gt 13 B Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O projeto ser criado Uma lista de modelos para projetos aparecer Selecionar Modelo EN Standard Solidworks Standard C Cae lt Selecionar modelo gt Selecione um modelo para projetos Um modelo para projeto
60. PAGE TEMPLATE Zaa electrical You can save the standard sheet created in the previous section as a page template Before you save the page template look at the current properties because a page template consists of the standard sheet and the appropriate properties Exercise 14 8 1 2 3 CO 4 gt P gina 118 Verify and change in necessary the properties for the page template In the Workspace tree select the page that you are currently editing Right click with the mouse Execute the Properties pop up command The Properties window appears in the right pane of the main SEE Electrical window displaying the properties of the current page Look at the properties that you can set Change some properties as desired Properties Name Extension of Page Y Extension of Page Grid size in X Grid size in Y Position for the first top potential Position for the first bottom potential Margin potential left side Margin potential right side Distance from potential to contact reference Scale Symbol scaling Grid X Origin Grid Origin Orientation grid X Orientation grid Print in landscape Scale factor for print line Top potential margin for autoconnect Bottom potential margin for autoconnect Page template file name Page template sections Object Property specifying the object kind Value CCADDoc 297 000000 5 000000 5 000000 37 000000 20 000000 17 500000 17 500000 10 000000
61. Page template PogeBbredk 0 ed SS se Cablename cooLenone righi A cobletines nghi Term No Connection Pc summer Za renis a E cn o E Lak H Connection oO FELEN Coblenome Leii J LobleLines m E DE EE E EO Pr a EAO E A E E oo Pagina 196 X Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 Insert the elements of a terminal matrix or a terminal plan as described Do not insert the placeholders for the terminal strip and number You can use an existing template and delete the geometry texts that you do not need Pogebreok 0 Nese sias das Mas HS polh coblenone righi 4 coblelnes nghi l TEL unks 60 ZELEN m C 2 Add a Normal text attribute to the content PageBreak 0 or PageBreak 0 Lines 8 for example where Lines 8 indicates that the terminal strip header will use the space for eight terminal lines if you do not use any Lines string to specify the terminal row header the space will be calculated from the graphics in the template The text Pagebreak in the template can be used to control the generation of the new page PageBreak 0 Multiple terminal strips are generated on one page like before a new page is generated only when the previous page is already filled PageBreak 1 or PageBreak 160010 or PageBreak are used to start a new page f the name of the
62. Properties E General Fe Reference Coil Wires ii Cables Descriptions Text parameters Colt Height ManContact athe Normally closed Bee Normally open Text Line dist Changer Contact mirror v Use contactmiror Use contactcross Default miror symbols folder Types ha irors ea electrical lf you want to use article data with your coils follow the rules defined in the next chapter Pagina 140 T Introdu o Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados T 1 MANIPULATING THE TYPE DATABASE lf you decide to use the article data on a coil the contact mirror provides information about contacts available in a relay coil and about contacis already used The contact mirror can be created correctly only if it is known which contacts are available in the coil i e what type the coil possesses The way of constructing the contact mirror is defined in the so called Channel definition This can be performed inthe Type database Exercise 18 3 Create a new Manufacturer 1 CA Functions 2 CO Database Types panel E Type Database Manager Types Manufacturer GoodsGroup View Functions Import Export Properties os am 000018 H AMPHENOL 000020 B ANIXTER Sg BELDEN Sg BINDER C 000022 pau 000024 BRYANT o 000156 CABLES PIRELLI Record 1 H E CANNON H E CARLO GAVAZZI ee pe E CAROL p Width 0 3 070866141732
63. Rectangle around the wires 2 Right click it and select the Block pop up command 3 Choose the Smart black box symbol from the list 4 Type in the code for the symbol 5 T Specify the lines that will automatically generate connection poinis he connection points are automatically created Hint You can zoom in or out an intelligent black box symbol whose outline was generated as a rectangle as follows press the CTRL and SHIFT key on the keyboard at the same time and identify the rectangle while these keys are pressed Only the rectangle is now selected and you can change its size when the default setting Trackers on the selected elements is active Please make sure that you never change the size of an intelligent black box symbol when connections are already connected M Introdu o P gina 95 Zaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 6 CABLE SYMBOLS Advanced You can create user defined cables and use them later when necessary M 6 1 CREATING USER DEFINED CABLE SYMBOLS Cable symbols consist of the graphic and the text placeholders for component name function type length 2 connection symbols without text cable core number cable core colour and cable core section The symbol must be created with the correct angle Two examples of Connections Text Graphics L x W E Dis SO Function F 4100 m Lable ype mmm
64. SF0 8 makes all the symbols smaller by the factor 0 8 SX or SY define limits for the component in X Y direction Example SX100 If the extension of a symbol in X direction is greater than 100 mm then the scaling factor for this special component is defined so that its extension in X direction is less than or equal lt 100 mm SY applies adequately Explicit component text insertion The Function Location Product Description and Type component texts can be displayed at places different from those where they are located within the symbol in the Circuit diagram The texts are located outside a rectangle that frames the symbol You must define the position of the texts in the Form for the Cable plan as follows Insert a text with a Function Location Component name Description and or Type attribute If you do not work with Function Location you do not need to insert the placeholders If the Function must be shown at the place where the text is located at the symbol in the Circuit diagram do not insert this text etc Pagina 278 Il Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados If the text placeholder for the component name contains the signs the Function and Location as well as the Component name appear consecutively in this text Enter one of the following definitions in the placeholder for the left target of the terminals v MTXO place the text on
65. Vire number Vire Ty pe LINK type Lockyire Signal Potential Cancel The information about the colour and the size of the wire is important if you work with Wires list You can use various ways to assign the desired values to the wires It is your choice which one to use In the Properties window of a wire you can switch on off the visibility for the texts of the wire segments Show wire number Qn show potential On Show wire size On Show wire colour On The segment text will be displayed only in case a wire text is displayed from the Circuit diagram Properties and the Wire properties If the visibility is switched off for a wire the option for the wire segment will not have any importance The visibility is determined in the following way wire segment a f Wire segment D a A es wire segment c eee Wire segment d signal type setup ar Net B General behavior for wire attributes Net L Pagina 178 W Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 8 DEFINE THE POSITION OF THE WIRE TEXT lt is possible to define the position of the text attributes for the wire number colour and size If you use Signal type of wire it is possible to define additionally the attributes and the position of the potential name The positions of the wire properties have to be defined ina symbol To define the settin
66. XAO Todos os direitos reservados R 2 PLC FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE STANDARD LEVEL R 2 1 USING THE PLC DATABASE In SEE Electrical Standard level there is a possibility to make sure you assign only those PLC addresses used in the rack if there is one To do so proceed as follows when arg the name and the PLC address to a PLC I O give the name first After that you can click the Bb button in the Connection line or in the PLC address line Connection 00 4 PLCaddress 7 i After that a window appears that shows all the PLC addresses defined in the rack If PLC description or PLC comment is defined in the rack you see the appropriate information An entry in the column Code Cell reference shows this I O is already used en Stort Motor 1 as al l e 161 Ea stort Motor 2 oS Properties Preview 402 ns Value F Sort Motor 3 a 1K41 7 eoo Connection 00 4 17 3 Stort Motor 4 PLO address 7 PLC description Ti 17 4 PLO comment Short Matar 5 FPLC address FPLC description FPLC comment Sheet Palh Reference 10 0 Start Motor 1 Start Motor 2 10 2 Start Motor 3 10 3 Start Motor 4 10 4 Start Motor 5 4 Review If a Rack is already placed it will be checked while inserting the inouts outputs if the address is already available and if the number of connections at the input output complies with the number of the connections at the Rack input output An error
67. a contact cross Exercise 18 1 Check the circuit diagram properties for the project A contact mirror instead of a contact cross must be used in the future You can save this setting in your workspace template 1 Click Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3CO Properties The Circuit Diagrams Properties dialogue box appears 4 T Coil Select the Coil tab 5 gt Use contact mirror Tick the option 6 gt OK Exercise 18 2 Use contact mirror if the article information is not defined A symbol database with the symbol for the contact mirrors has to be defined in the Coil tab of the Circuit Diagrams Properties window The first symbol in the symbols folder that has the same symbol ID as the already inserted contact is used for the building of the contact mirror For example if inthe symbols folder you have two symbols with ID for the main contact one single pole and one three pole the first one is used Additionally you have to activate the Use contact mirror option 1 Click Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click 3 CO Properties The Circuit Diagrams Properties window appears 4 1 Coil Select the Coil tab 5 gt Choose the Default mirror symbol folder to use 6 gt Choose the Types library and in there the Mirrors folder T Introdu o P gina 139 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 6 gt OK Circuit Diagrams
68. a specific condition although the previous page has not been finished yet If you work with a group header you can define the condition for your list too Table Contents Line Definition 1 1 Line Ee x y E ableQ01 1 40050 Cable001 1 40020 a Options Change Cond Layout Appearance Cond E Bl Appearance Background Font Test Format E Layout Alignment Blank Optimization Justified Line Wrap Separator Spacing Vert Alignment Width Appearance res Arial Normal Text T left False No False No False Clip True res 0 039 0 020 0 039 0 0 T top 1 275 1 275 in cancel _ Change Cond 7 Select to type the condition Pagina 352 QQ Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Options Select _ Ortons and define page break after group changing e group will be started on a new page possibly with others alzo requesting 4 page break o L F Fa Edit Group Change Identification E a x variables and Functions Functions Test Condi Datei FS tr l ba Functions E Numerical functions Date functions String functions Misc functions Barcode functions Conversion functions Project and Print dependent functions Logical functions Drawing functions Currency functions Inser
69. allows changing the page template in all of the circuit diagrams in a single operation In the Document Editor you can select the pages for which you want to change the template and execute the Change Page template on all pages pop up command The File 1 Open Page Template command allows changing the page template for the current page You can choose whether other objects to remain on the page or not In both cases the page templates settings have an effect on the components i e the component names may be customized EE Introdu o Pagina 249 a e ectri cal Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados FE 8 TRANSLATING A WORKSPACE Advanced The Functions Other Translate command allows you to translate all texts contained in the circuit diagrams at the same time consequently all texts in the existing graphical lists too Era a ma Translation Languages setup Position of following language Lanquage Font Position Same line Source Language Alba oe 7 Danish Arial French Vectorfont numb Translation setup Dutch Vectorfont numb Spanish Vectorfont numb Translate parts of phrase Source Language Danish French te M kabel PER en meen a number of flere j forkorte make the edit better because this is not i stand til unormal vedrerende over slitage 4 Recor
70. an available contactor or a motor protective switch P gina 149 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados T 3 AUXILIARY CONTACTS INSIDE ADD ONS FOR COILS AND SUBTYPES Components do not always consist of only one element they are often assembled from several elements or elements can be added to an article Fuses are typical examples of components assembled from several articles They always consist of a socket a fuse link a screw cap and a fitting screw In SEE Electrical these parts are called subtypes For a relay coil an add on is needed sometimes but sometimes not Therefore SEE Electrical offers two different approaches All of the articles must be stored in the type database Exercise 18 12 Assign an add on for a relay coil 1 Double click the relay coil 2 Go into the type database and select a second type Selected STB461 FOBES 3TB471 DBES 3 Close the Type Database Browser dialogue by clicking OK Properties Value Product K2 Description oo Type 618461 70864 3784 Db Connection DO Connection 01 ComponentCo 3 Both types are separated by a semicolon in the Type field of the Component Properties dialogue box You can assign up to 10 types to a component Look at the Products list A column Type 02 with the second type is created Look at the Parts list aft
71. as 3 CO Workspace template 4 lt name of the template gt 5 gt Save If you create a new workspace by using this template the newly created page template applies to all new circuit diagram pages of the workspace If you need to use different templates on different pages it is possible to change the page template via the File Open Page template command as described above Exercise 14 13 Close the workspace template to prevent undesired changes 1 Click on the workspace name in the Workspace tree 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Close Workspace O Introdu o P gina 121 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 0 4 QUICKREFERENCE TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS Workspace Template gt File 1 Open O Workspace Select the Templates directory Select template lt Name gt SEP Workspace Properties gt lt Name gt SEP in the Workspace Explorer pop up menu Function Location settings Revision Circuit Diagram Properties gt Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer pop up menu Component Numbering etc Select a page template Page Template gt lt Name gt I DW Create Standard sheet Draw graphics Block Page Template Title block Page Properties gt Page inthe Workspace Explorer pop up menu Number of columns in page Position of Potentials Grid size Save Page t
72. be consecutive to the one you defined for the first one 5 Open the list of pages in the source workspace and mark the pages you want to copy i Pagina 248 EE Introdu o gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados e 6 With the button move the selected page to the target workspace cl Circuit diagrams EN heg 0001 oe DOZ levee 0 0 0 3 lf you make a mistake you can mark the pages in the temporary target workspace and remove them cee by pressing the Es button 7 If you want to copy more pages insert the new Start page 2 again select the pages to be copied and move them to the target workspace 8 Use the Start to copy page s button to copy the pages to the target workspace 9 Close the Copy pages window and open the target workspace If inthe pages exist terminal strips or cables their names will be changed For example from X1 and We to X1 0001 or W2 0001 to avoid duplicate names You have to rename them manually or in the database editors The names of the slaves that are onthe same page as their master are changed according the change of the name of the master If the slaves are located on a different page you have to control their names EE 7 CHANGING PAGE TEMPLATES lt is possible to change page templates for all circuit diagrams at the same time or for a single page The Functions O Change Page template on all pages command
73. cable lines left the same rules apply as for the numbers of lines for terminals The following characters determine the appearance of the text text is not shown text is always shown cable core or wire square is shown only if cable core or wire number is not empty Example gt cable core square is not shown wire square is always shown Cable name right The same rules apply as for the cable texts left Cable type right The same rules apply as for the cable texts left Cable description right The same rules apply as for the cable texts left Cable core Number right The same rules apply as for the cable texts left P gina 187 sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Cable core section right Numbers of cable lines right the same rules apply as for the number of lines for terminals Additional texts can be entered manually Define the text placeholders for the bridges ho i IM2 PE L Target You need one text placeholder with the LINK Type text attribute v If the bridge type is not in between 1 to 10 if this text contains the letter P then bridges identified via potentials are displayed O gt bridges identified via wires are displayed v 1 to 10 bridges of the appropriate LINK Type are shown 6 symbols reference point PN symbol Fes Syrrigd 2 ds Syria 5 ER ayrrbol 4 E grbo 2 a 7 a h
74. caixas de di logo depender da sequ ncia em que os components foram inseridos ou deslocados O nome do borne ser solicitado Componente X3 ser sugerido por padr o Insira o n mero do borne 5 Insira o mesmo valor para ndice Para os n veis standard e superiors do SEE Electrical ao final de Numero do conector e N mero de ordena o h o cone E Esta fun o permite a busca do valor mais alto na r gua 1 sendo a mesma fun o dispon vel no ndice OK O nome do contato NF sera perguntado Componente 2K3 Clique no bot o do campo Componente D Introdu o P gina 41 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A janela Componente Fun o Localiza o aparecer com uma lista das bobinas em USO 8 gt 2K3 Selecione a bobina a partir da lista 9 gt OK Exerc cio 4 15 Desfazer a sele o dos componente 1 Clique com o bot o esquerdo do mouse em algum ponto vazio da tela Exerc cio 4 16 Desenhar a conex o faltante 4 4 53 Fay 4 Fy ee 1 CA Diagrama eletrico 2 CO 1 fio a partir do painel Conexao dos fios 3 Defina o primeiro ponto na conex o vertical 4 Defina o segundo ponto do fio 5 Defina o ponto final da conex o no borne 6 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o P gina 42 D Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO
75. clients of course will also benefit from this as they now can assign the clients type database to the client workspace s lf a type database different from the TYPES SES is used this is defined via a command The Set type database command allows you to select the new database to use with the current workspace The definition is saved in the workspace or workspace template Assign type database to multiple workspaces The Set MultiT ype DB command allows to assign a type database to multiple workspaces or to all in one folder It can only be executed if no workspace is open First select the type database to use via the Select type database field The icon E allows you to select several workspaces The icon allows you to select folders where all workspaces will be treated Set type database applies the type data base selected to all workspaces defined V Introdu o P gina 167 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W WIRE PROPERTIES Standard W 1 WIRE DIRECTION SEE Electrical standard offers you the possibility to use wire direction instead of the node rh mm F Fi F F KS al 15 You can change the wire direction via the Electrical Wires Direction command Click on the node the wire direction will be changed Right click Circuit Diagrams within the Workspace Explorer Execute the P
76. columns in the page 1 CA File 2 CO List and Label List and Label CI Brady tht 53 424 3 bl CE Dymo lLP219 Cable Ist CI Dymo ILP219 Products st CI Dymo lLP219 Wirenumbers st 3 M File Click the File menu in the List and Label window 4 M New Label 5 lt name gt Type the name of the new template 6 M Save The following window appears Select Datasource Select datasource Use custom SOL as datasource 7 gt Select data source Select the database from those included inthe SEE Electrical database lists which contains the fields you wish to be recorder in the label Only one list can be selected 8 gt View Products 9 gt Next QQ Introdu o P gina 327 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 10 gt Next Click Next to close the Project Wizard 11 Select the printer and other print options 12 gt Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next 13 gt Select the template for your label that you wish to print If the desired template for your label is not in the list you may select User defined and enter the size of the label manually Size of the often used labels can be saved in the CMBTL901 INF file in the folder of SEE Electrical you will find the description of this file structure in the User Manual By the Only show templates for current page settings option you can specify whether all templates have to be displayed or not
77. connector s name contains only the function and location information in case they are different from the ones found on the page 8 Group all symbols the macro group for the standard sheet and the macro group for the single terminals as a Page Template Title Block symbol 9 Save the new page template JJ Introdu o P gina 289 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados JJ 4 CONNECTOR PLAN Advanced Connector Plugged lo Connector Plugged lo Connector Plan i o o oh ms i E ma oc o E a a o 1 O a E Descrp fon Descr p ion sngdtg int Perg Ea GU om FS Esorpie 1 Fer London 4 2 Ra Ra a 7017 a 1 The Connector plan is created following the same rules as the Terminal Row Picture but of course it shows connectors and their pins More information about creating of templates you can find in the Manual Pagina 290 JJ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados KK TERMINAL ROW PICTURE PLAN Advanced KK 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL ROW PICTURE PLAN The Terminal Row Picture Plan enables you to insert a specific symbol for each terminal For example if single terminals in a terminal strip are mixed with multi layer terminals you can see directly which these are In addition a diode terminal can be displayed ina different way th
78. different pages The TT Introdu o P gina 393 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados dimensions of the drawing can also be different on the different pages Of course projects are usually constructed using the same structure You can set the column number in the first column 0 or 1 the margin of the left column and the margin of the right column the positions of potentials etc The grid is also defined here You can specify the symbol scaling too When you insert a symbol from the symbol database it is scaled with the defined factor You can also define the page template sections TT 5 CUSTOMIZING THE INTERFACE SEE Electrical allows you to customize some of the functionalities of the interface such as the application look the commands in the Quick Access Toolbar etc TT 5 1 QUICK ACCESS TOOLBAR Exercise 42 1 Add the icon for the Draw Circle command 1 gt Right click inthe Categories area 2 CO Select the Customize Quick Access Toolbar pop up command Pagina 394 TT Introdu o yac ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The following window appears Customize Choose commands from E _ Create New Workspace Commands Open Workspace lt Senarator gt a Save the active Workspace Dere a Seo ui Change the printer and printing options a es GE Close Workspac
79. example UK10 Training assign the Symbol name for Cabinets property to it In the Value column enter the following lt Symbol database gt lt Folder gt lt Symbol name gt in our example MySymbols Cabinet Training terminal If you have already placed terminals in the cabinet delete them Assign the type UK10 Training to the terminals Place the terminals again The symbol is now used For a terminal of a terminal strip you can set to view the terminal strip name by double clicking the terminal and activating the Show option for the component name RR Introdu o P gina 373 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados ww Type Database Manager Types en Manufacturer GoodsGroup View Functions Import Export Manager Properties 3g ABB ENTRELEC a Type Description a a AEG 4LT Multi level terminal 4 levels Sqmm Demo ALLEN BRADLEY WDU10 Terminal 10qmm Demo ALSTOM p WDU4 T mr tea BERNSTEIN BOMBARDIE CABLES DEUTSCHE SOLENOID DIALIGHT WDU erminal 4qmm Demo WDU4BL Terminal 4qmm Demo WDU4GY Terminal 4qmm Demo Channel Definitions Drawing types Connection ID Symbol R Dimension X Dimension Y Dimension Z 2272 i 3 ad i ja i 96 Crait dagrams EN gt Terminal Demo IGE XAO Cabinet Terminal symbols X_6 1x60 0 0 Q0 Circuit diagrams IEEE Installa
80. graphic Export 35187 4188 Editor Connector Export 3158 4189 Editor Signals Export 3070 4190 Check double naming Export MulkiRefi 4191 Check overbooked contacts _OverbookedContacts 4192 Check PLC Connections PLC Connectioncheck 4205 PrintList Export 3205 4207 View Compressed BOM Export 4207 4208 View Compresses BOM Page Export 4208 4280 View Multicores Export_3260 4285 View Multicore wires Export 3205 Record 76 4 0 SSIS SEE P gina 268 HH Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The following dialogue appears Select Query Table Name Description E o cTesta _ Drawing Types Object Types pl extlds __ tT extlhds _CableCores Drawing Types E scelComboT able Excell mportFields Excell utputT able Loodslroup Mirror MirrorPropertias _ bjectT ypes _Supplier Textlds _TypeGraphics _TypeProperties _ Types E Component E ComponentPickList E ComponentT ext i Create modify queres F mik l Cancel When you click the Create modify queries button the SQL Builder opens Here after clicking the Select table query button the dialogue you can see above opens again Now you can define your own query Example of creating a list with a total amount of prices Select within the Select Query Table window the Export_3
81. have been defined and stored together in the library one contains the male and the other the female pins Are m Pagina 108 N Introdu o as se lectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O BASIC OPERATIONS WITH TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS There is a significant difference between templates for a workspace and templates for pages for a circuit diagram or for graphical lists in SEE Electrical Workspace templates Workspace templates can be saved using the File Save as Workspace template command and they can later be chosen when you create a new workspace A workspace template consists of data about the component numbering text size of cross references page template norm sheet for circuit diagrams and templates for graphical lists A workspace template may also contain a completed standard circuit diagram to be inserted if necessary saved under another name and then changed as desired Templates for single pages for circuit diagrams Page templates Page templates can be saved using the File Save as Page template command and they can later be chosen using the File 1 Open Page template command at any time A page template can be also assigned to the workspace template then it will be used automatically for creating a new workspace In addition to the norm sheet a page template contains the properties of the current
82. m T RSS Essa Eiz After grouping the elements into a cable symbol you can define which texts will be visible via the check box in the Show column in the Component Properties window hd Component Properties Properties Preview Value Show a l W7 Function F Type 1 Hide 1 00 m Cable Type 2 Function M Show Component Information M Show Connection Information M Show Slave Information Cancel Pagina 96 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Delete all texts Properties Value Show Product o Description 00 if Type Hide Length Cable Dimension Cable core No Cable core Colour Fi Cable core Size Then move the cable symbol into the symbol library It is possible to insert the free texts 1 to 3 to the cable symbol They also appear in the Cable list database list and graphical list These texts must be manually placed if desired before grouping the symbol M 6 2 CREATING USER DEFINED CABLES The functionality for creating your own cable definition and layout is accessible through the Cables Setup button within the Cables tab of the Circuit Diagrams Properties dialogue This dialogue is called by clicking the Properties command from the pop up menu that app
83. mero do Condut N mero do Condut N mero do Condut Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor Cor do Condutor GNE Se o do Condutor 2 50 Se o do Condutor 2 50 Se o do Condutor 2 50 Se o do Condutor 2 50 IESE SS Sis Exibir Informa es do Componente Exibir Informa o de Cones es iv Exibir Informa o Ausiliar es mes Nota Se voc quiser ligar desligar a visibilidade dos textos dos condutores do cabo mantendo a tecla SHIFT pressionada clique para ativar desativar a visualiza o do primeiro texto do cabo Os textos dos demais condutores ser o ligados desligados P gina 48 E Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados F INFORMA ES ADICIONAIS NO ESQUEMA EL TRICO Exerc cio 6 1 Inserir a descri o nas l mpadas da p gina 2 E on AS KG Hb 2H ventila o Ponte Ligada J gt AS Ad 1 D um duplo clique na l mpada da esquerda A janela Propriedades do componente aparecer 2 gt Descri o 3 Ventila o 4 gt OK A caixa de dialogo sera fechada 5 D um duplo clique na segunda lampada 6 gt Descri o 6 Ponte ligada 8 gt OK Exerc cio 6 2 D nome aos contatos de for a D um duplo clique na p gina 1 a partir da guia Projeto para abri la Voc tamb m pode clicar no cone Med ou teclar Page Up para ir p gina anterior D um duplo cliq
84. message can appear In the Check PLC Connections database list such errors are documented if you do not correct them Pagina 136 R Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados R 3 ADDING AND DELETING PAGES If you select a page inthe Workspace Explorer and you right click with the mouse a pop up menu appears allowing you to add pages before the current page Insert Gap s Before This Page or remove empty pages before the current page Remove Gaps Before This Page New Alt N E Open AR O Cad Delete Load Backup Insert Gap s Before This Page Remove Gaps Before This Page Copy a Information Pa Properties lf you use a page based numbering you can choose whether to change the component names or not The functions are available for each kind of plans as well as for graphical lists After generating terminal matrices it is possible for example to start on page number 300 R 4 COPY SINGLE PAGE IN THE SAME WORKSPACE If you select a page inthe Workspace Explorer and you right click with the mouse a pop up menu appears allowing you to copy the current page You can later paste it in the active workspace When the command is activated the Page information dialogue appears It contains all page information texts existing in the copied page Assign the new page number modify any page information and click OK Component names are either aut
85. modo de desenho Exercise 4 21 Salve o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar Salve seu projeto com frequ ncia Voc tamb m pode clicar no icone zi l D Introdu o P gina 45 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados E DESENHANDO CABOS Exerc cio 5 1 Desenhar os cabos W1 e W2 na p gina 1 Conveyor bockword forword 1 CA Diagrama Eletrico 2 CO Cabo no painel Cabo Nota Caso voc tenha selecionado a configura o apropriada na guia Cabos da janela Propriedades de Diagramas El tricos ao executar o comando Diagrama El trico Cabo O Cabo uma caixa de di logo aparecer permitindo inserir um cabo com s mbolos previamente definidos para in cio meio e fim da parte gr fica Sua defini o feita a partir do comando Configurar cabos a partir da guia Cabos presente na janela Propriedades de Diagramas El tricos Se voc selecionar um cabo a partir da caixa de di logo ele ser inserido conforme previamente definido Caso utilize os s mbolos para defini o de cabos o do meio ser automaticamente prolongado para cobrir qualquer espa o entre os fios EEN my x3 4 53 g WSS M2 3 Defina o ponto inicial do cabo 4 Defina o ponto final do cabo A janela Propriedades do componente aparecera Pagina 46 E Introducao Ss selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados
86. mouse e ative o comando Desagrupar a partir do menu suspenso Desagrupe o segundo s mbolo conforme descrito acima Remova todos os elementos desnecess rios ou desloque os para um local livre da tela Agrupe os elementos como Componente Salve o s mbolo na biblioteca Exerc cio 12 15 Desenhar um retificador Use a parte gr fica de qualquer diodo presente na biblioteca como base vo Aten o Desenhe os n s como circunfer ncias preenchidas M Introdu o P gina 83 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 12 16 Se voc precisar de um componente que pode ser facilmente criado ap s apagar elementos gr ficos de um outro dispon vel poss vel proceder conforme abaixo Voc precisar deste componente O componente abaixo est dispon vel Insirao componente dispon vel Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para ativar o menu suspenso e acione Selecionar parcial Ap s isso selecione o elemento e apague o poss vel selecionar v rios elementos mantendo a tecla CTRL pressionada Se o s mbolo for usado apenas no projeto atual n o necess rio salv lo na biblioteca P gina 84 M Introdu o gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 5 INFORMA ES SOBRE A CRIA O DE COMPONENTES ESPECIAIS M 5 1 CONTATOS Os contatos necessitam do texto d
87. na barra de t tulo da caixa de di logo e arraste a para outro local Solte a na posi o desejada e tamb m o bot o esquerdo do mouse 12 Agrupe o s mbolo como Componente novamente 13 D um duplo clique no simbolo Voc poder modificar o texto Descri o 01 na caixa de di logo Propriedades do componente 14 Salve o s mbolo na biblioteca MySymbols Certifique se de clicar na conex o superior esquerda ao arrastar o s mbolo para o banco de dados 15 Abra a lista de banco de dados Componentes Na coluna Descri o 01 aparecer o novo texto Selecione todos os elementos do s mbolo novamente e agrupe os como Componente M 2 4 DESLOCANDO TEXTOS Se um s mbolo estiver desagrupado todos os textos incluindo os de conex o podem ser deslocados facilmente usando fun es de Arrastar e Soltar Os textos de conex o e os s mbolos de conex o correspondentes formam um conjunto de forma que s o deslocados ao mesmo tempo ao usar as fun es de Arrastar e Soltar Se um s mbolo j estiver em uma conex o n o recomend vel desagrup lo para deslocar o nome do componente por exemplo Neste cap tulo uma fun o simples para deslocar textos ser mostrada mesmo se o s mbolo estiver em uma conex o e sem desagrup lo Aten o N o desagrupe o conjunto formato pelo s mbolo e o texto de conex o com o comando Desagrupar Exerc cio 12 8 Deslocar o nome do componente e os textos de conex o Desagrupe
88. network S2 14 H2 X1 H3 X1 appears it cannot be continued from here That is why the network H2 X1 M3 2 appears in addition p oe l E Hd sp H If you modify the wire direction as shown above you get 82 14 M3 2 H2 X1 H3 X1 Hz A If you use wiring lists you should not insert any symbols on the potentials because the potential will appear twice as targets for the equipment Pagina 208 Z Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Z 1 GRAPHICAL WIRING LIST The graphical Wiring list is available in the Graphical Lists area of the Workspace Explorer The template contains only placeholders with the Normal text attribute For a wiring list specific criteria for sorting are valid as described below That is why the OrderBy Where PageBreak and LineBreak commands cannot be used here Besides the ordinary placeholder texts in the page template the following special placeholder texts can be used PID Lines 30 7 5 lt specifies the maximum number of lines 30 and the distance 7 5 between them This text can be located anywhere in the page NOTE You can change the number of lines and the line distance 180110 Consecutive number for line It is possible to add a prefix X or a postfix z to each number If you want to do so use the following syntax 180110 x z Cross section 180111 Combination of wire
89. o do nome do componente 3A8 por exemplo P gina 72 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Dicas para conex es localizadas automaticamente Os pontos de conex o s o inseridos automaticamente ao final de todas as linhas que saiam do s mbolo na horizontal ou vertical sele o dos objetos I I I I I I fail I I I I I 4 Resultados Em um diodo ser o inseridas muitas conex es Nos exerc cios a seguir voc aprender como apag las Se um s mbolo j possuir conex es nenhuma outra ser inserida de forma autom tica caso contr rio as conex es em excesso do diodo jamais poderiam ser removidas Neste caso voc tamb m pode copiar as conex es existentes A ordem de posicionamento das conex es corresponder a sequ ncia de linhas criadas desenhando ou copiando Os padr es para textos inseridos automaticamente est o presentes na biblioteca SYSTEM Exerc cio 12 3 Salvar o s mbolo em uma biblioteca Se o s mbolo for usado no futuro interessante salv lo em uma biblioteca Se este n o n o for o caso esse procedimento n o necess rio 1 Ative a guia de simbolos Se a guia Projeto estiver visivel clique na guia Simbolos 2 MySymbols Selecione o banco de dados de s mbolos MySymbols Voc pode salvar s mbolos apenas nesta biblioteca ou em outra que tenha criado 3 Clique com o botao direit
90. of images and insert them as part of a workspace With the help of this function you can insert a scanned image as a different page in the workspace Note You can use other images often old and insert them as part of the workspace Exercise 44 1 Insert scanned drawings in your project 1 Select the SCANIN command from the list of commands in SEE Electrical The Bitmap loader window appears Bitmap loader Bitmap File i Fage data Renumber all pages according to positon in list Add multiple bitmap file Property Select Bitmap File ca x 4 ssa Insert standard sheet on imported drawing Freeze imported drawing Scale imported bitmap to fit inside below rectangle Lett jo Bottom jo Right o Top o 2 Clickthe Add multiple bitmap file button and select the files you want to insert in the workspace 3 Once you have added the images you can change the order in which they are listed via the manipulation buttons Note The listing order is important since it allows you to define the order in which the images will be inserted in the workspace That is to say the first image can be inserted as page 1 the second as page 2 etc You can also drag and drop the file to modify the insertion order VV Introdu o P gina 407 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 When the order is defined click the Renumber all pages ac
91. order is also possible HOrderBy 140050 DESC 160010 The List of Producis is ordered at first by Function of the products in descending order then by component names in ascending order In Document List OrderBy is not available Records in the list are filtered according to the defined value Example List of Products Where 140050 P1 AND 120010 gt 10 The List of Products will contain only components with Location P 1 and placed on page number gt 10 Or Where 160040 M10 OR 160040 M20 The List of Products will contain only components with types M10 and M20 Example List of Documents Where 160040 lt gt not used The Product list contains all products without the ones with the type not used Where NOT 160040 IS NULL or Where 160040 IS NOT NULL or Where 160040 lt gt The Product list contains all products without the ones with an empty type Another example for use Product list again Where Instr 160010 M gt 0 The component list contains only components with the code M in their name Next example for use Product list again Where NOT Instr 160010 M gt 0 The component list contains no components any more that have the code M in their name Example of use Cable core list The Cable Type is sometimes not entered i e undefined therefore you cannot filter on it but this is necessary since all entries are required except for these with the v
92. position where to place the first group and the maximal position of X The circuit diagram is constructed as follows PP Introdu o P gina 313 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 4 EXCEL SPREADSHEET The Excel spreadsheet includes multiple sheets with different functions You can change the names of the sheets The illustration is made by using the included Excel spreadsheet PLC XLS The Excel columns are indicated with letters and the rows with numbers Fields are indicated as a combination of the corresponding column name and row name PP 4 1 PROJECT DATA PROJECTINFO This area contains information entered in the Project information window If the norm sheet contains appropriate text placeholders then the texts are displayed in the circuit diagrams as well Qa Bia Microsoft Excel ax Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View Le B1 an jx Workspace Description info only A B c D 100680 Workspace Description line 19 HE 35 100690 Workspace Description line 20 FE mS G E C RSE Mo 4 M Symbols Project Page p Selections Alias Ed EM Ready ES Dl pans Do not change the TEXTID column in any case P gina 314 PP Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 4 2 PAGE DATA PAGEINFO This area contains i
93. reservados f gt 8 gt 9 10 gt 11 gt 12 gt 13 14 gt 15 16 gt 17 18 gt 19 20 gt 21 22 P gina 24 Abra a pasta Motors and Generators Selecione o s mbolo Three phase PE e arraste o para a area de desenho Clique na coluna 4 para solt lo D um duplo clique na pasta Relay contacts MAIN para abr la e selecione o s mbolo 3 pole NO Arraste o s mbolo com o cursor para para a coluna 4 Clique para soltar o s mbolo A caixa de di logo Propriedades do componente aparecer Componente Q2 Voc pode inserir o nome neste contato mas nao o modifique agora pois ainda nao sabe a qual componente pertence OK Feche a caixa de di logo Insira o segundo contato na posi o desejada a proceda da mesma maneira A caixa de di logo Propriedades do componente aparecer novamente Mantenha o nome sugerido Clique em OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada Abra a pasta Terminals e selecione o s mbolo 4 terminals 90 vertical Insira o na coluna 4 procedendo da mesma maneira sugerida nos passos anteriores A caixa de di logo para defini o do nome dos bornes aparecer Componente X N mero do borne 4 N mero de ordena o 5 OK Os pr ximos bornes ser o automaticamente vinculados a essa r gua Abra a pasta Protective devices Selecione o s mbolo 3 pole trip breaker e arraste o para a guia 4 Solte o s mbolo na posi o desejada clicando com o mouse
94. settings into in the Set XML file to export text field 5 Press the a button to open and load the desired folder and then type name of XML file 6 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button If you select an existing XML file a question appears asking you if you want to add the results of the new scan to this XML file or if you want to start again If you add the new results to the existing file you can benefit from the mappings already done and you will be sure that you use the same definitions for all your data 7 Press the Scan templates text button to start the scanning process 8 CO FontT oolMapFont 9 Choose the first XML file with the results from the scanning of your data 10 Change the settings for New Font Name New Font Height New Font Width and New Font Distance for each of the different fonts and the combinations of text attributes In case you need to use a different code page than the default one it is possible to choose the appropriate script when defining the font The script you defined appears in the New Font Script field but cannot be changed 11 Save your changes with the help of the Set font mapping button 12 Close the window with Cancel 13 CO FontToolChangeT emplate 14 Press the I button within the Templates area to define the templates to scan for fonts 15 Press the EF button if you want to remove a template from the list 16 Choose the XML file to t
95. specific PATTERNS SES symbol library Please get in contact if it is missing The symbols can be added to existing folders only so if you need new ones create them before you try to define a pattern Exercise 44 2 Define patterns in the project 1 Draw the geometry for the first pattern Al Cd AZ The geometry and texts have to be single elements not symbols or macro gro ups Select the geometry texts that shall be added to the pattern Execute the DefinePatterns command Define the insertion point this will be used later as insertion point for the symbol Specify the folder and the name under which the symbol will be stored in the PATTERNS SES library and click OK Sao a Create symbol Folder Coils gt Tue Descrition CC OE Cancel P gina 410 VV Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 6 Assign the SEE Electrical symbol that shall replace the pattern later Symbol browser Symbols EE Preview Filter DE EE x 4 AutogenEN 4 EN60617UK 4 EN61346 2UK J Arester J Automatic tipping CO Capacitors 3 Change over LQ Connection general One pole relay coil Converters a Diodes s OK Cancel 7 Select the desired symbol and click OK to confirm 8 Define all the patterns used in this way including potentials To recognize potentials SEE Electrical symbols have
96. sure that the texts receive the specified attributes At least one connection text is necessary If no connections are needed for the component place the connection and define a space for the connection text Create texts completed Rack Symbol gt I 305 Connetion Conntext o normal text Component name Connection Conntext 41 normal text Connection Conntext _ Connection Conntezt cad Cid normal text Component description _ digital input digital input y EST 121 AFFOA AMO BEST 121 1FFRA DA AO Component Type Move the connection text s if necessary Place the required number of PLC signal symbols Insert the PLC signal symbol without a n E E a text placeholder for the component name from the symbol database Plara Pl C sinnale completed Rack Svmbal digital input GES d721 1FF01 ODAAG digital input BES 3f1 1FFO01 GAAO Pagina 94 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Change the names of the PLC signals Select all symbols and create a PLC component symbol SEE Electrical deletes the component names from the PLC signal symbols Save the symbol in the symbol database M 5 9 SMART BLACK BOX SYMBOLS The smart black box symbol creates connection points at the places where it connects with the wires 1 To use smart black boxes draw a rectangle Draw Elements
97. template you can change column titles by double clicking it Table Contents e x Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Group Footer Line Definition 1 EE sj o El Appearance Background ves alo Xo dh E E Font Arial Text Formal Normal Test El Layout Line F 100040 Alignment 0 left F 100050 ENE Fal ni F 100080 ank Optimization alse Ho Justified False Ho Line Wrap False Clip Separator True ves Spacing 0 039 0 020 0 039 0 0 Vert Alignment 0 top width 1 530 1 530 in va Table width too large for table definition Layout Appearance Cond cence QQ Introdu o Pagina 337 ea c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 In the Table contents window Header Line tab window you can change the Layout of the text or the Font in the right window area i e the size and the name of the font To change the column title double click on it for example F_100010 if you want to enter a header line for example Project name Line Pie XxX E BR F_TOOOS0 3 If you double click any field the following new window appears F_100010 RR Bj o 4 Double click again and type the desired text The text must be enclosed within double quotation marks Project name i i ap 5 Close the dialogue box by clicking OK 6 Change all hea
98. the right to the component v MTYO place the text beneath the component Group the component texts and the text for the left target as a Macro Group symbol You cannot use here all of the settings options available in the template Refer to the Graphical lists chapter in the Help files for more details Display cable core information and colour potential name or signal type The texts with the Cable core Number Left Id 180128 and Cable core Number Right lId 180131 attributes are used to display a lot of information The first letter in the text allows you to decide which information is shown for a cable core and the second letter defines which text is shown for the wire shows nothing shows number default shows number default shows colour if colour exists shows colour if colour exists and number if colour does not exist shows always colour also with number not used mo oO ZzZ If you need more information you can position a text with the Cable core Number Left and Cable core Number Right attributes a second and a third time and display the information for signal type or potential name with their help Q generates information about the signal type P generates information about the potential name 1 2 1 DRAWING GRAPHICS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH TERMINAL As described in the chapter Creating a Template for the Terminal Matrix it is possible to use a symbol for each terminal instead of a grid for the whole p
99. to be prepared inside a symbol library This means you have to draw a potential and drag it into a folder of a symbol library Make sure you use the same insertion point which you define later for the pattern Potential lines You can also store potential lines as patterns Before you do so store a SEE Electrical potential as a symbol in one of your symbol libraries Standard sheet lf you want a standard sheet to be recognized you need to store it as pattern too Before you do so store a SEE Electrical standard sheet as a symbol in one of your symbol libraries Normally a standard sheet cannot be stored in a symbol library To store it proceed as follows Take the symbol origin symbol from the symbol origin folder of your System symbol library Place the symbol at the left lower corner of the standard sheet Select the standard sheet and the symbol origin symbol Click onto the symbol origin symbol and drag both to the folder of the symbol library where you want to store the standard sheet VV Introdu o P gina 411 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV 2 2 CONTROLING AND CHANGING PATTERNS ASSIGNING TEXTS SHOWPATTERNS COMMAND The ShowPatterns command allows you to control and change the assignment of patterns to SEE Electrical symbols It also makes it possible for the user to specify which text shall contain which information Exercise 44
100. type this command allows you to create new types quickly by modifying existing types V Introdu o P gina 161 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados V 2 COMPLETING COMPONENTS lf a component consists of several parts you can use the Functions Component Complete H command or activate the Ei icon to insert the parts that are not inserted yet Typical components consisting of several parts are Contactors They consist of a coil and several contacts Some motor protective switches They consist of the component itself and of contacts not located at the same place as the component PLC Racks The Rack itself and several signals may be used Requirements In order to use this function it is necessary to define in the Channel definition of the component and all its parts which symbol must be used in the Circuit diagram module This applies to all components in the workspace At least one part of the component must already be inserted in the drawing E Symbols K laine WE x Channel000 Channeli Channel00 7 Ve 7 K2 ae 25 Channel003 Channeld04t Channel005 lt lt Backward Forward gt Channel definition In the Type Database the Circuit diagram symbol must be specified in the Channel definition Connection o Cabo Reference Symbol Ad AZ Relay Coil EMEA 346 2UK Relay coils pole ob 13
101. via the Electrical Cable Cable command as the cable disappears from the Component Without Graphic list as soon as the first core is inserted Quick guide Importing Exporting manual components from an Excel file A pop up command in the Components without Graphic Editor allows you to import export Excel files containing information about components without graphics manual components 1 Right click in the Components without Graphic Editor and activate the Excel Import Export command OO Introdu o P gina 305 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The following dialogue appears Manual Components EXCEL Import and Export EXCEL worksheet HM anuallomponents 2 Click the Import or the Export button and select the file to process 3 Click Exit to quit the command Close and reopen the database editor for the modifications to appear Hint The Excel file used needs a very specific format We recommend that you create some components without graphic of the desired type and export the list to Excel Then you can use this file as a master file put data into it and import it The first row of the Excel sheet always contains a headline descriptions of the columns and can be empty The second row contains the IDs for identification of the columns Do not change this row The third row contains the definitions for the components
102. with a yellow diagonal cross appears This way you are warned that the size of this component is not real If you want a detailed view of your construction symbols you can designe a graphic in scale 1 1 or you can import from the DXF DWG format The symbols for Cabinets must satisfy the same criteria as the symbols for Circuit diagrams 1 e a symbol for relay coil must be assigned to the category of relay coils You can assign symbols to a type in the type database in channel definition as shown in exercise below Exercise 40 6 Create a terminal symbol for the cabinet 1 ae 10 12 13 Create a new page within Cabinets Create symbols on the new page Type the value 1 for scale and Symbol scaling as the symbols must be created witha scale 1 1 Create a rectangle with a size 52x6 Group the graphics into a Terminal symbol Select Edit Text Edit Text and change the size of the text for the component name to 35mm As the symbol is minimized by the factor 10 after the insertion it applies to texts too Move the text of the component name one position above the terminals use the Select single element and Move commands Double click the symbol and switch off the visibility of all texts The symbols for terminals are so small that the texts will overlap Insert the symbol into the MySymbols symbol database in the Cabinet folder Type the Training terminal name Go to the type database Create a new terminal type for
103. you wish to change the text in the list title double click the text again in the above example double click Title The following window appears E Edit Text Variables and Functions Functions Text Condi Dategi Fstr g Tab lt gt Variables Functions E a Mumerncal functions Date functions String functions E Misc functions a Hl Barcode functions E Conversion functions 4 Project and Print dependent functions Logical functions Drawing functions Currency functions Insert kma Ta Ok Cancel Ro Change the text by double clicking on it again The texts must be enclosed within double quotation marks for example List of producis 3 Click OK to close the window 4 Close the Paragraph Properties window by clicking OK QQ Introdu o Pagina 341 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 4 LIST TITLE WITH QUESTIONS 1 If the window shown in the following illustration is open you can define questions to appear while creating the list If the window shown in the following illustration is not open double click the list title and the Paragraph Properties window will appear Double click the list title again wo owas eee Numerical functions Date functions String functions Misc functions fab Ask Stings HStingH Booleant String L Number gt 5 eae
104. 0 F_12000150 QQ Introdu o P gina 349 ea c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 00 4 DEFINING SQL QUERIES FOR LISTS AND LABELS SQL queries allow generating lists that go beyond the simple ordering filtering and grouping fields from a database list QQ 4 1 JOINING TWO LISTS It is possible to join data from two different database lists into one common list using SQL queries in the List and Labels area Select datasource Select datasource W Use custome SOL as datasouce E FROM Cable001 LEFT JOIN Export 3051 ON Cable001 160010 Export_3031 160070 QQ 4 1 a JOINING INFORMATION FROM CABLE LIST AND CABLE WIRES LIST 1 Define a SQL query SELECT FROM Cable001 LEFT JOIN Export_3031 ON Cable001 160010 Export 3031 160010 Example for SQL query SELECT The SELECT statement selects data from a table Syntax of the statement SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table in Access database gt All of the fields are selected LEFT JOIN The second table is joined to the first table ON lt value1 gt It defines which values in the two tables have to lt value2 gt match in order to join data In the example above it is the component name code 160010 The values must be defined in the form lt table name gt field name 2 Defining Group header Data within a list can be structured by inserting group headers P gina 350 QQ Introdu o asd
105. 00 Attention 1 a0 STRING 100110 Attention 2 50 STRING 100120 Attention 3 50 STRING l4 4 Record 1 eR A J v rs v v v 7 ff j j j Fj j LE l Cancel Records highlighted in red can be changed The IDs for user defined Workspace texts must be within the range 102000 to 110000 and the page texts within the range 122000 to 130000 The example below illustrates how a user defined workspace text is created Similar procedures are applicable for the creation of page texts and component texts Example 1 Open the Workspace Properties window in the already described way and click the Workspace text tab 2 Scroll down to the very bottom of the window and click in the empty Description field 3 Type in your text there for example My text Pagina 262 FF Introducao gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A new empty line is automatically inserted Workspace Properties 7 X General List definition Workspace text Page text Object types Componenttext b Text id Description Length Field type List order Show gt ee agend Workspace Description line 11 ol STRING 2rU Fi 100610 Workspace Description line 12 ol STRING 200 100620 Workspace Description line 13 ol STRING 290 100630 Workspace Description line 14 a0 STRING 300 100640 Workspace Description line 15 a0 STRING 310 E DORSO Workspace Description lin 16 oo
106. 010 query for example and click OK Select Query Table Name Description O Export 3001 PG Export 3011 Export 3020 O Export 30204 HH Introdu o Pagina 269 asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados From the Export 3010 table that appears select 160080 which is the ID of Description 00 and click the Preview Test Query button in the SQL Builder A table is opened that contains the Description 00 column from the Products database list with all entries from your project 160030 iil Export_3010 Page Types FA mo 160030 Circuit breaker pn Thermal relay Close the Page Types dialogue Now group the entries first i e create a column containing all entries only once For this purpose within the Group tab select Export 8010 160030 and move it to the right bottom pane using the corresponding directional button P gina 270 HH Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Then click the Preview Test query button The Page Types dialogue appears again but now containing all the entries grouped no multiple entries are displayed Export_3010 Page Types x O 160030 gt Cail Fuse Lamp Motor Switch BOOS Thermal relay lt tm Sort Where Group Having Compute Export 3010 140020 Export_3010 7 60030
107. 038 default EN WireDirectionLeftUpDown 15022 default EN 15024 15032 and 15034 WireDirectionRightUpDown 15021 default EN 15023 15031 and 15033 You have to be an administrator on the computer to be able to perform this operation Pagina 170 W Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 2 CHANGING TARGETS In the terminal matrix internal and external targets must appear on one defined side Terminal Strip ede aP CT OK pp Sop e Eee MIS DTS as ee In the example above internal and external targets are shown in colour either on the right or on the left side This comes from the circuit diagram as terminals find usually the internal targets at their upper connection and the external targets at their bottom connection This can be useful in some cases but in others not W Introducao Pagina 171 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 21 1 Swap the internal and external target for both bottom terminals in the example displayed above on the right 1 CA Electrical 2 CO Connection View panel Each first connection within a component is marked in yellow The first connection of a terminal manages the internal target 3 Select the terminals whose connections you wish to swap 4 CA Electrical 5 CO Swap Connections panel The connections of the highlighted te
108. 1 000000 1 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 On 1 25 000000 25000000 a Press the Enter key to validate the new settings for each of the modified properties The properties are changed dynamically O Introdu o see electrical Exercise 14 9 1 2 CA 3 CO 4 CO 5 6 gt Exercise 14 10 1 2 CA 3 CO 4 CO 5 gt 6 gt O Introducao Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Save the page template In the Workspace tree select the page that you are currently editing File Save as Page template lt name gt OK The page template has been saved You can load it at any time or assign it as a page template to a project template as described in the next chapter Open the page template on another page lt page gt In the Workspace tree select the page that you are currently editing page 1 or 2 File Open Page template lt Your template gt No The new page template has been loaded the project data and page data have been inserted into the new standard sheet and the existing circuit parts on the page have been kept P gina 119 Manual de treinamento Zaa c ectrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 0 3 CREATING A WORKSPACE TEMPLATE Exercise 14 11 Open an existing workspace template change it and save it with another name 1 CA 2 CO 3 CO 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt 9 CA 10 CO 11 gt
109. 14 Relay contacts Wo ENE 346 2UK Relay contacts WOW pole Mo Typestuirrors NO H eo Relay contacts ME ENE 346 2UK Relay contacts MEY pole MC Types Mirrors inc Ja Sd Relay contacts Mo ENME1 346 2UK Relay contacts MOY pole NO Types Mirrorsio 43 44 Relay contacts MO EMEA 346 2UkK Relay contacts No pole Mo TypesiMirrors Mi P gina 162 V Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Components with auxiliary contacts contactors relays A component with auxiliary contacts contactors relay doesn t consist only of one symbol in the Circuit diagram but dependent contacts Slaves are placed at other places different from the place where the main component the Master is located The motor protective switch below has 6 connections 1 6 directly connected at the component and two dependent contacts NO and NC located and connected at another place in the Circuit diagram There is only a cross reference to the Slaves at the Master component and vice versa rag woods i Therefore you will find 3 lines in the channel definition A line for the main component with connections 1 2 3 4 5 6 A line for the NO contact with connections 13 14 A line for the NC contact with connections 21 22 Channel Definitions x pa Connection ID Symbol Reference Symbol Relay contacts No EN61 346 2UK Relay contacts MOM pol
110. 18 Repeat steps 4 to 17 for the NO auxiliary contact 19 13 14 Type the contact numbers of the first NO contact 20 Relay contacts NO Select the Relay contacts NO ID from the pull down list 21 gt Symbol Click on the button within this field Select the desired symbol from the Relay contacts NO folder of the EN61 346 2UK symbol library Click on the button within this field 22 gt Reference Symbol Click on the button within this field You can select the contact mirror symbol from the symbol databases again Open the TYPES database and then open the Mirrors folder by double clicking on it and select the Contact NO symbol 23 gt Connection 24 Repeat steps 4 to 17 for the NC auxiliary contact 14 21 22 Type the contact numbers of the first NC contact 15 4 Relay contacts NC Select the Relay contacts NC ID from the pull down list 16 gt Symbol Click on the button within this field Select the desired symbol from the Relay contacts NC folder of the EN61346 2UK symbol library 17 gt Reference Symbol Click on the button within this field once again 18 gt You can select the contact mirror symbol from the symbol databases again Open the TYPES database and then open the Mirrors folder by double clicking on it and select the Contact NC symbol 19 gt OK T Introdu o P gina 145 Manual de treinamento electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Finish the channel defin
111. 2833 H E COLLINS __ Height Or 4 7244094488188972 E COMMANDER Depth Z 2 7559055118110235 H E DECA CABLE paw Voltage SO0VAC lor DEUTSCH ee 7 E Record 1 The Type Database Manager window appears This window is composed of three areas You can move the borders of the areas and the borders of the columns in the right panes Adjust the Type Database Manager window as desired Do the next steps as described Create the new manufacturer Training 3 M Select the Manufacturer menu 4 M Add 5 Training Type inthe name of the new manufacturer i e Training 6 gt OK The manufacturer has been created Select the newly created Training manufacturer in the left pane of the Type Database Manager window T Introdu o P gina 141 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 18 4 Define a new type of a relay coil Types must be unique i e one type designation must appear only once 1 M Click in the field under the Type column in the top right pane Type Description Manufacturer Goods Group Training 2 Type 1 Enter the new type designation 3 Relay coil AC In the Description field you can write the description of the new type for example Relay coil AC 4 gt You can choose the desired manufacturer from the list by clicking within the Manufacturer column The Training manufacturer is already a
112. 3 gt Select the lists you want to generate 4 gt The gt button allows you to define the order in which the lists are generated You can make sure that the document list is generated as last one so it will contain all others 5 gt You can use the Save Settings button to save the settings you just defined for using them again 6 gt Generate EE Introdu o P gina 261 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados FF CUSTOMIZING THE WORKSPACE PAGE INFORMATION WINDOWS You can change the texts in the Workspace information and Page information dialogue boxes For example Project description line 3 could become Commission number You can change the sequence of displaying the texts in the windows hide records or add your own records Right click the workspace name inthe Workspace Explorer and select the Properties pop up command You can find the options for changing texts in the Workspace text tab or the Page text tab Workspace Properties General List definition Workspace text Page text Object types Component text Text il Description Length Field type List order Show fooga CC File name 30 STRING 30 100010 Workspace name 30 STRING 30 100020 Customer SO STRING 40 100030 Address 1 50 STRING 50 100040 Address 2 50 STRING 60 100050 Zipcode 50 STRING 70 100060 City 50 STRING Bo 100070 Telephone 50 STRING 90 100080 Fax 50 STRING 100090 E mail a0 STRING 001
113. 4 9 Desenhar a conex o P gina 36 T Diagrama el trico 1 fio no painel Conex o dos fios Defina o primeiro ponto da conex o no potencial L1 sobre os s mbolos Defina o segundo ponto da conex o no potencial N abaixo dos s mbolos O fio ser desenhado e as conex es ser o interrompidas automaticamente onde os simbolos s o inseridos Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de desenho D Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 10 Modificar o estilo e cor da pena para o fio entre a bobina e o potencial N 1 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse sobre o fio e selecione o comando Propriedades a partir do menu suspenso O painel Propriedades sera mostrado no lado direito da janela do SEE Electrical 2 gt Estilo da caneta 3 Selecione o estilo Tracejado 4 gt Cord a caneta 5 gt Selecione a cor azul A cor e estilo da linha ser o modificadas dinamicamente D Introdu o P gina 37 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados D 3 COPIANDO ELEMENTOS EXISTENTES NA P GINA 2 Exerc cio 4 11 Copiar uma coluna do desenho Ter LE CRER E pe O 1 O comando Geral Selecionar elementos Selecionar estar ativo caso o cursor apare a como uma flecha E Voc pode selecionar um nico elemento ou todos os
114. 451 and 452 The lines for the header must not be on these layers on loyer 450 451 or 452 10 4 Lell geometry ON S Start 2014010005060010 layer 450 451 or 452 Block the geometry and the text as a symbol of Cabinet Index component table type Store the symbol in the IndexTableSymb ses library Exercise 40 12 Save your workspace RR 1 2 WITHOUT THE CABINETS MODULE You will create the cabinet scaled 1 1 Exercise 40 13 Create a new page and load an appropriate page template 1 Create the new page in the known way lt Page gt Choose the new page in the Workspace Load the page template A3x5 It represents a page of A3 format enlarged by the factor 5 This page allows you to create a Cabinet with the maximum size of 1500 x 1250 mm 2 CA File 3 CO Open 4 CA Page template 5 gt lt Your template gt for example A3x5 The setting for scale and symbol are found in the page properties 6 gt OK The page template has been loaded The workspace information and the page information have been saved in the standard sheet RR Introdu o P gina 377 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 14 Draw a panel 800 x 900 mm In the status bar right beneath the drawing area the dimensions are displayed as you are drawing the lines and rectangles Choose a larger grid through the Toolbars at least 10x10 mm 1 CA Draw 2 CO Rectangl
115. APd WHERE APno b OQUERY U_APp WHERE 4Pno 8 EQUERT LU APd WHERE APno 19 EQUERT U APp WHERE APno j 10 Summory Power electricol equipment UUERY U_ APTorP wl Maximum 10 pieces of equipment can be listed in the list inthis example The index for the components listed in this list has to be unique as we want to see each piece of electrical equipment in one line This template generates the following result B Power electricol equipment Description Power KW Cooker og Boiler EA A woshing machine 7 og Dir conditioner 154 summary Power electrical equipment 15 50 KW P gina 274 HH Introdu o Rag eectrical i Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Il TERMINAL PLAN Advanced 1 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL PLAN In terminal plans with graphics the first target is assigned to each terminal as a symbol the second target is assigned to the terminal as a text E 2 1i u E m Lm E cm ote fd E i T E mn E ig re i T 0 001 aaa A Lega lt imm EH TECLA PRE EN econ m Go E aa Exercise 32 1 Generate a terminal plan for the training project ds Select Terminal plan in the Graphical lists area in the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate The Select Terminal Row dialogue appears 4 gt Choose the terminal strip s for which you wish to generate a terminal plan By default all terminal strips are
116. C components are identified via module names For this reason the module names are taken into consideration while importing the allocation list Import the Excel List The import of the Excel list in the workspace can be done by executing the PLCIlmportExcel function inthe Commands explorer Import Data from Spreadsheet x Excel Spreadsheet File name E programs SEE Electrical Vo Projects PLC_IO Li Import rows from line to line In spreadsheet FPLC group identifier Description jz Property Wapping Property Column PLO Group Connection Free con text 01 Free con text 02 Free con text 03 Free con text 04 PLO address PL IQ Connection PLC 10 Connection PLE Group connection PLC Group Connection PLC Croup Connection z o zl al alm ol ol ol Sl l4 4 FRecord 11 e 4 Load Settings Save Settings Import Close EE Introdu o P gina 259 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Define the text property for the group identifier of the PLC This text property must be available in the list of the importable text properties Symbols The PLC Rack symbols and PLC connections symbols must contain all the texts that are imported i e PLC Rack symbols and PLC connections symbols must contain in particular the PLC group identifier
117. CX JPG and BMP 3 Select the first point of the frame where the Picture is to be inserted The frame is defined as a rectangle by two opposite corner poinis 4 Select the second point of the frame for the Picture 5 Select the desired file 6 gt Open You have just inserted the Bitmap object into the drawing You can modify the Bitmap object T Click the ES icon to enable trackers on selected elements mer oteciricar 8 Left click the bitmap object You can see the trackers on each corner point and between them 9 Use the trackers to change the size of the bitmap object 10 Click within the bitmap object hold the left mouse button and move the object to the desired position 11 Click the ek icon again to switch the trackers off 12 To rotate the bitmap select it and use the Rotate pop up command to rotate it at 90 degrees Pagina 134 Q Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados R PROCESSING A WORKSPACE Standard R 1 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FOR CROSS REFERENCES Exercise Show targets for cross references a Am A AO 1 Select the cross reference which you want to show the target for 2 Right click to open the pop up menu 3 M Properties 4 Change the default setting for the Show target value from Off to On Type in the desired text R Introdu o P gina 135 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE
118. Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o Todos os s mbolos ter o sido inseridos C Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 3 7 Desenhar a conex o trif sica 1 Ative o comando Desenho el trico Conex o dos fios 3 fios 2 Clique para definir o ponto inicial da conex o no potencial L1 e de forma alinhada com com as conex es do primeiro borne X2 4 3 Clique para definir o segundo ponto na conex o superior do primeiro borne X2 4 As tr s conex es ser o desenhadas automaticamente entre o potencial L1 e o primeiro borne X2 4 entre o potencial L2 e o segundo borne X2 5 e entre o potencial L3 e o terceiro borne X2 6 As conex es s o interrompidas automaticamente onde h s mbolos 4 Agora use a fun o Desenho el trico Conex o dos fios Liga o ortogonal para desenhar uma conex o trif sica entre os bornes e o motor Clique para definir o in cio do fio na conex o inferior do borne X2 4 Clique novamente para definir o final na conex o U1 do motor Quatro fios ser o desenhados 5 Continue a desenhar conex es ortogonais conforme abaixo Clique na conex o entre o disjuntor e os contatos e tomando como refer ncia o potencial L3 Depois disso clique na conex o 6 do segundo jogo de contatos NA Igualmente clique na conex o 1 dos mesmos contatos NA e depois na con
119. Cond Boolean al ta gt ll ae TEU Boolean Salta gt tA H 0 Barcode functions Conversion functions Insert List of products i Om 4 el i List of products Ok Cancel A 2 Define a question about the project name Click behind the text that must be displayed in the header line e g List of products Open then the Miscellaneous functions folder in the right window pane by double clicking it Select AskString again by double clicking it Mise functions Ab AskSting Sting Boolean Sting Number gt String com Cond Boolean All AID gt dal a a f Boolean IALAH gt A 3 The variable is displayed behind the text The variable AskString allows you to create a question by entering user defined texts P gina 342 QQ Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados You must enter the arguments too Move the cursor to the place between the next two characters of the variable Type then how the variable must be named for example you can type project name The text must be enclosed within double quotation marks Uist of products Ask Strng Projectname Move the cursor forward behind Projectname List of products Ask Strings Projectname T Cond Contains Continued Choose F from the automatically displayed pop
120. DING AND DELETING PAGES R 4 COPY SINGLE PAGE IN THE SAME WORKSPACE S EASY EDITING IN DATABASE LISTS T CONTACT MIRROR AND TYPE DATABASE T 1 MANIPULATING THE TYPE DATABASE T 2 USING TYPES IN THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS T 3 AUXILIARY CONTACTS INSIDE ADD ONS FOR COILS AND SUBTYPES U ADDITIONAL HINTS ABOUT COMPONENT MANAGEMENT IN THE TYPE DATABASE U 1 CABLE MANAGEMENT U 2 MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTORS U 3 CHANNEL DEFINITION FOR PLC VOS U 4 BLACK BOXES U 4 1 Assigning of types to intelligent black box symbols U 4 2 Creating a Black Box from Channel Information V ADDITIONAL HINTS ABOUT THE TYPE DATABASE V 1 SEARCHING AND COPYING IN THE TYPE DATABASE V 2 COMPLETING COMPONENTS V 3 USING THE COMPONENT EXPLORER V 4 IMPORTING AND EXPORTING ARTICLE MASTER DATA V 5 MODIFYING EXISTING TYPES IN THE PROJECT V 6 DISPLAYING INFORMATION ON THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE TYPE DATABASE V 7 DEFINE WHICH TYPE DATABASE TO USE WITH A PROJECT W WIRE PROPERTIES W l WIRE DIRECTION W 2 CHANGING TARGETS W 3 DEFINING A LINK W 4 GRAPHICAL WIRE NUMBERING W 5 SIGNAL PROPERTIES W 6 WORKING WITHOUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES W 7 VIEW AND CHANGE WIRE ATTRIBUTES W 8 DEFINE THE POSITION OFTHE WIRE TEXT X TERMINAL MATRIX X 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL MATRIX X 2 HANDLING MULTI LAYER TERMINALS X 3 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A TERMINAL MATRIX X 3 1 General Information X 3 2 Drawing Graphics Associated with Each Terminal One Geometry for All Terminal
121. Desenhar o s mbolo 1 Preencha o ret ngulo Use o comando Desenhar Elementos O Preencher Hachurar rea Selecione o preenchimento adequado com o comando Selecionar pincel painel Desenhar Estilos Circunfer ncias e elipses ser o preenchidas automaticamente ao fazer o desenho ent o o ajuste pode ser feito para Nenhum gfi Ele v Menhum o S lido ER E Diagonal PE Cruzado EH Diagonal Cruzado Ea F Diagonal A Horizontal E vertical Exerc cio 12 12 Desenhar o s mbolo de uma l mpada N o poss vel desenhar retas que terminem no limite de uma circunfer ncia sem mudar o valor do gri Usando o comando Editar Alterar elemento Aparar poss vel cortar linhas muito extensas Com o comando Editar Alterar elemento Extender poss vel prolongar uma linha at um limite determinado Para ajustar linhas que sejam muito longas 1 CO Aparar Ative a fun o a partir do painel Editar Alterar elemento 2 Clique no limite a circunfer ncia 3 Clique na parte a ser eliminada o lado externo da reta M Introdu o P gina 81 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 Clique no outro extremo da reta para elimina la Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para cancelar a fun o Para prolongar li
122. E Electrical P gina 12 A Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados As abas Projeto Simbolos Comandos est o localizadas no lado esquerdo da janela do SEE Electrical A area de desenho est localizada no centro da janela do SEE Electrical A aba Propriedades est localizada no lado direito da janela do SEE Electrical E EDER SEE Electrical Meu Projeto 0001 Arquiva Origem Geral Editar visualizar Desenhar Fun es Diagrama El trico Legendas e Detalhes Estilo je i Ua Nova i Excluir A Anterior bl Projeto T M dulo Es Abrir ER Fechar Col Pr xima Pagina faa Pagina Pagina Informa o Propriedades visualizar 4 amp MeuProjeto 0001 EJ EM Propriedades als ag COA rquivos de programas WsE Mome walor o acne E Atributos 0001 a vy Diagrama Eletrico EM padina 1 0 0001 Motores a 0002 Diagrama de come HAEE q Instala o Predial Data Cria o 2472013 Data Revis a Painel El trico e Outros Documentos Listas Gr ficas Banco de Dados Reviz o da P Pagina Criad Descri o d Motores Descri o d Descri o d Descri o d Descri o d Descri o d Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Data de Revi Descri o d Descri o d Descri o d
123. Er icon Layer Manager Layer title Show Print Freeze Penstyle Pencolour Penwith Br A Use visibility T 555 ice Use visibility 0 25 Use visibility gE 025 Use visibility 0 25 Use visibility 0 25 Use visibility gE 025 Use visibility 0 25 Use visibility go 025 E Use visibility O 0 25 wt gt SR S S S Currently Active Layer Update Layer Information in Blocks Attribute by layer Cancel It is possible to select multiple layers and change their attributes in one step The attributes can be changed for selected layers by using the SHIFT or CTRL keys or for all layers by clicking on the Layer ID field When multiple layers are selected an editor appears in the right area of the Layer Manager window It allows managing of the layer attributes such as visibility color line type etc ma Layer Manager x Layer title Print Freeze Penstyle Pencolour Penwidth Layer ID Use visibility Use visibility Use visibility Use visibility n go E So S S S 11 Use visibility E go 0 25 4 HE Currently Active Layer 1 Update Layer Information in Blocks Attribute by layer OK Cancel RR Introdu o P gina 381 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados RR 3 DIMENSION Exer
124. FINING ALIAS NAMES The groups contain text placeholders for example for component names etc that will be filled in with data from the corresponding columns of the Excel sheet Symbols This text placeholders must be defined as lt column identification gt i e E F etc You can remember E difficult for the component identification Alias names allow entering descriptive texts instead of the column names for example Component Name instead of E etc The assignment of the internal column names of the Excel program to the descriptive alias names is executed in the alias table Working with alias names is useful since all of the components can be provided with text placeholders with the Component Name format It will be easy to change the assignment of the internal column names to the descriptive alias names If you use text placeholders of the lt Column identifier gt format in the groups you can change the assignment only by changing the symbols Using alias names facilitates the use of text placeholders too Using alias names is not compulsory a A TE Microsoft Excel j Gu a Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View JALIAS code comi ILook up in table symbols in column Description column in Symbols Component name Connection text 1 1 2 3 A 5 5 T g p Es ae E Lo Pos Es EE E 44 gt pl Symbols Project _ Page Selections Alias fa 4 PP Introducao Pagina 317
125. False No Line Spacing 0 pt Line Wrap False Clip Font E If set to Default the coresponding default font will be used k MPEs ar Cancel A 24 gt OK Click OK to close the window 25 Choose and place several fields Did you place all the fields You have another possibility instead of working with blank characters you can change the size of the available text area via drag poinis AES a Example O H H Name Et 26 M File 27 M Save 28 M File 29 M Exit Finish the label template designing The template can be used for creating labels P gina 330 QQ Introdu o as selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 1 1 FILES FOR LABEL TEMPLATES The label template always contains 5 CDS LBL LBP LBV and LBL files You must back up these files If you want to create a new label template using an existing template copy these 5 files in Windows Explorer a Copy of is created Then you can rename the label template in the start window of the List and Labels Designer QQ 1 2 CHANGING LABEL TEMPLATES If changes of the Label Layout are required after the label has been created for example the result after printing does not match the label or it is not positioned correctly you can change your label template Open the List and Label Designer click your label and select Design from the pop up menu Click Next to reconfirm the chosen
126. GHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Second Case The Aspect database is used The aspects have to be defined in the Aspects Manager If the component not found inside a function location box and an aspect is chosen that is not a child of the one defined on the current page the gt is created in front of this aspect on the component lf the component is found inside a function location box and an aspect is chosen that is not a child of the one defined for the function location box the gt is created in front of this aspect on the component How to define relative aspects for function location boxes If you use a function location box to hide the aspects already defined for components you have to select No when the Rename all components inside this function location box question appears C a 1 1 E HAS E FAL Ad Ag Si F7 F8 F9 uau _ ue ue 1 o AU 18 RS 5 ai If the answer is No the aspects for the components are not changed only the view of the texts is updated If the answer is Yes the aspects from the box are added to the ones already present on the components The F7 component will be C1 C1 A4 A4 F7 If the aspect defined on a box is changed and changes are applied to the components inside the box only the affected part is changed The location aspect for the F7 component is A4 the location aspect for the F9 component is A4 A4 1 After location is changed from A4 to A5 th
127. Group all the elements as a Terminal Line Block start symbol If the circle ellipse for the bridge shall appear only once in a terminal please add it to the Terminal Line Block Start symbol 2H1 41 Az 14 a 7 13 ERA x i o KA E Aat o t A 7 15 3b Draw the geometry for the last part of the terminal Group all the elements as a Terminal Line Block ena symbol 3c Draw the geometry for the middle part of the terminal these elements will eventually need to be extended PITT Pride l I l LIIITIIETII Group all the elements as a Terminal Line Block trim symbol X Introdu o P gina 191 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3e If you want you can draw geometry for the terminal number This part will contain the geometry for the bridge in case the circle appears in each line or if a terminal occupies two or more lines Group all the elements as a symbol of the type Graphical symbol 1a 2 14 2 14 SC 15 A2 18 42 15 3f Position the text for terminal number 3g Group the four symbols mentioned above together with the text for terminal number as a Block Macro Group symbol 4 Group all the symbols the macro group for the standard sheet and the macro group for single terminals as a Page Template Title block symbol 5 Save the new page template X 3 3 DRAWING GRAPHICS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH TERMINAL ONE SPECIF
128. IC GEOMETRY FOR EACH KIND OF TERMINAL Unlike the situation described above in this case the graphics for the terminal is not taken from the page template but from a symbol database Each terminal can be drawn with the help of a specific graphical symbol stored in the symbol database so you can use different symbols for the different types of terminals for example spare terminals end and separator plates Terminal Strip X2 Connection 1 Term No Connection 2 The symbol for the terminal in the terminal plans has to be assigned to the single terminals as described below in the part Which symbols are used for the terminal How to make a new template from an existing terminal plan template Pagina 192 X Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Remove all graphics and texts associated with the terminal symbol except for the terminal number this text marks the position of the first terminal symbol Add a normal text defining a default terminal symbol The syntax is LineSymbol lt symbol database name gt lt folder name gt lt symbol name gt For example LineSymbol Graphical List TerminalPlan OT erminal Generating a terminal symbol for the graphical plan to store in the symbol database The symbol needs to contain the graphics of the terminal symbol as described above graphical symbol Id 180180 and the following placeholder
129. O Todos os direitos reservados QQ 5 USEFUL TABLES IN ACCESS DATABASE AllTypesDISTINCT Bom_Explode2 Bom01 Cable001 ComponentT ypes ComponentTypesExploded Export 3001 Export 3010 Export 3011 Export 3020 Export 3020A Export 3020B Export 3020D Export 3025 Export 3025 Export 3030 Export 3030A Export 3030B Export 3030 Export 3031 Export 3040 Export 3050 Export 3060 Export 3070 Export 3100 Export 3101 Export 3102 Export 3103 Export 3104 Terminals Export 3180 Export 3181 Export 3182 Export 3225 Export 3226 Export 3280 Export 3285 Export Multiref Typelnformation P gina 360 All types in the project without types incl subtypes no data about article s information registry witho ut number All types in the project without types incl subtypes no data about article s registry of information numbers List of cables Component names and types Component names and types List of documents List of products with components from Circuit diagrams and Cabinets channel top hat rail etc List of products with type information Terminal names and types as well as article s registry of information List of terminals without type information List of terminals with type information All terminal types article s registry of information without number Connector List Connecior Pin List List of cables Only cable types Only different cables types List of cable wires List of c
130. PORTED DRAWINGS MORE INTELLIGENT VV 2 1 Defining Patterns DefinePatterns Command VV 2 2 Controling and Changing Patterns Assigning Texts ShowPatterns Command W 2 3 Recognizing Patterns RecognizeDrawingPatterns and Recognize WorkspacePatterns Commands 12 VV 2 4 Displaying all Elements with Logic A Introdu o P gina 9 12 12 12 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Pagina 10 A Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A INTRODU O Ao seguir este manual passo a passo voc ganhar experi ncia no uso do SEE Electrical Caso n o tenha trabalhado com o SEE Electrical voc poder seguir os exemplos dos cap tulos subsquentes Com isso sera poss vel aprender as fun es fundamentais do SEE Electrical Os primeiros cap tulos possuem informa es sobre fun es que ser o usadas mais adiante neste Manual de Treinamento Os cap tulos Edi o simples das listas de banco de dados a Fun o e localiza o aplicam se ao SEE Electrical Standard de Modifica es complexas das listas de banco de dados a Editor de lista e etiqueta aplicam se apenas ao SEE Electrical Advanced O cap tulo Layout necessita do SEE Electrical Standard e alguns exemplos requerem o respective m dulo Abrevia es usadas neste manual de treinamento CA Sele o de uma categ
131. PYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Activate Use module begin and end markers to determine the coordinates X and Y where the first group must be placed The Max X field specifies the maximum area available in the page template The possibility to place another group in one page depends on your end marker if it can be placed on a position less than or equalto the value of Max X Otherwise a new page is created By selecting the Use X and Y position option you can specify the coordinates for the symbol positions from two columns in the Excel list yale fl A a b ft f Alias data range Pagina 324 You can define the page template in the Excel spreadsheet The values in the Module positions area must comport with the used page template The number of groups that can be placed in one page depends on the size of the page template and on the size of the groups that you must place furthermore also if there is an s record inthe Excel sheet Symbols that causes a page to break or not Use alias names for the text reservation fields define the sheet of the Excel file and the fields on this sheet where the data must come from Using alias names is not compulsory PP Introducao see trical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Data entries are illustrated in the example Excel file PLC XLS sheet Alias ES Es ET E bt ProjectInto Alias al cay a
132. PYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados To delete a component not in graphic 1 Select the element 2 Right click and select the Delete Selected command 3 Click OK to confirm Notes 1 If you wish to insert these components in the circuit diagram you can do that through the Pick List command in the Functions category Make sure you have defined a database type and a graphic for the element in the channel definition of the type If in the channel definition no symbol is defined but connection texts and a size for the symbol are set a black box is generated If nothing is defined a rectangle with one connection point is generated when the component is inserted 2 When you position a component without graphic into a diagram it receives a name in accordance with the IEC 60757 norm depending on its type set during its creation or the type assigned to it from the Type Database If no specific type is defined the symbol is simply created as Component and no type is assigned from the Type Database then the name from the Editor is used the Product field When you insert a component into a circuit diagram page it disappears from the Component Without Graphic list 3 If a cable is inserted via the Picklist you have to follow the rules for drawing cables If you want to insert cable cores at different places you can take the first cable core from the Picklist but after that you have to draw the other cable cores
133. Rag o octrica i Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Manual de treinamento electrical V7R2 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Copyright Copyright c Julho 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Nenhuma parte deste manual ou trecho dele pode ser reproduzido transcrito salvo ou traduzido de qualquer forma ou por qualquer meio sem autoriza o por escrito da IGE XAO 25 bld Victor Hugo Immeuble Le Pythagore BP 90312 31 773 COLOMIERS CEDEX FRAN A Pagina 2 A Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados ndice A INTRODU O A l PROJETO A 2 ARQUIVOS E PASTAS B CRIANDO UM NOVO PROJETO C DESENHANDO A PRIMEIRA P GINA DE ESQUEMA EL TRICO C 1 CRIANDO A P GINA 1 C 2 GRID C 3 PAGINA 1 C 4 TRABALHANDO COM O ZOOM D DESENHANDO A SEGUNDA P GINA DE ESQUEMA EL TRICO D 1 CRIANDO A P GINA 2 D 2 P GINA D 3 COPIANDO ELEMENTOS EXISTENTES NA PAGINA 2 E DESENHANDO CABOS F INFORMA ES ADICIONAIS NO ESQUEMA EL TRICO F 1 USANDO S MBOLOS DE REFER NCIA CRUZADA F 2 USANDO S MBOLOS DE TEXTO DE INFORMA O F 3 NDICE DA P GINA F 4 TEXTOS G HIPERLIGA ES G 1 ADMINISTRANDO HYPERLIGA ES H LEMBRETES I IMPRESS O L1 IMPRIMIR J LISTAS DE BANCO DE DADOS K LISTAS GR FICAS K 1l GERANDO UMA LISTA GR
134. Rana e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Selecione o tipo de s mbolo neste caso Componente Defini o GrupofComponente Bloca Macro Grupo A Bobina Rel Em Bobina Rel Neutra sem lista Bobina Rel Atraso Desenergiza o Bias ea Bobina Rel Atraso Energiza o Cabo Lama Simbolo inteligente CLP M dulo Principal Componente c Contatato Aus com cruz de contato Componente com Contato ausilar Componente sem listagem exceto como Destino Conector Mult interruptor Operando CLP Pagina Modelo Bloco de Titulo Rel Contato MA Rel Contato MA reversivel Rel Contato HA atrazo desenergiza o Rel Contato MA atrazo energiza o Rel Contato NF Rel Contato NF atrazo desenergiza o Rel Contato NF atrazo energiza o Rel Contato NF revers vel Rel Contato Principal Ma Rel Contato Principal NF Rel Contato Principal reversivel Rel Contato revers vel Componente de Potencial Transparente 8 gt OK O tipo de s mbolo selecionado determinar o tipo de lista de banco de dados ou lista gr fica em que ele ser mostrado Uma refer ncia em cruz aparecer abaixo de um simbolo de Bobina mas n o de Componente 9 4 A Insira a letra do nome do componente 10 gt OK A parte gr fica esta completa e a ela foram adicionados os textos de nome descri o tipo e as conex es A letra A sera usada para composi
135. STRING 320 100660 Workspace Description line 17 oo STRING Sal 100670 Workspace Description line 15 ot STRING a40 100680 Workspace Description line 19 o STRING 350 100690 Workspace Description line 20 o STRING 360 hy text wana SS e SS SS H 4 Record 37 UF Cancel 4 Fill in the other fields as desired tick the check box in the Show column and click OK to apply your new text A message appears informing you that you have to close the workspace and open it again in order to activate the new setting s 5 Close the workspace and re open it The new text is displayed in the corresponding Workspace information pane Properties x Hame Workspace Descrptior line 13 Workspace Descrptior line 14 Workspace Descrption line 15 Workspace Descrptior line 16 Workspace Descrptior line 17 Workspace Descrptior line 18 Workspace Descrptior line 19 Workspace Descrptior line 20 biy text Workspace Locked My text Circuit diagrams EM 7 FF Introdu o P gina 263 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Hints 1 If you click OK without entering the Text id field a message appears informing you that your text ID must be within a certain range 2 To delete any user defined entry select it and press the Delete key on the keyboard You can
136. Solte o s mbolo copiado A caixa de di logo do nome do contato aparecer Componente 2K4 Escolha o nome a partir da janela Componente Fun o Localiza o OK Feche a caixa de di logo Clique em qualquer local vazio da rea de desenho para desfazer a sele o Voc pode inserir m ltiplas c pias do objeto selecionado Selecione o objeto a ser copiado Execute o comando Copiar Execute o comando Colar Tecle o n mero correspondente a quantidade de c pias necess rias antes de clicar para posicionar a primeira c pia do objeto P gina 44 D Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Clique para posicionar a primeira c pia a dist ncia desejada do objeto original A pr xima c pia aparecer a mesma dist ncia mas na pr xima coluna O mesmo ocorrer com as demais c pias Se voc digitar O ser poss vel criar mais de nove c pias e definir a dist ncia entre elas Tenha em mente que esta fun o n o funciona na vers o norteamericana Exerc cio 4 19 Desenhar a conex o faltante 1 CA Diagrama El trico 2 CO 1 Fio a partir do painel Conexao dos fios 3 Defina o ponto inicial da conex o a partir do ponto entre o contato NA de 2K3 e o borne 4 Clique para definir o Segundo ponto da conex o 5 Selecione o ponto final do fio no potencial L1 6 Clique com o botao direito do mouse para sair do
137. TING LIST TEMPLATES 00 2 1 Files for List Templates 00 2 2 List Title Text Object 00 2 5 Header Lines 00 2 4 Group Header 12 12 12 12 12 12 I2 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 A Introducao Pagina 7 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 00 2 5 00 2 6 00 2 7 00 2 8 Group Footer Lines Data Lines Footer Line List Footer Line Text Object QQ 3 EDITING LISTS 00 3 1 00 3 2 00 3 3 00 3 4 00 3 5 00 3 6 QQ 3 6 a QQ 3 6 b OO 3 7 QQ 3 7 a 00 3 8 Changing Column Titles Header Lines Changing a List Font Size Fields Order Adding or Deleting Fields Changing the List Title List Title with Questions List Title with Generation Date Filtering in the Lists List of Parts for a Particular Manufacturer List of Parts without Terminals Calculations Calculation of Order Costs Line Numbering QQ 4 DEFINING SQL QUERIES FOR LISTS AND LABELS QQ 4 1 QQ 4 1 a 00 42 QQ 4 2 a 00 4 3 QQ 4 3 a QQ 4 3 b QQ 4 3 c 00 44 00 4 5 Joining Two Lists Joining Information from Cable List and Cable Wires List Filtering Double Records List of Functions Locations on Pages Sorting a List Order List Cable Length Addition Length Calculation for Cable Channels and Rails Multiple Printing of Labels Labels for Component Names with Defined Content QQ 5 USEFUL TABLES IN ACCESS DATABASE QQ 6 STATEMENT SUMMARY AND
138. The same rules as for the LineBreak command are valid Pos lt value gt The placeholder Pos command enables you to get a line numbering consecutive numbers in simple graphical lists like document list product list cable list etc line numbering is already possible in wiring list The placeholder can be used together with a start value for the line number Pos n for example Pos 100 starts with value 100 If a start value for the line number is not found the line number will start with value 1 The increment for the number always Is 1 The line numbers cannot be used in terminal matrix connector matrix cable plan cable terminal row plan products assembly terminal plan terminal row picture plan and connector plan lists OrderBy The graphical list is sorted according to the defined values lt values gt whose codes number are stated after the keyword OrderBy Example List of Products OrderBy 140020 140050 160010 The List of Products is ordered at first by Function of the products in ascending order then by Location of the products in ascending order and then by component names in ascending order You can sort the List of Products according to types OrderBy 160040 or according to component names OrderBy 160010 Pagina 126 P Introdu o gaa c ectrical Where argument P Introdu o Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Sorting in descending
139. The terminal editor sorts directly so renumbering in this way is possible Select the desired terminal strip in the Terminal strip column Right click with the mouse and set the filter on Right click and select Renumber all shown terminals from the pop up menu d Renumber the terminals in a terminal strip not in the available sequence but all terminals in column 1of page 1 first then the terminals in column 2 etc L E lt 7 w7 3 45 F 5A H 7 ia in E RE x2 i Select the desired Terminal strip in the Terminal strip column Right click and set the filter on Select the Page column Right click and sort the column in ascending order Select the column X it is sorted in ascending order and then the Y column is sorted in descending order Right click again and click Renumber all shown terminals from the pop up menu e Renumber all terminals except terminals with number PE etc Sort by terminal strip then by terminal numbers select all the terminals except these with PE number etc and change as described under b f Change the terminal type Select all the desired terminals and enter a type g Renumber combined terminals inthe Terminal Editor advanced level In case you have multi layer terminals in your circuit diagram make sure to use the gt formula when you rename them in order to avoid omitting numbers during the renumbering For example 1 gt 1 Pagina 234 DD Introd
140. To Export parts of the Aspects tree You can export parts of the Aspects tree into an XML file and later import then into a new or empty project 1 Select the node you want to export Only the information from the selected node and the structure below this node will be exported If you want to export information for the function and location you have to export to 2 XML files 2 Select the Export To XML pop up command 3 Define the name of the XML file CC Introducao Pagina 225 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados To import function location information into the Aspects tree You can import function location information into the Aspects tree from an XML file 1 Select the node you want to import the information into 2 Right click and select the Import from XML pop up command 3 Decide if you want to overwrite the existing information Note The functions and locations can also be managed via the Function Location database editor To add products If you have enabled the Product database in the Workspace Properties window General tab the Products area is available in the Function Location Product Manager 1 Right click within the Products area 2 Select the Add Product pop up command You can add information about the new product in the new entry for a Product that appears Within this line it is possible to insert a product s name and descr
141. Type in this example 31B46170BB4 The type is selected 6 gt Close the Type Database Browser dialogue by clicking OK 7 gt OK Close the Component Properties dialogue box Exercise 18 9 Filter the coil types inthe Type Database according to the number of used contacts 1 Double click the K4 coil gt gt Click EE in the Type field 3 Tick the Activate option inthe Contact Filter area of the Type Database Browser After the filter is activated the list will contain only the necessary number of contacts You can additonaly add more contacts to the filter manually 4 gt Define the desired filter the base of the filter is the number of contacts already present in the circuit diagram 5 gt To define more contacts use the Define buiton Na Contact Filter Ea Contact type Relay contacts NO Relay contacts NO slow release Relay contacts NO slow operating Relay contacts NO change over Relay contacts NC Relay contacts NC slow operating Relay contacts NC slow release Relay contacts NC change over Relay contacts CHANGE Relay contacts CHANGE slow release Relay contacts CHANGE slow operating Multi switch Relay contacts MAIN NO Relay contacts MAIN NC Relay contacts MAIN CHANGE Ses S a ea a all l al aa Pagina 148 T Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 18 10 Assign types to the
142. Various placeholders allow you to set the desired values N wire number C wire colour S wire section T type Q signal and P potential For the Post Wire Part the same rules apply If a line is not desired leave it empty Mark Target as Potential In this field you have the possibility to insert a prefix or a suffix which indicates potentials Z Introdu o Pagina 213 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example 1 Mark target as Potential Pret Postfix Potential POTENTIAL Result al Bee Example 2 Mark target as Potential Prefix Postfix Potential POTENTIAL Result POTENTIAL LI F1 1 Target Separator Target Separator At In this field you have the possibility to define whether the targets will be displayed in a single line or not v n defines the beginning of a new line v t defines if the values of this area should be inserted with a tabulation to the right v Ifyou type in a character as separator for example a semi colon all the targets will appear on a single line P gina 214 Z Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados AA FUNCTION AND LOCATION Standard In SEE Electrical Standard or Advanced you can choose to work with functio n location by activating the settings inthe Workspace Properties window
143. XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 7 CALCULATIONS To execute calculations for example about costs of an order it is necessary to define sum variables You can define sum variables by selecting Project menu Sum variables QQ 3 7 a CALCULATION OF ORDER COSTS Define sum variables Calculate the total price of the articles of a type first The total price is calculated as follows Unit price code 12000150 x Number code 180040 The sum variable Total is defined as follows z E Sum Yariables a x Aallable sum variables 2 A Page sum Name mT otal Wal F 12000150 Val F_180040 aF 12000150 Val IF 180040 i E l Expression Is comect Cancel As the unit price and number are transferred from the SEE Electrical project as text character string the contents of the field is converted into a number using the Val command The option Page sum must not be activated as otherwise the prices in one page will be accumulated However the total price of all the articles in the list will not be calculated QQ Introdu o Pagina 347 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 Edit data line If the sum variable is defined the table can be edited The data line includes the record Unit price x Number in addition to the data fields Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 Line
144. a o segundo ponto do ret ngulo na parte inferior direita da coluna desenhada Todos os componentes e conex es ser o destacadas 4 Ap s selecionar a coluna posicione o cursor perto do n superior Esse ponto ser usado como refer ncia ao fazer a c pia Mantenha pressionada a tecla CTRL o bot o esquerdo do mouse e movimente o Uma c pia da coluna ser criada e poder ser inserida na coluna 3 Se voc n o pressionar a tecla CTRL os componentes selecionados ser o apenas movidos 5 Insira a c pia na coluna 3 e solte a tecla CTRL A sequ ncia de caixas de di logo que aparecer o para os components depender da sequ ncia em que os components foram inseridos ou deslocados O nome do borne sera perguntado 6 gt Componente X3 ser sugerido por padr o O n mero e ndice dever ser 3 7 gt OK O nome do contato aberto sera solicitado 8 gt Componente Preencha o nome do contato NA 9 104 10 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada Exerc cio 4 12 Desfazer a sele o dos componentes Voc pode desfazer a sele o dos components clicando em um ponto da p gina em que n o existam objetos 1 CA Geral 2 CO Desfazer a partir do menu Selecionar D Introdu o P gina 39 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 13 Inserir o s mbolo 1 pole NC na conex o existente da coluna 3 10 gt 11 12 gt 13 Pa
145. a partir do menu suspenso Defina o ponto de refer ncia para o deslocamento do texto Posicione o texto no local desejado Com este comando voc pode deslocar todos os textos sem desagrupar o componente M Introdu o P gina 79 see trical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 12 10 Gire os textos dos n meros de conex o N o desagrupe o s mbolo 1 CA Editar 2 CO Editar texto a partir do painel Texto 3 Clique no texto que voc deseja girar Pesquisar qualquer parte do texto BD de Tradu o Propriedades Propriedades Basicas Bibs Tedonoml E Fonte N mero fonte vetorial 1 Aua 350 Distinia 070 Anguo 000 Largura 350 il Dist ncia da Linha Exibir propriedades avan adas 4 gt Angulo 5 0 Modifique o ngulo de 90 graus para 0 6 gt Feche a caixa de di logo Texto 7 CA Geral 8 CO Parcial painel Selecionar elementos 9 4 Selecione o texto de conexao a ser girado 10 Pressione a tecla CTRL e selecione outros textos caso queira gir los ao mesmo tempo 11 CA Editar 12 CO Editar Texto painel Texto A janela Texto sera aberta 13 gt Angulo 14 gt 0 O angulo sera modificado nos textos selecionados 15 gt Feche a janela Texto Pagina 80 M Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 3 MANIPULANDO A PARTE GR FICA Exerc cio 12 11
146. a serem copiados em um ret ngulo O ret ngulo definido pela sele o de dois pontos opostos Neste exerc cio ser usado o ret ngulo Existem duas formas de selecionar parte de um desenho com um ret ngulo Se voc quiser selecionar apenas elementos que estejam totalmente dentro da area selecionada movimente o cursor da esquerda para a direita O cursor ficar assim iz Se voc quiser selecionar todos os elementos ainda que estejam parcialmente na rea selecionada movimente o cursor da direita para a esquerda O cursor ficar assim as P gina 38 D Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Dica Se voc quiser selecionar elementos em desenhos com conte do congestionado pode ser imposs vel posicionar o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo e ao inv s disso ser feita a sele o de algum elemento A sele o err nea de elementos individuais pode ser evitada conforme segue Mantenha pressionada a tecla W ao clicar o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo com o bot o esquerdo do mouse 2 Clique e mantenha pressionado o bot o esquerdo do mouse para definir o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo esquerda acima do desenho presente na coluna 2 Os s mbolos ser o selecionados se estiverem localizados completamente no ret ngulo Arraste o mouse mantendo o bot o esquerdo pressionado para definir o segundo ponto do ret ngulo conforme o passo abaixo 3 Defin
147. a target only at the first terminal if several terminals are linked If you enter another text for example Target left as shown inthe picture above then each potential appears at each terminal for linked terminals too as in the circuit diagram If you type NoPotf as text potentials or reference symbols don t appear as targets for terminals lf the text placeholder for terminal number doesn t begin with a capital letter a terminal number appears in each line where there is information about this terminal If the text placeholder begins with a capital letter the terminal number appears only in the first line Position of the right target of the terminal for example Target right behind Connection 2 Number of lines available for terminals for example 50 lines the distance between the position text of the left target and the number of lines defines the distance between the third and next lines for terminals in the terminal matrix X Introdu o P gina 185 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados P gina 186 Sheet and Sheet Index where the terminal is located Text placeholder for the function and location of the page Column where the terminal is located Terminal type Terminal description In case you need reserve terminals place the text Reserve terminals in the text placeholder for the left target The text with an attribute Spare terminal defines the targ
148. aa e ectri cal Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 5 AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Requirements Create a new project for example AUTOMATIC If you use an existing project it will be overwritten i e all existing data will be lost Hint You can save an empty workspace with a page 1000 as a workspace template PP 5 1 THE AUTODIAGRAM COMMAND lf the project is created and the page 1000 is active and visible launch the Auto diagram command You will find the command in the pop up menu available for the module Circuit Diagrams Auto Generate Diagrams from Excel Access Source data Workspace Page symbol Alias Sauce file name Excel sheet or Sccess Database ef Start page Page number to start Generate settings V Create Block alter loading Cancel Apply Help Enter the required settings find more details below Click the OK button to start the automatic generation of the circuit diagram Pagina 318 PP Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The circuit diagrams will be generated The settings are stored within Windows and are available for the next execution of the function Source data tab PP Introdu o Enter first the sheet of the Excelfile and the fields where the data for your project come from The included Excel file PLC XLS sheet Project d
149. ables for example if you have to go from one circuit board to another circuit board upon connectors connector 3 1A3 controller connector 2 connector 1 TA4 S11 measurement measurement Multicores can be displayed in the special database lists Multicores and Multicore wires Exercise 36 1 Define a wire as a multicore wire 1 CA Electrical 2 CO Multicore Multicore panel 3 Identify the wire you wish to define as a multicore The multicore receives a name You can define another wire as a multicore Do not do this now Right click to exit the multicore drawing mode NN Introdu o P gina 301 Manual de treinamento Es e ectrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 Double click the text of the Multicore name You can enter a description type and length of the multicores You will find the corresponding data in the list of multicores afterwards 5 You can change the pen style and pen width if you wish In this way you can highlight the multicores graphically Use the functions already known Exercise 36 2 Assign wires to the multicores 1 CA Electrical 2 CO Properties Multicore panel 3 Select the multicores that you wish to assign single wires to and edit the wires The following dialogue box appears Multicore Properties Sorting 2K Wire size Wire color Wire type ma dj 4 Record 1
150. ace the component a second time lf the functionality is enabled and a product is already present in a workspace the OK button is greyed out in case you select this product aspect again How to use the Product Aspect When working with the Product aspect component and cable names have to be assigned with the help of the Function Location Product manager the component attributes Description00 and Type are filled from the Component definition here The function and location currently chosen in the Function Location Product manager when making a component in the product area are used in the component name After a component is created a type can be added from type database You can also add terminals and connectors with the appropriate command lf components are defined in the Function Location Product manager and the type used has a proper channel definition connection texts and symbol to use in circuit diagram are defined you can double click the graphical symbol in the lower right area of the window and place it directly into an open diagram If a component contains more than one channel all available channels are displayed in this section The channels that have been already used are greyed out On mouse over they show the page and cell where the symbol is located In this case you can navigate to this page by double clicking in case the window has been opened via the Aspects command How to change component names when
151. acturer Symbol name for al Assign subtypes Gap al Detine Channels ia User setting 3 l4 4 Record 1 9 gt Click the Va ue column for the respective properties Type in the following values Width 100 used in module Cabinets Height 100 used in module Cabinets Description 1 AC relay coil Order number 123A Exercise 18 5 Define channels for your relay coil type A relay coil or a component with auxiliary contacts needs the information about the contact mirror that must be used When a contact mirror must be shown under the relay coil symbol this property is essential It is also necessary for a component with auxiliary contacts if an automatic contact numbering is to be performed 1 gt Click the amp icon inthe Value column for the Define channels property The Channel Definitions dialogue appears Perform the channel definition i Channel Definitions MH gt lt m Drawing types Connection ID Symbol Reference Symbol Circuit diagrams EN Circuit diagrams IEEE Installations Cabinets Mirrors All connections 2 gt Select the Circuit Diagrams EN drawign type 3 gt In the All connections area insert the connection texts A1 and A2 T Introdu o P gina 143 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PE Channel Definitions Drawing types Reference Symbol 5 gt Check the Us
152. ados SS USEFUL TOOLS SS 1 COMPRESSING PROJECTS Projects in SEE Electrical are MS Access database files Because of the specific MS Access properties the objects inserted in the database remain there even if they are deleted They are not really removed unless the database is compressed You should do this exercise periodically to avoid that your projects become extremely large and slow to manipulate Exercise 41 1 Compress your workspace 1 Close all open workspaces The command allowing you to compress a workspace is only accessible when all workspaces are closed 2 CA File 3 Co Compress A dialogue appears containing all existing workspaces 4 gt lt Project name gt Select the project you wish to compress 5 gt Open The selected project is compressed It is possible now to compress workspaces each time they are closed This functionality is activated via the Auto compress project when closing project option in the System Settings window q E General E Folder Colour and layout ET Licence Backup Cl Automatic Backup of Pages Automatic Backup Interval in Minutes Documents Maximum Opened Document Views 10 Note Min value is 2 Safe Mode Work on local copy Compress Archive C Compress drawings before storing Safemode Work on local copy of project 1 Auto compress project when closing project 1 Auto archive project when closing project Floating Style Menu Multiple instances Cl Show floati
153. age 1 2 2 DESENHANDO CABOS AS A GROUPING OF CABLE CORES IL Introdu o P gina 279 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The groupings of cable cores are generated because instead of texis for the cable information definitions for a cable group are added into the page template for the Terminal Plan The text for the number of lines available for cables has to be defined additionally to this cable gro up Generating the page template Generate all objects necessary for the terminal plan as already described You can load an existing page template and delete the texts for the cable information from this template Block all this objects as Block Macro Group Generate the cable group as follows Roure 2 Wee x Route 2 Des 4s Type 9 The symbols are shown rotated by 90 degrees The cable symbol ID 1600 consists of 3 blocks v the routing information from cable to target v the cable v the routing information from cable to terminals V After you create all 3 paris block them as Cable The length of the three paris together has to be equal to the distance between the geometry of the terminal plan and the position of the text placeholder Graphical target left Additionally the horizontal line in the cable has to be at the same height as the end of the line for the minimum distance x Pautezr Des Ms Type es mos heigth a cob
154. ake the mapping information from in the Set XML file to export tex field 17 Press the button to open and load the desired folder and then select the XML file 18 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button 19 Press the Replace templates text button to start the replacing process Pagina 258 EE Introducao gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 10 PLC FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE ADVANCED LEVEL Automatic numbering of addresses If you use SEE Electrical advanced you can set the PLC Address Numbering Method in the Circuit Diagrams Properties Decimal Octal Hexadecimal i e lower case letters in addresses for example E0 a or HEXADECIMAL i e upper case letters in addresses for example E0 A If you enter a value for an address for example inthe Rack the next values based upon it are automatically numbered So if you need to position a lot of addresses on the page position the first one give the good name of the component and the address Then copy the next ones The addresses are automatically numbered according to the chosen PLC Address Numbering Method Import the PLC allocation list There is a feature in SEE Electrical for importing a PLC allocation list if it is available as an Excel file PLC allocation lists usually do not contain information about the component name of the PLC inthe Circuit diagram Instead of this the PL
155. al Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The symbol name for the symbol used in Terminal Matrix Terminal Plan and Terminal Row Picture Plan can be specified by the Terminal Plan Symbol component text in the circuit diagram or inside the Type database by the Terminal Plan Symbol type property ld 12021300 in case you wish to use the same terminal symbol for all terminals of one type Define the symbol name without specifying a symbol database and folder The name of the symbol database and folder are givenin the page template in the LineSymbol text For spare terminals the default terminal symbol is used Hint In the advanced level you can define spare terminals via the Terminal Editor Inserting headers and endplates You can insert headers and endplates if necessary The default symbols for header and endplate are defined in the page template Add to the LineSymbol placeholder an additional text with P lt name of symbol for template gt H lt name for symbol for header gt Example of an entry in the Terminal Plan template LineSymbol Graphical LisATerminalRowPictureiO Terminal H OHeader P 0Plate Plates and spare terminals from the Component without graphics list advanced A plate is similar to a terminal and you can manage it as a terminal without graphic manual component The symbol name of a plate can be specified in the same way as for a terminal
156. also hide not needed Database lists and Graphical lists You can find the customizing options for the workspace tree within the Workspace Properties dialogue box by clicking the List definition tab P gina 264 FF Introdu o asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados GG CUSTOMIZING THE WORKSPACE TREE Advanced GG 1 HIDE UNNECESSARY DATABASE AND GRAPHICAL LISTS It is possible to create your own database and graphical lists and thus your own SQL queries However it is not possible to insert the Terminal Matrix Terminal Row Picture Terminal Row Picture Plan or Cable Plan graphical lists for a second time into the project tree Also database editors are not user defined customizable In the List definition tab of the Workspace Properties window you can find the options for customizing a General List definition Workspace text Page text Object types Component text b List id 4185 Editor PLCVO Export 3051 Editor Function amp Location Export 35150 Editor Component without graphic Export 3157 Editor Connector Export 3186 Editor Signals Export 3070 Check double naming Export HultiRefi Check overbooked contacts _OverbookedContacts Check PLC Connections PLC_ConnectionCheck PrintList Export 3205 View Compressed BOM Export 4207 View Compresses BOM Page Export 4208 View Multicores Export 3250 View Hulticore wires Export 32d
157. alue in the cable type WHERE IIf IsNull 160 200 160 200 lt gt Not Required Using the Ilf function you can determine whether a term is true or false If the term is true Ilf returns a value if the term is false Ilf returns another value You define the values which are returned by lif The Ilf function syntax uses the following arguments DESCRIPTION OF ARGUMENTS expr required a term that you want to evaluate Truepart required Value or term that is returned if expr is true falsepart required Value or term that is returned if expr is wrong Thus IIF returns the value if 160200 has no entry and thus P gina 127 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Columns lt number of columns gt lt of set for next column gt Lines 30 7 5 coloumns 2 we get an entry and the value for the cable type when 160 200 is an entry Using Where you can give out only that what is not equal to the term Not Required In Document list there are specific rules refer to the specific list to get to know about them In Terminal Matrix and Terminal Plan Connector Matrix and Plan Terminal Row Picture Plan and Cable Plan this attribute is not available In other lists might exist several restrictions It is possible to output more than one column in multiple graphical lists that are filled line by line Documents list Product list Par
158. amento electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 9 CHANGING THE FONTS AND ATTRIBUTES FOR ALL TEXTS IN THE WORKSPACE SYMBOL LIBRARIES OR PAGE TEMPLATES You can change the fonts in the workspaces page templates and symbol libraries Alltools are located in the Commands pane of the software It is possible to change the fonts for a single project or for several project symbol libraries and templates Exercise 29 3 Finding and changing all fonts used in a single workspace 1 CO FontT oolReadSingleProject 2 Define the project to scan for fonts the current project is suggested by default 3 Press the button to choose another project 4 gt Define the XML file to write the font settings into in the Set XML file to export text field 5 Press the button to open and load the desired folder and then type name of XML file 6 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button If you select an existing XML file a question appears asking you if you want to add the results of the new scan to this XML file or if you want to start again If you add the new results to the existing file you can benefit from the mappings already done and you will be sure that you use the same definitions for all your data 7 Press the Scan project for texts button to start the scanning process 8 CO FontT oolMapFont 9 Choose the first XML file with the results from the scanning of your data 10
159. an become accessible again and can be used individually if needed In both cases you can edit the component names and the potential names N 1 CREATING A GROUP Using the Power supply example we will illustrate how the two kinds of groups are created Exercise 13 1 Draw the required potentials insert the symbols for terminals and switchgear Use the known commands Cro mirry y i ee NE p P gina 104 N Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 13 2 Save the group for further usage in the symbol database Before storing the group in the symbol database decide what its performance will be Single symbols wires and potentials can be manipulated single again i e they can be moved copied or deleted Loose group The group must be manipulated as a whole Component group i e it can only be moved or deleted as a group If desired it can be ungrouped so that single symbols wires and potentials in the group can become accessible and can be used individually again In both cases you can edit the component names and the potential names at any time Exercise 13 2a First save the supply as a loose group 1 Activate the Symbols Explorer MySymbols Double click the MySymbols database You can save symbols only in this database or in a new one J Right click with the mouse 4 CO New Folder 5 Power supplies Type in the name of the
160. ana Switching terminal etc Example X10 Terminal strip lt is possible by means of a Header to show additional information in front of the terminal as the one shown above the cover plate of the terminal strip The End symbol accomplishes the same KK Introdu o Pagina 291 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Header ioner End symbol y Symbol HE t ER TH m T mh No You can specify in three ways which symbol must be used for displaying the terminal Via the terminal type In the Type database you can assign the symbol by selecting the Symbol name for terminal plan multi level property or select the symbol by means of the Symbol browser You can also determine in addition to the terminal symbol which Header symbol and which End symbol to be used inthe Terminal plan multi level The definition must be formed as follows T lt Terminal Symbol Name gt H lt Header Symbol Names E lt End Symbol Name gt If you do not wish to place a Header Symbol you can type HO behind the name of the terminal symbol for the Terminal plan multi level therefore T lt Names gt HO If you wish to give before each terminal the Header Symbol indicated in the Symbol for the Terminal plan multi level type H1 therefore T lt Names gt H1 If you wish to give behind each terminal the End symbol indicated in the Sym
161. and the PLC address connections For the import of the allocation list it must be chosen which text should receive the PLC group identifier for example Free text 01 or Free text 20 or Description It is important to decide which text is possible and you have to insert this text in your PLC Rack and PLC connections Assign the information to the symbols Double click the PLCImportAssign command from the Commands explorer to execute it Afterwards identify the symbol that you want to assign information to Pagina 260 EE Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 11 GENERATE GRAPHICAL LISTS IN ONE STEP Advanced The Graphical lists can be generated in one step using the Generate command in the Graphical lists node E Generate Graphical Lists Sah Generate Graphical Lists Document list Product list Teminal list Connector list Connector Pin list Cable list Cable Core list PLC 1 0 list Wires list Wiring list Wire Parts list Parts list simple Spareparts list simple Parts list Spareparts list Teminal Matrix Connector Matrix Cable plan Cable Teminalrow plan Parts list simple F amp L sorted E T C a m m C m m m E E m m E E E E m E Exercise 29 7 Generate the graphical lists with the help of the Generate pop up command 1 In the Workspace Explorer right click the Graphical lists node 2 CO Generate
162. anguages setup area of the Translation window or via the View Other Language command EE 8 2 TRANSLATION OF PART STRINGS It is possible to translate part strings The software searches the part strings in the following way First is searched the whole text to be translated If a match has been found the text is translated If the text is not found in the translation database the software searches for a part string of the text The software searches first for the part string that has the largest number of characters If this part string is not found in the translation database the next one in the text is taken into consideration etc Examples Source text French translation Motor Moteur Motor control Controle du moteur Diagram Source text French translation Motor 1 Moteur 1 Motor 2 Moteur 2 Motor control Controle du moteur Motor control circuit Controle du moteur circuit EE 8 3 UPDATING TRANSLATION TEXT IN A SHEET Advanced Generally when you modify an already translated text you can only change the text in the source language In the example below the text Motor has been translated from English to French Moteur The Functions Other O Update Translated Text command allows you to directly edit the translation text Pagina 252 EE Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Edit Text
163. art symbol if the first core is not connected to Start the shield Cables CablePlan S hield This is the start symbol if the shield is connected to the first StartC core Cables CablePlan S hield This is the middle symbol if a core is not connected to the Mid shield Cables CablePlan S hield This is the middle symbol if the shield is connected to this MidC core Cables CablePlan S hield lf there is spacing between two cores in the cable plan this Free symbol is used to make the shield look closed Cables CablePlan S hield This is the end symbol if the last core is not connected to End the shield Cables CablePlan S hield This is the end symbol if the shield is connected to the last EndC core Pare metas ios rs i Shield Shield Shield onnectei to shield mmm a im am mmm mmm a shield Shield Shield teres connected to shield Shell Symbol shield free Y Introdu o P gina 205 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The symbols are used in the cable plan in the following way symbol shield free Each symbol consists of geometry and a placeholder text Cable Shield see the text shield in the picture below This placeholder text is necessary in order to place the symbol in the template on top of the text Cable shield The text of the second symbol is positioned with a distance to the first one that is given by the distance between the tem
164. ata contains example data E PLC xls PLC IGE 440 Address1 00 Address2 E Zipcode City E Ea Telephone ER Fax EMail Attention Attention Attention3 Proj Description line 01 Proj Description line 02 Proj Description line 03 a ale HA Projectinfo Pagelnfo Symbols Alias 4 Source file name Excel Access Souce file name Excel sheet or Access Database ef Enter here the name of the Excel or Access file that comprises the defaults about the automatic generation of circuit diagrams First page Stat page Apa n Page number to start 1 You specify here from which page the automatic project engineering must start P gina 319 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Attention No circuit diagrams must be present after the defined start page number in this field in such case they will be deleted Workspace information tab Range Sheet name From Column Testid To Hd Column text From The first field from the Excel sheet that contains data about the project To The last field from the Excel sheet that contains project information Sheet name For example Project data name of the Excel sheet to be used if you wish to change the sheet names of your Excel table you must then type valid names Column TextID Type the letter of that column of the Excel sheet containing the TexilD data Column Text
165. ata structured in rows and columns in a standard file structure predefined with tags It is possible to open edit save XML Spreadsheets using a Microsoft Excel application The xml file looks very much like a standard Excel table but it cantinas hidden control elements That is why you can change only what is described below EJ Microsoft Excel Types xml oj x Ei File Edit view Insert Format Tools Data Window Help f x da E Arial 10 B ZU Za HER EF Y A12 e fe 3561 DONAS Type Descriptio Goodsgro Supplier Width Height Descriptio Descri 4 3LFTIDO 4 4 POSITIO BUTTON SIEMENS SE LEL 5 3LF1100 44 POSITIO BUTTON SIEMENS SELEC E SSB1100 CBLACK FLBUTTON SIEMENS CORP 7 3561100 FED FLUSBUTTON SIEMENS CORP 8 35561100 YELLOW BUTTON SIEMENS CORF 9 3561100 GREEN FLBUTTON SIEMENS CORP 10 35811004 BLUE FLUBUTTON SIEMENS CORP ja M 4 Hi Sheeti Jo B A v The first line contains the ID from SEE Electrical for each column You are not allowed to change this line v The second line contains the titles of the columns You are not allowed to change this line v The following columns contain the information about the article in SEE Electrical Save the Excelfile Rename it if desired and keep in mind that you have to select the file type The contents and the structure of the Excelfile can change depending on the information contained in the exported SEE Electrical type database Pagina 166 V Introducao E
166. attribute Pin number 6 The graphical symbol and the text with the attribute Pin number have to be grouped as Macro Group T Add a Normal text attribute to the content PageBreak 0 or PageBreak 0 Lines 8 for example where Lines 8 indicates that multiple connectors will be generated and Lines 8 indicates that the connector header uses the space given for 8 terminal lines if no Lines is used to specify the connector header the necessary space is calculated from the graphic found in the template The text Pagebreak in the template can be used to control the generation of the new page PageBreak 0 Multiple connectors are generated on one page like before a new page is generated only if the page is full PageBreak 1 or PageBreak 160010 or PageBreak are used to start a new page f the name of the connector has been changed PageBreak 140020 or PageBreak are used to start a new page if the function has been changed PageBreak 140050 or PageBreak Are used to start a new page if the function has been changed You can define how is managed the function and location information in the connector s name The connector s name is always extended with the function and location information if you add the text DLO to the PageBreak command even if the connector has the same function and location information then the page it is found on If you add the text DL1 to the PageBreak command then the
167. attributes lf you want a combination of the wire attributes number size colour type signal type or potential name in one text please proceed as follows Combine the text placeholder 180111 in each combination with the placeholders N wire number C wire colour S wire size T wire type P signal type Q potential name Example 4180111 N C S lf you want you can use a separator for example Example 180111 N C S The attributes appear in the Wiring list inthe sort order in which you define them in the template You can add a blank between the different attributes like shown in the example ora separator for example a comma 180112 Represents the list of targets of each wire part Example 1801112 Sep Len 170 Cnt 0 Sort 1NCS If you use this placeholder all targets are listed one after the other Different parameters allow you to define the appearance All parameters must be in the definition Cnt Specifies the maximum number of targets in each line of the text 0 means ignore You can either use Cnt or Len to control the length of the string Z Introdu o P gina 209 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Specifies the maximum length of each line of the text 0 means ignore You can either use Cnt or Len to control the length of the string Specifies a separator between the targets for example The
168. bject types Component text Default for visualization of component types in drawings Show in multi line Function Location box Solid 1 unit comespond to 1 Use properties from existing component The Workspace Properties window is available for all levels The settings inthe General tab regarding the Function Location Management are available for the standard level and are described in the Function and Location chapter The Enable Function Location database and Enable Product database options are available in advanced level and are described in the AA Advanced Function Location and Product Management chapter The other tabs are available for advanced level and are described in the Customizing the Workspace Page Information Windows chapter TT Introdu o P gina 391 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados TT 3 PROPERTIES FOR CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS The circuit diagram properties apply to the whole project They are defined when you create the workspace template The properties are loaded when you create a project by using the workspace template and they are saved then within the project You can select the Properties function as follows Select Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer then select Home Properties Module or Select Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer then right click with the mouse and select Pr
169. ble core Number Left contains the text Route 1 or Route 2 the cable core routing style is changed as follows v Route 1 Default each core grouping line automatically gets an offset this is safer because lines do not appear that easily ontop of each other v Route 2 If this setting is found the core grouping line gets an offset only if it intersects with another core grouping line The symbol for the right cable routing works in the same way but uses Cable core Number Right id 180131 Note If a cable is on the left and right side of the terminal row only one page the Cable reference symbols may not be correct Pagina 284 Il Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 2 5 SYMBOLS FOR A TERMINAL PLAN At the terminal plan generation the component symbols used in the circuit diagram are placed Drawing connecting lines in the terminal plan is better possible if the connections of the components are stuck out upward This way Not this way Suppress symbols lf you add the NoSymbol text to the left target no symbols are drawn only the component text is used as target IL Introdu o P gina 285 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados JJ CONNECTOR MATRIX AND PLAN Advanced JJ 1 GENERATING A CONNECTOR MATRIX The connector matrix facilitates the installation of connec
170. ble cores PLC VO Record 1 Export 3001 Export 3011 Export 3020 Export 3025 Export 3028 Export 3030 Export 3031 Export 3050 o R SS SESS 2S 32332308 1001 1010 503 500 2000 3000 901 3011 3020 3025 3076 3030 3031 3050 For example give 1 for the Project cover sheet 2 for the Document list 3 for the cabinets and 4 for the Circuit Diagrams The native sort orders for the grafical lists are values between 3000 and 3999 The database lists can be sorted using values between 4000 and 4999 The sort order given here is the one used in the Print command when all pages are printed one after the other P gina 266 GG Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The View Documents and Editor Documents database lists show the documents as ordered In the workspace tree The order of the documents part of the Graphical lists depends on the sorting order within the List Definition tab e g if the order is the default one 3001 or a customized order is used If the default order has not been changed for compatibility reasons the Documents list is always inserted in the top of the lists and you can still use the FirstContentLine command If you use a customized order the Documents list is sorted according to the workspace sort order If you want to keep the Documents list in first place in the Graphical lists and it has to be in fi
171. bol for the Terminal row picture type E therefore T lt Name gt E Via the terminal symbol in the Circuit diagram You can define a symbol by the Symbol name terminal plan text The symbol is searched in the TERMINALROWPICTURE symbol library of the Terminalplan symbol folder If it must be searched in another location please specify lt Symbol database gt lt Folder gt lt Symbol name gt This symbol is also used if another symbol is assigned by the type You can also determine in addition to the terminal symbol which Header Symbol and which End symbol must be used inthe Terminal plan multi level The definition must be formed as follows T lt Terminal symbol Name gt H lt Header Symbol Name gt E lt End Symbol Name gt If you wish to insert Header and End Symbols here you must always indicate the Symbol for the Terminal Row Picture plan too Pagina 292 KK Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados If you do not wish to place a Header Symbol you can type HO behind the name of the terminal symbol for the Terminal Row Picture plan therefore T lt Name gt HO If you wish to give in front of each terminal the Header Symbol indicated in the Symbol for the Terminal Row Picture plan type H1 therefore T lt Name gt H1 If you wish to give behind each terminal the End Symbol indicated in the Symbol for the Terminal Row Pi
172. bos Descri o Condutores do Cabo e Contatos o Operandos CLP Cart o CLP ES o Fios Conex es Fios i Descri o Lista amp Etiqueta Potenciais eo Componentes t Expandido Po Componentes t Reposi o eo Comprimidos BOM P gina Comprimidos BOM Editor de Componentes Editor de Conectores ep Editor de Cabos Editor de Fins e Editor de Documentos o Editor Operandos CLP o Editor de Fun o Localiza o o Editor sem Componente Gr fico ep Editor de Potenciais eo verificador Duplicidade ep Contatos Excedentes A lista a ser visualizada a de Componentes 1 Componentes D um duplo clique e a lista ser mostrada conforme segue J Introdu o P gina 63 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Tipo de Documento Pagina Fun o Pagina ndice Caminho Fun o Localiza o Componente Descri o 00 Tipo Diagrama El trico EM E Diagrama El trico EN 1 z Td Fan i10 J Diagrama El trico EM 1 102 AMP 3w E1010 4 Diagrama El trico EM 1 5 125 5 Diagrama El trico EM 1 5 TMS E Diagrama El trico EM 2 z fa E Diagrama El trico EM 2 2 ZKZ o Diagrama El trico EM 2 a 2H 19 Diagrama El trico EN z 3 253 10 Diagrama El trico EM 2 4 24 11 Diagrama El trico EM 2 4 2Hd 11 Diagrama El trico EM 2 E 2HE ventila o 13 Diagrama El trico EM 2 T 2H7 Fonte ligada Exercis
173. bout the list of variables in chapter Graphical lists in the User Manual where each list is described 22 Drag the variable into the label area above You can define the text area using two opposite points as for a rectangle You can move this window or change its size When defining the size of the window consider the max length of the text to be printed lf Layout is active Ed Layout Layout Preview Preview you will see the code number of the text field for example 160010 for the component name lf Layout Preview EJ Layout Layout Preview Preview Ed Layout S Layout Preview Preview or Preview is active you will see the text description of the field for example Component name QQ Introdu o Pagina 329 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 28 Double click the text to define atiributes and alignment of the text for example centred The following window appears Paragraph Properties E x Paragraphs Es A do fel EE ay o Double click here and replace this text with your own tex El Appearance a El Font Arial a Default True Arial 12 pt Mame Arial Ah E Character Set j western Size lz 12 pt Width 0 Standard Bold False Ho Italic Falze No Underline False Ho Strikeout False Ho Color RGE 0 0 0 E Behaviour Unerasable False No E Layout Alignment lett Blank Optimization True res Justified
174. by using the Terminal Plan Symbol ld 160450 or the type property ld 12021300 If the P keyword is available in this text then the header information H from the next terminal is used in the Terminal Row Picture plan Please note that if no header is specified this means that the default header is used If no symbol is defined the default plate symbol is used instead of the default terminal symbol This means that P O0Plate is the same as T OPlate P You can also define spare terminals with the Terminal Editor If you want to add this to the plans you have to use the Spare terminal text keyword Replace the Spare keyword in case you have used it to manage spare terminals up to now If not please refer to the text above about how to use the Spare keyword and the Spare terminal text keyword instead of this The difference between the Spare and Spare terminal text keywords is that exactly the terminals defined in the Terminal Editor are used as spare terminals Pagina 194 X Introdu o Rag o octrica i Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados X 4 DRAW MORE THAN ONE TERMINAL STRIP PER PAGE RES Te mitalstrip oo TS E rn oo d adaa O O MH ema PEM oan f E TEIA Bha O SO ee E X Introdu o P gina 195 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Generating the
175. cas estar o dispon veis Selecione a lista gr fica Componentes e clique com o bot o direito do mouse Gerar A lista gr fica ser gerada Clique no sinal esquerda de Componentes na rvore de projeto e abra a lista gr fica clicando em 0001 P gina 66 K Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 10 2 Gere as demais listas gr ficas usando o mesmo procedimento Abra as em seguida A lista de bornes e a fia o pode ser gerada no SEE Electrical standard e advanced A r gua de bornes esquema gr fico de bornes e multicondutores pode ser gerada apenas no SEE Electrical advanced As demais listas de componentes podem ser geradas apenas no SEE Electrical advanced Exerc cio 10 3 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar K Introdu o Pagina 67 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados K 2 DEFINIR TEXTOS DA P GINA PERMANENTEMENTE O bot o Padr es est dispon vel na caixa de di logo Propriedades da lista para todas as listas dispon veis Propriedades da Lista Pagina modelo Graphical List Products 43 Voc pode definir os textos que aparecer o em fun o dos atributos do formul rio em quest o N o modifique o texo Descri o da p gina Linha 01 dos formul rios de r gua de bornes esquema gr fico de bornes e lista de bornes pois s
176. cation you wish to delete 2 Right click and select the Delete Function or Delete Location pop up command 3 Click Yes to confirm the deletion Pagina 222 CC Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Note lf there are pages or componenis belonging to this Function Location a warning message appears and the deletion is cancelled To display components belonging to a Function Location 1 Select a Function or a Location 2 Right click and select the View Components pop up command The components belonging to the respective function location appear in the right pane of the window PE Function Location Product Management Function Description Ar a Unique product aspect on component te emb Function Location Product ts te 42 A2 42 A2 Function Location Description El Ag Locations Circuit diagrams EN Installations Cabinets Location AZ Product Description El Ag Products Product D Description separator If you double click a component SEE Electrical opens the page where it is located To display pages belonging to a Function Location Select a Function or a Location 2 Right click and select the View Pages pop up command mah The pages belonging to the respective function location appear in the right pane of the window CC Introdu o P gina 223 Es e ectrical
177. ceive an order list from the part list the list must be sorted by manufacturer manufacturer Then the articles must be grouped beneath the manufacturer It might be necessary to break the page if the manufacturer manufacturer changes 1 Define a SQL query SELECT FROM Export 3100 ORDER BY Export_3100 12000007 SELECT The SELECT Statement selects data from a table Statement syntax SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table of Access database gt ORDER BY This clause enables sorting of lists Syntax ORDER BY lt value gt The value must be defined under the following form lt table name gt lt field name gt P gina 354 QQ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 2 Define a Group header Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 1 Line Te kK d BB Manufacturer 2a Define group change identification Change Cord l co E 12000007 Select the group change identification is Options Select then Orions and specify to start on a new page if the group changes e group will be started on a new page possibly with others also requesting a page break QQ 4 3 b CABLE LENGTH ADDITION Add the length of cables of equal types 1 Define a SQL query SELECT FROM Cable001 ORDER BY Cable001 160040 SQL query SELECT The SELECT Statement selects data from a table Syntax SELECT lt f
178. cise 40 19 Define dimensions for the panel Adjust the settings for the dimensions ey 2 e E ES 1 CA Draw 2 CO Dimension 3 CO E Dimension settings Attributes Arrows Text Ext line overhang 2 Est line origin distance 1 Dimensioning measure scale 1 First extension line type Second extension line type Normal 4 7 Text Pagina 382 RR Introducao electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Click the Text tab Dimension settings Attributes TTOWS Text ai Yectotont number 1 Height 3 Line distance Width Distance Decimals Lett justitted W Centre justified Right justified Proportional Italic OE Cancel Help 5 gt Height 6 35 7 1 Arrows Click the Arrows tab Dimension settings Attributes Arrows Text Arrow width Arrow height Dimension line overhang First arrow type Filled arrow Second arrow type Filled arrow OK Cancel Help 8 gt Arrow width 9 4 10 10 gt Arrow height 11 10 12 gt Dimension line overhang 13 15 14 1 Attributes RR Introdu o P gina 383 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Switch to the Attributes window Dimension settings d Attributes Arrows Text Est line overhang Ext line origin distance Dimensioning measure scale First ext
179. co 1 CA Visualizar 2 CO Zoom Janela 3 Clique o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo da rea que voc deseja aumentar a visualiza o O ret ngulo definido por dois pontos diagonalmente opostos 4 Clique o segundo ponto do retanguilo Voc pode ativar o Zoom Janela teclando o atalho F4 Exerc cio 3 12 Retorne a visualiza o original do diagrama el trico 1 CA Visualizar 2 CO Zoom Original Voc poder ver o desenho completo novamente E poss vel ativar o comando Zoom Original teclando o atalho F3 Exerc cio 3 13 Movendo a visualiza o ampliada 1 CA Visualizar 2 CO Zoom Panoramico O cursor aparecera como uma mao 3 Clique com o bot o esquerdo do mouse e a arraste para o local desejado E poss vel ativar o comando Zoom Original teclando o atalho F3 Dica poss vel definir o zoom com o bot o de rolagem do mouse mantendo pressionada a tecla CTRL e movimentar a rolagem para cima aumentar ou para baixo diminuir Se seu mouse possuir o bot o de rolagem mantenha o pressionado e ser poss vel movimentar a parte ampliada do desenho C Introdu o P gina 27 Zaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados D DESENHANDO A SEGUNDA P GINA DE ESQUEMA ELETRICO D 1 CRIANDO A P GINA 2 Exerc cio 4 1 Criar a p gina 2 do projeto 1 CA Origem 2 CO Nova na barra Pagina Se esta fun o n o estiver ativa clique no m dulo Diagrama El tric
180. cording to position in list button so that SEE Electrical can insert a consecutive number for each scanned image The following dialog box appears Number pages Page type Circuit diagrams EM Start number 1 Function Location Cancel 5 Type inthe necessary information and click OK Each scanned image can receive different settings if you select it it is highlighted in blue and you modify the information in the right pane of the Bitmap loader window 6 Tickthe Insert standard sheet on imported drawing option to insert a default template set as property for each type of sheet during the image insertion Insert standard sheet on imported drawing 7 Tickthe Scale imported bitmap to fit inside below rectangle option and define the coordinates of the rectangle Scale imported bitmap to fit inside below rectangle Left Bottom 0 Right Top 8 Click the Import button to start the import Attention The contents of the current sheet will be deleted during the import The sheet will temporarily receive the imported files Pagina 408 VV Introducao Ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV 1 2 COVERING SCANNED SYMBOLS WITH AN WHITE AREA BKSYMBOL COMMAND The BkSymbol command allows you to define if a background Is to be inserted together with a symbol This is really helpful wnen scanned drawings need to be processed 1 Execute t
181. cross references between different components for example potentials Double click the cross reference symbol on the potential L1 on page 1 of your training workspace SEE Electrical automatically opens page 2 where the source reference of the potential L1 is marked with a red pin v Navigation via the database editors This method of navigation allows you to go from a component in the database editor to the page where it is inserted Open a database editor for example the Product Editor Select a component for example the motor 1M2 Right click and execute the Go to the Page pop up command SEE Electrical automatically opens the page where the component is located and it is marked with a red pin Navigation is implemented for some graphical lists such as Products list Terminal list PLC I O list Cable list Products Assembly Tick the product name and select GoTo pop up command Pagina 238 EE Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 2 WORKING WITH AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED CONNECTIONS When adding symbols you can view the relevant wires by means of the Electrical Wire Connections Auto Connection command lf enabled the command automatically adds vertical horizontal wires when new symbols are added The example below shows screen shots of the graphical representation before and after adding a symbol Binho os F 2
182. cs Both targets as graphics Y Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Y 1 CREATING A CABLE PLAN WITH GRAPHICS Exercise 23 1 Create the Cable plan with graphics for the training workspace 1 Select Cable plan within the Graphical lists area in the Workspace tree 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate The Cable plan with graphics is generated Exercise 23 2 Viewing the Cable plan 1 0001 Select page 1 of the Cable plan with graphics by double clicking on 0001 beneath Cable plan in the Workspace tree Y 2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR CABLE PLANS WITH GRAPHICS The template consists of the following parts Elements of the standard sheet gt Page Template Title block symbol Texts for first page number and page break optional PageBreak or Header for Cable Name Type etc Data about Cable core number Target left Target right Number of lines for Cable cores LN NNN A Exercise 23 3 Create a template for Cable plan with graphics 1 Draw the desired graphics and place the needed texts Select All Group the selected elements as a Page Template Title block symbol 2 Insert texts for the first page number and page break optional PageBreak or 3 Create the Header for the cable 3a Group the graphics and the text with the normal text attribute as a Graphical Symbol 3b Insert the texts for the cables These are tex
183. ct 123456 Headerline 1 blank Ty pe Headerline Number Article description supplier Headerline 39 VTL5032 3 frequency changer 11 37 kKW Danfoss Datalinef VTL5008 1 frequency changer 0 5 7 kW Danfoss Dataline RS K10 gt 1 Switch 25t 15 MOELLER Dataline i Page h P gina 334 Footerline QQ Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example of a list without groups List of parts Title Project 123456 Header line 1 blank Header line 2 Supplier Danfoss Group Header 1 Type Number Article description Group Header 2 VTL5032 3 frequency changer 11 37 kW Dataline VTL5008 1 frequency changer 0 75 7 5 kW Data line Supplier MOELLER Group Header 1 Type Number Article description Group Header 2 RS K10 1 Switch 25t 15 Data line Page 1 Title QQ 2 1 FILES FOR LIST TEMPLATES The list template contains 5 CDS LST LSP LSP and LST files You must back up these files If you would like to create a new list template by using an available one copy the 5 files using the Explorer a copy of is created Then you can rename the list template in the start window of the List and Label Designer QQ 2 2 LIST TITLE TEXT OBJECT List titles are created automatically if you have activated the Add title option in the Project Wizard The list titles can cons
184. ct the folder where the file is located 8 gt Select the file 9 gt Fit contents to Page The properties of the imported drawing have to be adjusted The option must be ticked 10 gt Delete Page before import The available drawing i e the empty standard sheet must be deleted The option must be ticked 11 gt Open The file has been imported and is displayed as a drawing You can edit it now as desired Exercise 16 2 Save data within DXF format 1 Switch to any page in the workspace that you want to save within a DXF DWG or DXB format 2 CA File 3 CO Save as 4 CO AutoCAD DWG DXF DXB Drawing 5 gt Save as type 6 gt DXF v2004 File format dxf Select the desired type of file f gt File name 8 gt lt name gt Type the name of the file 9 gt Save in 10 gt Select the folder where the file must be saved 11 gt Save The file has been saved Using the same approach you can save DWG DXF DXB files in all pages of your project by activating the File 0 Save as AutoCAD DWG DXF DXB Workspace command Q Introdu o Pagina 133 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Q 2 PIXEL IMAGES TRANSFER You can insert pixel images JPG BMP etc in SEE Electrical drawings Exercise 16 3 You can import a logo as a Bitmap object 1 CA General 2 CO Picture Insert panel The following formats are supported P
185. cture plan type E therefore T lt Name gt E If you want to assign behind the last symbol of a terminal strip the End Symbol defined in the Symbol for the Terminal Row Picture plan and if the symbol for the Terminal Row Picture plan is given inthe Type then fill in here in the Circuit diagram only an E for this symbol In this way you can assign the symbols for the Terminal row picture to the terminal types and then set the end plate flexible via E at the symbol or accomplish varying definitions Default Symbol lf a symbol name is found neither in the terminal symbol nor in the type the O Terminal symbol from the TERMINALROWPICTURE Symbol database is inserted Exercise 33 1 Generate the Terminal Row Picture Plan for the training workspace 1 Select Terminal Row Picture Plan inthe Graphical lists area of the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate The Select Terminal Row dialogue appears 4 gt Choose the terminal strip s for which you wish to generate a terminal row picture plan By default all terminal strips are selected 5 gt Click OK The Terminal Row Picture Plan is generated Exercise 33 2 View the Terminal Row Picture Plans A separate sheet is created for each terminal strip 1 0001 Select sheet 1 of the Terminal Row Picture Plan by double clicking on 0001 beneath Terminal Plan multi level in the Workspace tree 2 0002 Select sheet 2 of the Terminal Row Picture Pla
186. d that the overbooking is impossible If the type and pin information has been assigned to a connector the pin can be changed U Introducao Pagina 155 Rm electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Click the E button in the Pin ID Sorting field Ea m Properties r Preview Yale Product HP M la Descripion oo M EMULE Pin Name A Pinte Sorting 1 Connector pins Name locked Accordini Fin Mame i Caneel 4 W Show Component Informati M Show Connection Informati M Show Slave Information The Connector Pins dialogue box displays all available pins Pagina 156 U Introducao gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados U 3 CHANNEL DEFINITION FOR PLC I OS A PLC rack can be stored in the channel structure as follows You have a PLC rack with two external connections and four analogue I O ports Port 1 has the connection poinis a b c Port 2 has the connection points d e f Port 3 has the connection points g h Port 4 has the connection points j k l In this example you must add five channels to the channel definition Connection 4 2 PLC Main abe PLC Signal def PLC Signal ghi PLC Signal ik PLC Signal If you assign this type to a PLC Rack symbol the connection texts are taken fr
187. d 2 4 The source texts and the translated texts are stored inthe TRANSLATIONNEW MDB file in the ISYMBOLS installation folder The translation database can also be edited using MS Access or you can exportitto XML send the XML file to a translation office and reimport the XML file again You can also add your own texis to the translation database v If you wish to create a new line Select and existing line right click and choose the Add New line pop up command v If you wish to delete entries Select the entry you wish to delete right click and execute the Delete line pop up command Please note that it is only possible to delete single lines v If you wish to create a second line in the entry Press CTRL and ENTER and continue with the input on the second line in the entry Pagina 250 EE Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados v To display a translation with a different font proceed as follows after clicking the a button in the Font column for a language you can select the specific font for your translations If you are translating to languages that are not inside the range of the codepage you normally use here you can change the settings for the font In Western Europe the script is Western for Russian you have to use the Cyrillic script Scripts are only available for Windows fonts for example for Arial Font names Mechorhont nu
188. d in the Group Footer Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Group Footer EE Backgrour H Ex m E Font Test Formz 05 Ur El Layout Alignment 6 Define the group change identification QQ 4 3 c LENGTH CALCULATION FOR CABLE CHANNELS AND RAILS 1 Define a SQL query SELECT FROM Export_3010A Export_3011 WHERE Export 3010A Name Export 3011 160010 ORDER BY Export_3010A ObjectT ype Export_3010A Name Clauses SQL query SELECT WHERE ORDER BY QQ Introdu o The SELECT Statement selects data from a table Syntax SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table in Access database gt Multiple tables are separated with commas WHERE lt value1 gt lt value2 gt You can define which values from the two tables must be equal in order to calculate data In this example the values are component name in the NAME field of the Export_3010A table and component name in the 160010 field of the Export_3010A table The values must be defined under the following form lt table name gt field code To perform printing of the cable channels first and rails after them the sorting by object types is first necessary Use the ORDER BY clause Then sorting by type must be done before sorting by component name Syntax ORDER BY lt value gt The value must be defined under the following form lt table name gt field code Multiple sorting criteria must be separated with commas woe 5 L
189. d them Exercise 25 7 If some separate components must have another function location they can be assigned to the function location as follows 1 Double click the component whose function and location you wish to change 2 Fillin the correct values in the appropriate fields 3 gt OK Close the dialogue box Exercise 25 8 View the Products list and the Documents list 1 Open the Graphical Lists area in the Workspace Explorer 2 Select Documents 3 M Right click and execute the Generate pop up command 4 Double click the 0001 page to open it sa Repeat the same procedure for the Products list P gina 218 The components are displayed with their different functions locations AA Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Hint If you use function location it is possible to set the Show option for function location in three levels by editing the component Auto the function location is displayed only if it does not correspond to the values set for the page Hide they are never shown Show they are always shown Furthermore it is possible to set the Merge option to show the function location and product name in one line Properties Value Show Function 41 Auto F Location 01 Product K Connection oo 4 Connection 01 2 The Merge setting is helpful especially for potentials when their Function Location is
190. database The List and Label Designer appears Choose Project Page setup and then inthe Layout window select the Page setup tab to change the position and the size of the label Click the Printer Selection tab to change the printer too QQ 1 3 PRINTING LABELS Open the start window of the List and Label Designer and double click the template Please make sure that the print options are set correctly Select Start position to specify where to start printing line 2 label 3 left This setting allows continuing after a paper break Click Select and then click on the field to start Then print the labels QQ Introdu o Pagina 331 Manual de treinamento Zaa c ectrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 2 CREATING LIST TEMPLATES Exercise 39 2 Create a list template 1 CA File 2 CO List and Label List and Label Brady tht 53 424 3 bl Ea Dume lLP219 Cable Ist Ea Cume lLP219 Products st Ea CumnoILP219 Wirenumbers let 3 M File Select the File menu in the List and Label window 4 M New List 5 lt name gt Type the name of the new template 6 M Save The following window appears Select Datasource Select datasource Use custom SUL as datasource f gt 8 gt 9 gt 10 gt P gina 332 NEXTo gt i Cancel Select data source Select the database from those included in the SEE Electrical database lists which contains the fields you wi
191. der lines of the columns in this way and then click OK to close the Table Contents window P gina 338 QQ Introdu o sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 2 CHANGING A LIST FONT SIZE FIELDS ORDER ADDING OR DELETING FIELDS 1 If the list template is open double click one of the fields in the table The Table contents window appears again but the Data Line tab is open now Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Group Footer ElAppearance E Background False No ei Xo dh m Font Arial Test Formal True Normal Text El Layout Alignment 0 left Blank Optimization False Hoo Justified False No Line Wrap True wrap Separator True ves Spacing 0 039 0 020 0 039 0 0 Yer Alignment 0 top Width 1 530 1 530 in Line Definition 1 EE sj o Line Table width too large for table definition Layout Appearance Cond al cence Appearance L fe Click ta to change the layout of a table line Print margins the font preference of the text Besides you can change the Font and the Layout in the right window s area Click the or arrows to move line down or to move line up After a field selection click the x icon to delete the selected field After you have closed this window by clicking OK you must double click the column header line of the table and delete the corresponding record Click on
192. different from the page where they are located As you can see in the illustration below setting the Show option to Merge allows displaying the texts in one line In this way potentials can be placed as usual with a distance of 5 mm between each other A Show option is 01 set to Auto L1 Show option is set A1 01 L2 to Merge AA Introducao Pagina 219 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados BB REVISION MANAGEMENT Standard The revision management system allows you to update automatically any page on which data has been modified including cases when the change is a result of an automatic SEE Electrical functionality SEE Electrical automatically inserts the new date on the corresponding pages To activate this function tick the Change Revision Date Automatically option within the General tab of the Workspace Properties window This feature is particularly useful in the case of relay coils and their contacts typically represented on more than one page For example you move one contact in page 12 with the relay coilin page 7 and save the workspace afterwards SEE Electrical will automatically change the revision date on page 12 as well as on page P gina 220 BB Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados CC ADVANCED FUNCTION LOCATION AND PRODUCT MANAGEMENT Advanced
193. direitos reservados X 3 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A TERMINAL MATRIX Templates for terminal matrices are page templates with special properties X 3 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Exercise 22 3 Load the current template for the terminal matrix and modify it as desired 1 Graphical Lists Terminal Matrix Right click 3 CO Load Page Template The current template of the terminal matrix has been loaded 4 CA General O Select O All 5 CA Edit Actions O Explode Now you can edit the template General approach for creating a terminal matrix Create the graphics Define text placeholders by choosing the Draw Elements New Text command You need the following text placeholders available within Attribute Other node Workspace name Terminal Sheet Date Terminal Sheet Index Function Location Terminal strip Pagina 184 X Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Note Cable type Cable name Cobledesc right Colblelype right Coblenome right YS cbt tinees m D a E 2S E p tS a a Co E EI E E qu a Es Cable desc Left Coble type lefi Coblename lett 8 cbt lines Position of the left target of the terminal for example Target left behind Connection If you enter here P 1 a potential appears as
194. du o P gina 241 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3 While drawing SEE Electrical checks if the respective wire is possible If this is not the case the wire reoresentation appears dashed 4 While you are drawing using this functionality the connection points of the components are also visible C Me Ko ZE E c Pagina 242 EE Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 4 ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY FOR CABLES EE 4 1 DEFINE CABLE NAMES AUTOMATICALLY It is possible to define a component code for the cables If you have not defined a component code in the Component code for automatic cable numbering field Circuit Diagrams Properties window Cables tab the cable names have to be assigned manually If you have defined a component code the Component Numbering method Circuit Diagrams Properties window O General tab is applied for the cables EE 4 2 DISPLAY CABLE CORES A SECOND TIME Select the cable you want to display for a second time for example after a cross reference The Copy Ghost command allows you to make a copy of an existing cable core With the Paste command the copy can be placed elsewhere in the diagram The copy is only ghost object It cannot be edited If you modify the original cable core the changes are forwarded to the ghost cop
195. e lt Separatw gt z New Page 28 Compress symbol databases Add gt gt Lia Men Fage ada J ba Previous Page eg ompress Workspace a J Create New Workspace Remove Lo Next Page Ja Import AutoCAD Drawing J Page Properties IEF Import CADdy Classic Project Drawin ES Import CADdy Classic ET1 Databases Import CADdy Classic Symbol ta Import CADdy Classic Symbol lt Separator gt Refresh q Zoom Page to original size Zoom window a List and label generator E ee Ra RE Open Multiple AutoCAD drawings ira nie ii E M Show Quick A Keyboard shortcuts Customize ccess Toolbar below the Ribbon Cancel He 3 gt Choose the Draw category from the Choose commands from pull down list The available commands appear in the Commands area 4 gt Select the Draw Circle command 6 Click the _ Add gt gt button The command is moved to the right area of the window 7 gt Click OK The command is now available in the Quick Access Toolbar TT Introdu o P gina 395 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados TT 5 2 DEFINE HOTKEYS 2 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 Exercise 42 2 Assign a hotkey to the command Insert Biitmap The Customize window that allows you to customize the Quick Access Toolbar should be open Activate the Customize button The Customize Keyboard dialogu
196. e Elements panel 3 Select the first point of the rectangle 4 Select the second point of the rectangle Look at the dimensions in the status bar Exercise 40 15 Draw a rectangle 40 x 50 mm 1 CA Draw 2 CO Rectangle Elements panel 3 Select the first point of the rectangle 4 Select the second point of the rectangle Look at the dimensions in the status bar P gina 378 RR Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 16 Place one text for the component name 1 CA 2 CO 3 gt 4 5 gt 3 4 Draw New Text Elements panel Height Change the height for the text because the component and the text will be reduced when printing later Text with height 3 5 would be too small 35 Centre justified The text will be centred 2 Type in a question mark for the text Place the text within the component rectangle Exercise 40 17 Group the rectangle and the text into a symbol and save in the symbol database 1 CA 2 CO 3 A D 6 CO f gt 8 9 10 11 CO 12 13 4 14 4 15 General Normal Select panel Select the first point of the frame The rectangle and the text must be entirely inside the frame Select the second point of the frame Right click with the mouse Block Block Macro Group Select the symbol to be created The elements are integrated into a group Save th
197. e Start reference ID 180174 for example X This text defines the start point for inserting the component symbols It also controls the area used for placing the components ex 420 ey 50 or endx 420 endy 50 defines the absolute x and y value of the right bottom edge dx 410 dy 205 defines the area to the reference point of the Start reference text Note You get exactly the same component if the right bottom edge is on the wrong side of the start reference text no rectangle inside the drawing boundaries If no right edge for the placing is defined in the template the right bottom edge is calculated from the X and Y Extension of Page properties right side of drawing area max x coordinate of drawing 2 0 03 max x coordinate of drawing and bottom side of drawing area min y coordinate of drawing 0 101 Add a text with the attribute Placing distance ID 180172 for example dx 15 dy 10 This text defines the distance between two components in x and y direction MM Introducao Pagina 297 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Add a text with the attribute Placing order ID 180173 for example horizontal This text defines the order of placing of the components The key words can be horizontal or vertical lf itis horizontal the placing of components starts from left and continues to the right until the row is fu
198. e check boxes inthe All connections area Channel Definitions g Sl Connection ID A1 A2 ob 0 ob o Drawing types Q Circuit diagrams EN Circuit diagrams IEEE 4 Installations 99 Cabinets All connections Cancel 6 gt ID 7 Relay Coil Select the Relay Coil ID from the pull down list 8 gt Symbol Click on the button within this field Select the desired symbol from the Relay Coils folder of the EN61346 2UK symbol library The path to the selected symbol appears in the Symbol field 9 gt In the same way in the All connections area insert the connections 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 10 gt Click the Connection field of the second line 11 gt Check the Use check boxes in the All connections area for the connection texts 1 2 3 4 5 and 6 12 gt ID 13 Relay contacts MAIN NO 14 gt Symbol P gina 144 T Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 15 Click on the button within this field Select the 3 pole NO symbol from the Relay contacts folder MAIN folder of the EN61346 2UK symbol library 16 gt Reference Symbol Click on the button within this field 17 gt You can select the contact mirror symbol from the symbol databases again Open the TYPES database and then open the Mirrors folder by double clicking on it and select the Main Contact NO3 symbol
199. e como se ele tivesse acabado de ser criado Apague as conex es 3 e 4 as conex es consistem sempre do ponto e texto de conex o Ao selecionar o texto o s mbolo de conex o ser automaticamente selecionado Agrupe o s mbolo novamente como Componente Salve o s mbolo na pasta MySymbols Certifique se de clicar na conex o superior esquerda ao arrastar o s mbolo para a biblioteca M Introdu o P gina 75 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 2 2 ADICIONANDO ELEMENTOS Exerc cio 12 6 Adicionar um ponto de conex o ao s mbolo criado no in cio deste cap tulo 1 Selecione o s mbolo Caso ele n o esteja presente no desenho insira o a partir da biblioteca 2 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse 3 CO Desagrupar Execute o commando a partir do menu suspenso 4 Desenhe uma linha conforme mostrado anteriormente 5 Voc tanto pode remover todas as conex es dispon veis como copier um texto de conexao existente M 2 3 ADICIONANDO TEXTOS Exerc cio 12 7 comum que os textos inseridos automaticamente n o sejam suficientes No simbolo criado no in cio deste cap tulo voc pode querer inserir textos descritivos como Fonte de alimenta o e 12V Eles n o existem no s mbolo original Adicionar os textos ao s mbolo criado 1 Selecione o s mbolo Se o s mbolo n o estiver dispon vel no desenho insira o a partir da biblioteca 2
200. e from about the groups to be placed in Input data are illustrated in the Excel file PLC XLS sheet Symbols Rec eae et ees e a E a ir 1 2 approximation Electrical Drawing sheet As 0 9 11202 E000 0 2 GSHEGZO 5 Test 3 approximation Electrical Drawing sheet Aa 0 9 11202 E000 1 I G6SHEG2Z0 0 Test 4 blank Electrical Drawing sheet Aa 0 9 11202 E000 2 4 Test 5 blank Electrical Drawing sheet As 0 9 11202 E000 3 5 Test E diode Electrical Drawing Sheet AS 0 9 112D2 EQOU 4 E GS EG20 11 Test 7 diode Electrical Drawing Sheet As 0 9 112D2 EOO0 5 T GSHEGZO 12 Test B diode Electrical Drawing Sheet AS 0 9 112D2 EOOU 6 G5HEGA0 15 Test 9 diode Electrical Drawing Sheet AS 0 9 11202 EOOU 4 GStHEG20 14 Test 10 diode Electrical Drawing sheet As 0 9 11203 E0011 2 GStHEG20 15 Test 11 diode Electrical Drawing Sheet AS 0 9 112D3 EDU 3 GS EG20 16 Test 12 diode Electrical Drawing sheet AS 0 9 11203 E001 2 4 GSHEG2O 17 Test RS ProjectInfo Symbols Alias Jal a Symbol information tab entries Range Column Page template se sheet name Column module name E From To Column code L Symbol databazerfolder Database AutogenE M ses Folder E programsSEE Electrica Symbols Module positions Use module begin and end markers Use andy position Starts AU Column for position Start Y 250 Column for position ar 405 From Type in the first field of the Excel sheet that contains data about symbols
201. e 14 7 You must now define the section to use onthe page Open the Page Properties again 1 CA Home 2 CO Properties 3 gt Click the the button in the Page template sections field Page template sections The Define Sections window appears One section is always present by default O Introdu o P gina 113 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 gt Click the Add button to define another section 5 gt Insert a name for the section within the Name field 6 gt Click the EA button to define the area to use for the section on the page The area is defined by clicking to diagonal opposite points like you do when drawing a rectangle E gt After the area is defined the X and Y coordinate of its start point and its width and height are displayed in the Size field of the window 7 gt Click the Define Symbols button if you want to use symbols The Header Symbols window appears Header Symbols Start symbol Middle symbol End symbol Three symbols are necessary a start middle and end symbol 8 gt Click the button to browse for symbols 9 gt Enter 1 as a value in the Number of columns and Number of Rows fields Number of columns 1 4 Number of rows 1 gt 10 gt Click the Refresh button MA to apply the changes to both In Define Section area only one cell is visible now
202. e 43 2 Call the function from the Command Bar 1 Click with the cursor within the Command Bar 2 DRWINFO Press ENTER to confirm the command Drawing Information MHMMEMREAREEET DE BIE EA INFO A A 4 2 2 4 O 2 2 2 Number of elements 1337 Number of elements outside drawing bounds Number of lines with length 0 0 12 haere Md fo INFO HBEMMEMME EM Number of properties 67 Number of bitmaps 0 Number of circles 0 Number of connection points 93 Number of contactpomnts 21 Number of ellipses 23 Number of lines 665 Number of OLE objects Number of filled polygons Number of symbols 56 Number of undo information Information Convert invalid layer to layer 1 Delete lines of length 0 0 Delete elements outside drawing bounds Delete OLE objects Delete empty elements Automatically fix illegal elements Delete overlapping wires Delete wires in boundary rectangle of connection points Delete wires passing through connection point 3 gt Delete elements outside drawing bounds 4 gt OK Pagina 404 UU Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 43 3 Create groups of commands in the Commands explorer 1 gt Right click on a command 2 gt Select the New Group pop up command 3 gt Give a name to the group for example Training and click OK The group is cr
203. e 9 2 Filtrar ou classificar as informa es da lista 1 gt Clique na coluna Componente Clique com o bot o direito do mouse 2 M Selecione Classificar ordem descendente em linha a partir do menu suspenso Os componentes ser o classificados em ordem descendente e os da p gina 2 ser o mostrados antes dos da p gina 1 3 gt Clique na coluna Componente novamente Clique com o bot o direito do mouse 4 M Clique em Ligar filtro gt Componente a partir do menu suspenso 5 K Digite o valor do filtro Caso esteja buscando um componente em espec fico voc pode digitar seu nome completo Voc pode usar os caracteres coringa e para filtrar de acordo com um nico caractere ou mais Ao teclar ENTER apenas os registros que satisfazem a condi o de filtragem ser o mostrados 6 gt Clique na guia Componente novamente Clique com o botao direito do mouse 7 M Selecione o comando Remover filtro classifica o a partir do menu suspenso Todos os registros ser o mostrados novamente Exercise 9 3 poss vel salvar as listas em outros programas como o MS Excel ou MS Word 1 Abra o MS Excel ou MS Word Tipo de Documento Pagina Fun o 1 Diagrama El trico EM Diagrama El trico EN PI Bo Bo Diagrama El trico EM 2 gt Clique no canto superior esquerdo da lista de banco de dados conforme mostrado acima A lista de banco de dados sera selecionada 3 4 CTRL C O conteudo selec
204. e MO Types Mirrors Wo Relay contacts ME EMEA 346 2UK Relay contacts MC pole ME Types Mirrors MC l4 4 Record 4 gt Ji The channel definition for a contactor relay is formed in a similar way V Introdu o P gina 163 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados V 3 USING THE COMPONENT EXPLORER The Component Explorer allows you to handle components with type information To display the Component Explorer select the Home View Components command Components a ALLEN BRADLEY a ALLEN BRADLEY i 25 asTom S2 BERNSTEIN BS BomeannEe 85 caes By using this explorer you can v Easily attach types to your components as well as to multiple components in one step To do this add one or several components find the desired in the Component Explorer and right click to activate the Add to Selected Component pop up command usilar Contactors Lo y z 4 E Add Database Component Add to Favorites v Use the Favorites folder for types often used The handling of this Favorites folder is the same as the one in the Symbols Explorer v Use the Add Database Component pop up command If the channel information is properly defined the Add Database Component pop up command allows you to add the selected type into the drawing as already known via the Functions Component Add co
205. e break inside a text added to a simple an expression graphical list to make the text fit a column To use the wrapping the page templates of the simple graphical list be defined in the text that contains the ID Syntax for wrapping is wt lt number of characters gt If no maximum number of characters is defined then wrap is ignored All other column format definitions are valid The wrap text algorithm is applied to the text after all other formatting is made Examples 1 if there is a column with ID 120100 Page Description 1 the wrapping is defined like this 120100 wt 10 gt the wrap is made after 10 characters 2 if content of a column is made from several Ids a formula is used like fu 120100 1201 10 the wrap definition must be placed inside the information about the first ID to use like this ful 1 20100 wt 7 1201 10 The wrapping is applied on the entire formula text Output multiple In the simple graphical lists like Document List Product List etc it is values in one field possible to combine several values in one entry For example for in lists components with more than one type the product list can now be P Introducao Pagina 129 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados generated in a much nicer way The combination of several values is done using the FU command This command uses the following syntax HgFU 4 lt 1 ID
206. e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example The cable data is displayed in a group header area above the cable wires data The definition of the group header is made in 3 lines Cables List Header Cable Wl Type NYY ixlijqmm Length 20m Group header Nr Colour Size Target 1 Target Group header 1 sw la AILI IM1 U Data line 2 sw ALL IM1 V Data line 3 3 la xX113 IMIW Data line 5 La A1 PE IM1 PE Data line Cable W2 Type NYY5xl5gmm Length 10m Group header Colour Sime Target 1 Target 2 Group header sw La aLi 2MI U Data line sw A212 2M1 V Data line sw la A213 2MI W Data ine i A2 PE 2MI PE Data line Footer F Cable001 140020 Cable Function location Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 2 Line H K d Ba F_CableQ01 160010 F_Cable001 160030 F_Cable001 160040 F Cable 160200 Cable name type length QQ Introdu o P gina 351 2 a Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 3 Line M x d Ba I W IR il Colour Square Target Target Function I Page I ndes Insert a page break after each group Column titles Zaa electrical It is essential in some cases to continue on a new page after fulfilling
207. e elements as a group 1 CA General 2 CO Normal Select panel 3 Select the first point of the frame All of the elements have to be within the frame You can use one of the two possible ways of selection as described above 4 Select the second point of the frame 9 Right click 6 C0 Block Block Component definition Block Macro Group Cancel 7 gt Block Macro Group 8 gt OK The paris of the power supply are grouped Save the group 8 Activate the Symbols Explorer 9 MySymbols Double click the MySymbols database to open it You can store symbols only in this database or in a new one 10 CA General 11 CO Normal Select panel 12 Click to select the newly created group All the components belonging to the group are selected simultaneously 13 Drag the symbol group into the newly created Power supplies symbol folder Hold down Hame Description P gina 106 the left mouse button while dragging the symbol Component Properties o pd 0K Cancel N Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 14 gt Name 15 Power supply 2 Type inthe group s name 16 gt OK The group has been stored in the symbol database Exercise 13 3 Ungroup the Power supply 2 group again Delete page 3 again using the General Select All and Home Page De
208. e first point of the connection on the first top potential A wiring must always begin on an existing wire or on a component 4 Move the cursor downwards to the motor 5 Place the ending point of the wire on the connection point U1 of the motor Now continue to draw the missing wires between the second main contactor in the motor reverse protection The Orthogonal Wiring command is still active 6 Place the first point of the wire in the left vertical wire above the first main contactor P gina 240 EE Introdu o ea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados T Move the cursor to the right until you reach the connection 5 of the second contactor 8 Move the cursor downwards and place a corner point under connection 6 of the second contactor Then move the cursor horizontally until you reach the left vertical connection between the first contactor and the motor 9 Click to position the ending point According to the cursor position you will get the result shown on one of the two pictures below or 10 gt Right click to exit the orthogonal wiring mode Hints 1 By pressing the Tab key you can toggle between horizontal and vertical drawing provided that this is technically possible in the current situation 2 By using the Shift key you can switch on or off the orthogonal creation of wires if this is not appropriate in the current situation EE Intro
209. e group in a new folder of the MySymbols symbol database Click the Symbols tab MySymbols Double click MySymbols to open it Right click with the mouse New Folder Symbols for cabinets Enter the name of the new Symbol folder Select all parts of the symbol using a frame All elements must be within the frame Select the first point of the frame Select the second point of the frame Drag the symbol into a Symbols library for cabinet symbols Hold the left mouse button pressed while dragging RR Introdu o P gina 379 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Component Properties Name A Uk Cancel 16 gt Name 17 Power supply 2 Enter the name of the group 18 gt OK The group is stored inthe symbol database Exercise 40 18 Insert the component in multiple places in the panel For example Ka Ky EY FS FS 1 Insert the component from the symbol database into several places onthe page 2 Finish the placement 3 Double click the text and change it 4 gt OK Change the next text etc Pagina 380 RR Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados RR 2 USING LAYERS SEE Electrical provides 512 layers for structuring drawings You can use layers for example for hiding some data while printing You can change the settings for layers by clicking on the
210. e location aspect for the F7 component is A5 the one for F9 is A5 A4 1 so only the affected part is change CC Introducao Pagina 231 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados How to define absolute aspects for function location boxes First Case The Aspect database is not used Add the gt sign in front of the aspect you want to define an absolute value for CE Component Properties Properties Value Show Function F2 Aut Location Aut Product jau Second Case The Aspect database is used The aspects have to be defined in the Aspects Manager When choosing the properties for a component or function location box the Absolute path option is available and can be activated for the absolute aspects E E Function Location Product Management E Absolute path Absolute path E Unique product Fag Products HAA P1 Product Description separator P gina 232 CC Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados DD COMPLEX MODIFICATIONS OF THE DATABASE LISTS Advanced DD 1 1 PRODUCT EDITOR You can edit one or several records If a record is selected you can change everything within this record in the right pane of the editor If several records are selected in the list by pressing CTRL or SHIFT you can change only description type and function
211. e na guia S mbolos presente no lado esquerdo da tela do SEE Electrical Esta parte da tela cont m as guias Projeto S mbolos Componentes e Comandos Caso ela n o esteja vis vel poss vel ativ la a partir da barra de ferramentas Visualizar da categoria Origem Exerc cio 3 3 Selecionar o banco de dados que cont m os s mbolos a serem utilizados Neste caso Examples 1 7 Ative a guia Simbolos 2 D um duplo clique no banco de dados de simbolos Examples O SEE Electrical abrir o banco de dados de s mbolos V rias pastas de s mbolos ser o mostradas 3 D um duplo clique na pasta Examples para abri la Todos os simbolos serao mostrados 4 Clique no simbolo Power supply O simbolo aparecera ligado ao cursor 5 Arraste o s mbolo para a posi o tendo como exemplo a figura abaixo SCENE E N EEE EEE E EEE E e PE TEE A EE A E RE E PS A RP R AEEA E CE AA PE RS ERES A 1 C Introdu o P gina 21 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 6 Solte a entrada de alimenta o na coluna 0 7 gt Component 8 X1 Insira o nome da r gua de bornes N o modifique o n mero do borne 9 gt OK Os pr ximos bornes ter o a r gua definida automaticamente como X1 Uma caixa de di logo com o nome dos potenciais aparecer 10 gt Componente 11 O nome do potencial sera sugerido 12 gt OK Clique em OK para aceitar o nome sugerido Use o me
212. e new name W1 001 if a second cable W1 is imported it gets the name W1 002 Behaviour in the Pick List Let us assume that W1 and W2 are cables without graphics in the Pick List If you select W1 from the Pick List and change the name to W2 the cable W1 is taken from the Pick List when you select it and the cable W2 is taken from the Pick List because it is not found in the diagram You will never find cables without graphics in the List of Cable cores because the cores of these cables do not have targets Pagina 308 OO Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 00 8 INSERTING SYMBOLS FOR COMPONENTS WITHOUT GRAPHICS IN THE DIAGRAM PICK LIS If you have defined Components without graphic see Database lists Editor Components without graphic you can position the elements via the pick list lf a symbol for the circuit diagram has been assigned to the type in the channel definition the given symbol is inserted If no symbol has been assigned SEE Electrical automatically creates a symbol with one connection point When you position a component without graphics into the diagram it receives the name you have defined in the Editor If you have not defined a name in the Editor it gets an automatic name at the insertion AS soon as you position it inthe diagram it disappears from the Component without graphic List lf a cable is inserted via the P
213. e nome do componente conex es e refer ncia cruzada Se o contato possuir um campo de descri o seu conte do vir da bobina No caso de contatos revers veis posicione os textos na seguinte ordem comum normalmente aberto e normalmente fechado O SEE Electrical tamb m diferencia os contatos de for a normalmente aberto e normalmente fechado e auxiliares normalmente fechado normalmente aberto e revers vel M 5 2 BORNES Os bornes necessitam de ao menos os seguintes textos nome do componente n mero do borne indice do borne e ao menos um texto de conex o Para o numero do borne voc pode digitar qualquer numero x ou X se o n mero tiver de ser incrementado Desta forma voc pode ter n meros de borne como L1 Nou PE Se os textos forem posicionados automaticamente na cria o do s mbolo o SEE Electrical posicionara as conex es automaticamente conforme descrito no par grafo acima Se voc quiser que o nome da r gua e o numero do borne apare am em um texto X2 17 por exemplo voc deve usar o atributo de texto Nome do borne n mero combinado que pode ser encontrado na divis o Outros Neste caso posicione o texto com o referido atributo na parte gr fica Ap s isso agrupe o s mbolo M Introdu o P gina 85 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 5 3 BORNES MULTI CAMADAS STANDARD Borrnes multi camadas representam v rios bornes em u
214. e o Nenhum caractere ou espa o deve ser inserido como nome do componente ao criar o s mbolo para evitar a modifica o autom tica do nome do componente Ao criar o s mbolo n o preencha o nome do componente apenas clique em OK P gina 88 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 5 7 COMPONENTES COM CONTATOS AUXILIARES H duas maneiras de criar componentes com contatos auxiliares M 5 7 a S MBOLOS COM TEXTO DE REFER NCIA CRUZADA Um componente com contatos auxiliaries consiste da parte gr fica e textos de nome do componente descri o 00 tipo etc Tamb m ser o necessaries os textos de Refer ncia cruzada poss vel encontr los entre os atributos de texto da divis o Componente Os elementos dever o ser agrupados como Componente com contatos auxiliares usando o comando Editar Acoess Agrupar Refer ncia folhafcoluna Se voc inserir no projeto contatos com o mesmo nome do componente principla os textos de refer ncua cruzada ser o preenchidos Segue exemplo F F4 FA FA 18 44 da 1 84 E O espa amento de linhas varia conforme o posicionamento dos textos na cria o do s mbolo M Introdu o P gina 89 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 5 7 b S MBOLOS COM CONTATO INTEGRADO Um componente com contato
215. e records can be edited at the same time DD 1 6 WIRE EDITOR Multiple records can be edited at the same time It is possible to switch the visibility for the wire texts in the Wire Editor Depends on the settings in the wire properties Circuit Diagram Properties Wires tab if the change will be executed per wire and not per net If you select more than one entry the visibility checkbox for the texts is dimmed because in this case the different wires can have different options for the visibility DD Introdu o P gina 235 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Potential i Show wire number Show potential Show vwire size Show wire colodr To switch the visibility in this case just click once to turn the visibility on for all the selected wires If you want to turn it off click a second time To confirm the change click elsewhere in the editor DD 1 7 FUNCTION LOCATION EDITOR Multiple records can be edited at the same time The position of the page in the Workspace Explorer can be adjusted DD 1 8 DOCUMENT EDITOR You can select within this editor multiple documents from a project and delete them ina single Operation by using the Delete Selected pop up command In the Editor Document you have the possibility to change the page template for the selected pages Kind of Docume
216. e window appears In the Categories pane select the menu that contains the function you want to assign a keyboard shortcut to Select in the Commands pane the command to which you would like to assign a shortcut or whose shortcut you wish to change If a command already has a shortcut it is displayed inthe Current keys field In the Specifiy key sequence for field select the area for which you define the key combination e g for the cover sheet area or the wiring diagram etc New Shortcut key lt Shortcut key gt Press the desired key or shortcut on the keyboard Letters can be combined with the keys SHIFT CTRL or ALT Assign Assign button remains greyed In such case you must select another key combination Close TT 5 3 USER DEFINED CATEGORIES The customization is made with the Customizer exe which is delivered with your SEE Electrical installation The file is found in the SEE Electrical folder The customization can be executed in Basic level but the commands in SEE Electrical will be available in case you have the right licence level Exercise 42 2 Create a user defined category and panel SEE Electrical must be closed before executing the procedure P gina 396 TT Introdu o Ela e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 Open the Customizer exe 2 gt Next 3 gt Select the Circuit Diagrams EN or IEEE category from the p
217. ears when you right click the Circuit Diagrams module in the Workspace Explorer When you click the Cables Setup button the following window appears Cables Setup Name StartSymbol Middle Symbol EndSymbol Angle CablesiSymbols Di Db Cables Symbols Di Db Cable 1 ymbolsi Db 0 Diagonal Co Cables Symbols Di Db Cables Symbols Di DE Cables Symbols4 Ob 0 Diagonal Colr Cable 12ymbolz Di Db Cables Symboals Di Cables Symbols T Shielded Cable dashe Cables1Symbolsis DB CablestSymbols Sh Db CablestSymbolsi De 0 Shielded Cable Cables iSymbolsts Db Cables Symbals iSh Ob Cables Symbols 0 Shielded cable GND CablesiSymbolsis Bb Cables S ymbols Sh Db CablesiSymbolsi DE 0 Shielded cable conne Lablesisymbolets Cables Symbols Sh Db Cablesisymbols T Shielded cable conne Cables Symbalsis Cables Symbols Sh ob Cablestsymbols Shielded cable distan Cables Symbols S Db Cablest ymbolsish D6 CablestSymbolsi DB 0 Shielded cable distan CablesiSymbols S Db CablesiSymbols15h D6 Cables Symbols Bb 0 HJ 4 Record 1 In the Name field you have to specify a cable name by your choice M Introdu o P gina 97 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados After you click the button within the Start Symbol field the Symbol browser opens allowing you to select the additional symbol used at the first cable core Its descript
218. eated 5 gt Copy the desired commands by right clicking and selecting the Copy Command or Cut Command pop up commands 6 gt Paste the commands in the group with the help of the pop up menu UU Introdu o P gina 405 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV INTELLIGENT DRAWING LEGACY MODULE The Intelligent Drawing Legacy module offers you two tools that help to optimize the workflow of data imported into SEE Electrical Tools for scanned drawings These tools allow you to v import a lot of scanned drawings in one step v place a white background directly when a symbol is inserted These tools are available for all levels of the software Tools for making DXF DWG imported drawings more intelligent recognize patterns These tools allow you to v define patterns v recognize patterns These tools are available for the Standard and Advanced levels Tools for scanned and DXF DWG imported drawings These tools are available for the Advanced level Pagina 406 VV Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV 1 TOOLS FOR SCANNED DRAWINGS VV 1 1 IMPORTING MULTIPLE SCANNED DRAWINGS IN ONE STEP Advanced The Scan module allows you to import several images of TIF and JPG format simultaneously The SCANIN command is available in the Command pane It allows you to import different types
219. ed to deactivate this option manually afterwards CC Introducao Pagina 221 gaa ce ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Function Location v Use Function Location management v Group pages according to function 4 Enable Function Location database v Enable Product database To add a Function Location 1 Right click to display the pop up menu for Functions or Locations 4 Functions ag Locations Add Function Insert Add Location Insert Paste Function Load From Project Load From Project Mark Unused Mark Unused Expand Expand Collapse Collapse 2 Select the Add Function or the Add Location pop up commands to create new functions locations You can create functions locations hierarchically by selecting an existing function location and executing the Add Function or Add Location pop up commands 3 Type ina name and a description optionally directly in the field that has been created ta I i ee a Tee o oo Na Function Location Product Management Function Description E Ag Functions El oy FH Feed current to Net q new funtion description or new func GF Generate Power To modify a Function Location 1 Select the function or location you wish to modify 2 Type in the new values in the appropriate field To delete a Function Location 1 Select the function or lo
220. ed components Distance between components All of the components in the circuit diagram are displayed in this list 3 gt Double click a component to select it You can select several components using the standard Windows procedure for multiple selection Click Load to insert the selected components into the cabinet drawing In the Position selected components field you can choose between free horizontally or vertically aligned for the selected components to be inserted on the page You can specify the distance between components Afterwards you can place the first component 4 Place the first component Place the other components If you place a lot of devices horizontal or vertical especially terminals you might like to hide the texts of the symbols Pressing the h key while inserting them hides the component name Pressing H hides all component names and connection texts The option is useful especially for terminals that are made by rectangles only Exercise 40 5 The relation between devices in Circuit diagrams and Cabinets is possible if you assign a type In the type database you can set the Width and Height properties of the rectangle for the cabinet layout Pagina 372 RR Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados lf width and height are not specified for a type a rectangle identified
221. eitos reservados Exercise 25 3 Create page 1 of the workspace and enter a function location in the Page information dialogue box The values appear also in the standard sheet of page 1 1 Click Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO New Type the function and location data in the Page information dialogue box 4 gt Function 5 A1 6 gt Location 7 4 01 8 gt OK Create pages 2 and 3 inthe same way Enter function location for page 2 too Give a different identification for page 3 You can see in the workspace tree that the workspace has been restructured according to the function and location Exercise 25 4 Copy paris of the diagram of the already constructed training workspace into the new workspace 1 Select the part of the circuit diagram you wish to copy 2 Press CTRL C 3 Switch to the page in the new workspace where you wish to paste the copy 4 Press CTRL V Paste the copy When you work with function and location all the component names obtain a dash Exercise 25 5 If several components must have a function location different from the page to which they belong they could be assigned to another function location using the Function Location Box 1 CA Electrical 2 CO Function Location Box Function Location panel 3 Fix the first point of the rectangle of the box 4 Fix the second point of the rectangle of the box 5 B1 Fillin the new value in the Func
222. elds but place them inthe header line Choose to Add column titles or not before you select the fields E Click then the desired fields and click on the 1 icon to move them into the Selected fields area You can remove fields from the selection by clicking on the left arrow icon i You can select multiple fields and move them to the selection by clicking on the right arrow icon gt The icon gt moves all the fields to the selection and the icon removes all the fields from the selection Using the wes arrows you can arrange the selected fields as desired QQ Introdu o Pagina 333 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 20 M 21 M 22 M 23 M List templa You can find the variable list in the chapter Graphical lists of the User Manual where each list is described If the fields have been selected in the desired order click Done to close the dialogue box The list template is created In the next steps you will find hints about changing the created list Did you place all the fields File Save File Exit Finish creating the template The template can be used for generating lists tes Include v List title text object v Header lines in tables Group Header in tables v Data lines in tables v Group Footer lines in tables v Footer lines in tables v List Footer lines in tables Listofparis gt Title q Proje
223. elete the surplus components but to check them you can reset their background colour To do this tick the Reset background colour on all cabinet components option inthe Components Comparison dialogue Click again the Work on Open drawings or the Work on All drawings buttons as desired Exercise 40 22 Inthe circuit diagram change the type for a component which has already been inserted in the cabinet drawing Open the page in the Cabinets module where the component is inserted 1 CA Cabinet 2 CO Components Comparison Functions panel 3 gt Set background colour of components which type has changed 4 gt Work on Open drawings Click the Work on Open drawings or the Work on All drawings button to define the pages which will be processed The differences are displayed and the corresponding components appear selected 5 lt Del gt If you wish to delete all the marked components press the Del key onthe keyboard Do not click on the drawing before that because this will cancel the selection on all the surplus components The Undo Redo command is available only in case you work on the open drawings Please consider this before executing the Functions Components Comparison command on your workspace lf you do now wish to delete the marked components but to check them you can reset their background colour To do this tick the Reset background colour on all cabinet components option inthe Components Compariso
224. emplate gt File O0 Save as Page Template Cabinets Properties gt Cabinets in the Workspace Explorer pop up menu Select page template etc Page Template gt lt Name gt I DW See above Graphical Lists List of documents Properties gt List of Documents in the Workspace Explorer pop up menu Select page template etc Page Template gt lt Name gt I DW See above Graphical Lists List of products Properties gt List of Products in the Workspace Explorer pop up menu etc Pagina 122 O Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados P TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS P 1 CREATING TEMPLATES FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS Exercise 15 12 Create templates for graphical lists ee a SCA 6 CO 8 M 11 11CA 12 CO 14 15 M 16 gt 17 gt Open the Graphical Lists area Select the graphical list you wish to create a template for Right click with the mouse Select the Load Page Template command from the pop up menu The newly created template can be loaded and changed After you delete this template it is possible to create a new one The template opens in its own window i e it does not exist as a page in the Workspace Explorer It was described in the Creating a Standard Sheet chapter how to delete an available standard sheet using the Edit O Select O All and Edit Actions O Delete command
225. ension line type Normal Second extension line type Normal OE Cancel Help 15 gt Extension line overhang 16 10 17 gt OK The settings have been set 18 CA Draw 19 CO Dimension 20 CO Btw 2 Lines 21 Identify the left border line of the panel 22 Place the dimension line by clicking with the mouse 23 Identify the right border line of the panel 24 Right click to exit the drawing mode 21 Identify the top border line of the panel 22 Place the dimension line by clicking with the mouse 23 Identify the right border line of the panel Exercise 40 20 Save the workspace 1 CA File 2 CO Save Pagina 384 RR Introducao asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados RR 4 COMPARISON BETWEEN CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND CABINETS Cabinets module If you have deleted components in the circuit diagram they must also be deleted from the cabinet drawing If types have been changed in the circuit diagram they must respectively be changed in the symbols from the cabinet drawings If an existing cabinet drawing is added from one project to another project the equipments which exist in the circuit diagram must be assigned to the equipments in the cabinet Exercise 40 21 Delete a piece of equipment from the circuit diagram which you have already inserted in the cabinet drawing Open the page in the Cabinets module where the del
226. ent Numbering is set to Free References are automatically updated The functionality is already available in the Standard level EE 6 2 COPY SINGLE PAGE IN THE SAME WORKSPACE OR IN DIFFERENT WORKSPACE In the Workspace Explorer you can copy and or move pages from one workspace to another using Drag amp Drop You can also do this within one and the same workspace Hint To create a copy of the page and keep the existing one press the CTRL key while moving the page The copying of pages between workspaces is only possible provided that the following rules are kept v Both workspaces must be open v The module from which the page is copied and the module to which it is copied must be of the same type v For pages in the Circuit diagrams module if Function and Location management is enabled in the source workspace v Function and Location management must also be enabled in the destination workspace or v If Function and Location are not enabled in the destination workspace the page that is copied must have empty values for Function and Location v If the source Function is different than the destination Function the copied page takes the value of the destination Function P gina 246 EE Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The copied pages are exact copies of the original page This means v If you copy a page within the same workspace you have
227. ente modifique o Nome do componente na janela Propriedades do componente Tomadas possuem a parte macho e f mea O plugue conectado a um fio de um lado e parte f mea do outro A parte f mea pode ser parte de um componente ou de outra tomada A parte f mea conectada a um fio de um lado e a parte macho do outro Lado do fio XP1 XH 4 Lado macholf mea a No SEE Electrical o lado do fio deve ser representado pela primeira conex o e o lado do plugue pela segunda Nenhum fio deve ser conectado ao segundo ponto Caso voc desenhe uma conex o no lado do plugue ele ser usado apenas para endere amento componente tomada e inserir a informa o na lista de tomadas mas isso n o sera mostrado na lista de fia o e tampouco sera inserida numera o nele N o poss vel desenhar um cabo nesta situa o Control unit AS Computer D ER E xc e xP 1 xPa 2 Eu E SENSar Monitor Sensor P M4 orale xPy EE xa OV VGA Adopter Tenha o devido cuidado com os lados das conex es antes de salvar o s mbolo na biblioteca Diagrama El trico Visualizar Pontos de conex o Se houver a necessidade de trocar as conex es use o comando Diagrama El trico Conex es Substituir M 5 5 S MBOLOS DE REFER NCIA CRUZADA A forma pela qual os potenciais s o administrados no projeto definir como usar s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada
228. ento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 14 8 gt 9 gt 10 P gina 112 Enter the fixed texts and place them into the desired positions Project Sheet Page created by Page created date To insert a text Type the text in the input field for example Project Go out of the Text dialogue box with the cursor and place the text into the drawing Go into the input field of the Text dialogue box again and type in the next text etc Then insert the texts for the column These texts have the Normal text attribute Next insert the variable texts After you have inserted all of the fixed texts place the changeable texts 2 Type a question mark for the text placeholder Attribute Select the kind of the text placeholder The data from the Workspace Information window which is available under the Project attributes node belongs to the whole project and applies to all the pages The data from the Page Information window which is available under the Page attributes and it is specific for the current page lt Choose an attribute gt Insert the text Choose the attribute for the changeable text drag it into the drawing and drop it on the desired location Project Sheet Page created by Page created date mJ AP RD aj O Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados To choose an att
229. eparts list Simple from Standaro 3104 Terminal matrix from Standard 3105 Cable plan from Standard P Introdu o P gina 131 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3108 Connector matrix 3106 Cable terminal row plan only Advanced 3110 Parts simple F amp L sorted 3112 Parts F amp L sorted only Advanced 3220 Products assembly only Advanced 3225 Aspect Functions only Advanced 3226 Aspect Locations only Advanced 3235 Cables list F amp L Sorted only Advanced 3236 Cable core list F amp L Sorted only Advanced 3270 Terminal plan only Advanced 3271 Terminal row picture only Advanced 3273 Connector plan 3280 Multicores list only Advanced 3285 Multicores wires list only Advanced PageBegin List ID Example PageBegin 3000 The brackets must be used Page numbering of the current list continues the page numbering from the last page number generated in the list with ID 3000 PageBegin List ID The brackets must be used Example 3000 Pages have the numbers in the function groups in list 3000 consecutive page numbering independent from the type of the list in which the data is inserted PageBegin lt page number gt for ex 20 Example 20 The page numbering starts at page 20 PageBegin lt page number gt for ex 20 Example 20 Page numbering starts at page 20 for eac
230. eridos automaticamente no formul rio de diagramas el tricos caso os campos existam nele P gina 18 B Introdu o asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados C DESENHANDO A PRIMEIRA P GINA DE ESQUEMA ELETRICO C 1 CRIANDO A P GINA 1 Exerc cio 3 1 Cria o da primeira p gina do projeto 1 gt Criar pagina Na parte inferior da aba Propriedades selecione Diagrama Eletrico e clique no botao Nova P A caixa de di logo Informa o da p gina aparecer permitindo a inser o de novos dados Informa o da pagina P gina indice Data Cria o da P gina 21 8 2013 Data Revis o da P gina Revis o da P gina Pagina Criada p r Descri o da P gina Linha 0 Descri o da P gina Linha Descri o da P gina Linha Descri o da P gina Linha O Descri o da P gina Linha eps qe tag Lia ite es ne p EE wt 2 gt Informa o da pagina Pagina 1 inserido automaticamente Por padr o o SEE Electrical oferecer o primeiro numero dispon vel no respectivo m dulo neste caso 1 Voc poder modificar essa informa o se necess rio 3 gt Data de cria o da p gina O SEE Electrical insere automaticamente a data Voc poder modifica la clicando no bot o lt presente neste campo H outras informa es que podem ser preenchidas caso necess rio 4 gt Descri o da pagina l
231. erwards The types remain on single lines there Add ons must be added to relay coils always using this approach Pagina 150 T Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 18 13 Define and use a type for a fuse 1 Insert a fuse into your drawing Double click the fuse 2 Go into the type database and create a type Fuse The needed elemenis for the fuse are available Otherwise define them before you create the fuse type 3 In the Property column you can find the Assign sub types property Properties Type Description Manufacturer Goods Group Type 1 Relay col AO Training Auxiliary Contactors p Fuse Training Fuses E Training Em o MW 4 Record 2 AIH 4 Property Value Description Price E Order number Manufacturer Symbol name for terminal ro p Assign sub types Define Channels 4 4 Record q Elk 4 b 4 Select Assign sub types 5 You can choose all the types needed as elements for your fuse lf several sockets or melt inserts are needed choose the appropriate type several times 6 Close the Type Database Browser dialogue by clicking OK Define then the next fuse type in the same way i Assign the type to the fuse Look at the Products list For the component Fuse only one type is recorded in the list of products as we
232. es pop up command Ag CAPrograms iGE XAO SEE Electrical q Project cover sheet Jy New Alt N Find and Replace Auto diagram E 27 Prope ties qq Single line diagram Within the Component numbering area select the desired component numbering For some symbols such as contacts it is possible to select the name of an available coil relay or component with auxiliary contacts in the Product field For terminals you can select the name of an available terminal strip For PLC inputs outpuis you can choose the component name from the list of available PLC components Pagina 100 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 8 INFORMATION ABOUT SYMBOL DATABASES M 8 1 CREATING A NEW DATABASE If you want to create a new empty symbol database right click in the empty space of the Symbols area and execute the New Symbol Database function in the pop up menu M 8 2 DIRECTORIES AND NAMES SEE Electrical stores the symbol databases in the directory defined in the System settings dialogue accessible via the File System settings button which can be executed only if no project is open A database file has the SES extension You can create symbols and save them in your own symbol databases It is not allowed to perform changes in the supplied symbol databases marked with a icon M 8 3 WORKING WITH SYMBOL FOLDERS When the
233. eservados X TERMINAL MATRIX standard X 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL MATRIX The terminal matrix facilitates the installation of terminal strips 2s a s co o qu FE E oa SEE AR EaREREAERRRENRRAZRBERRRREERERERERE a SE ene eRe eRe eR REE RRR PRE Ee RAR Ree J ee pt et pe tpt ep ett tint np tt pe ft O RS EM el TC ae TT Logo X Introdu o P gina 181 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 22 1 Generate a terminal matrix for a terminal strip from the training project 1 Select Terminal matrix from within the Graphical Lists in the Workspace tree Expand the Graphical Lists Graphical lists ao Document list Product list ip Terminal list eo Connector list eo Connector Pin list Cable list Cable Core list PLC VO list o Wires list SM Wiring list o Wire Parts list eo Parts list simple vp Spareparts list simple OM Parts list vo Spareparts list 06 ep Connector Matrix 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate In the Select Terminal Row dialogue choose the terminal strip s for which you wish to generate a matrix for example X2 and X3 4 gt X2 X3 5 gt OK The Terminal matrices for the selected terminal strips have been created Exercise 22 2 Look at the terminal matrix Each terminal strip appears on its own page 1 0001 Double click the page 1 beneath Terminal Matrix in the Work
234. et in the terminal matrix if a reserve terminal is entered There is a feature for defining the index of the first and the last terminal in the page template If the first available terminal in the Circuit diagram does not possess the index of the first terminal in the page template reserve terminals are filled up to the first available index After the last terminal reserve terminals are filled up to the specified index To use this function a text placeholder with the normal text property must be defined as follows Spare Firstindex lt n gt LastIndex lt m gt N lt Reserve terminal gt lt Format Number gt The text is inserted at the place where the terminal number for terminals in the Circuit diagram is located No entry is made inthe targets of the terminal left or right For more details see chapter The Graphical Lists in the Help topics 5 2 m 2S 5 p a pz E tS 2 TEER E JZ po T Aban E qu E a m mn EM Cable dest Left Cobie type lett Cowenaome lett J T Po o O aies S OoOo OO O SSJ Cablename left if you type a dash cable name cable type and cable description are not displayed Cable type left Type1 on the left if you type a dash the cable type is not displayed X Introdu o X Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Cable dimension lef
235. eted equipment has been inserted 1 CA Cabinet 2 CO Components Comparison Functions panel Compare Components at Cabinet drawings with Components at Circuit diagrams X Actor Set background colour of surplus components Set background colour of components which type has changed Rename surplus components Acton on all cabinet components Reset default background colour on all cabinet components C s se default backgroud colour Transparent background Report Report E programe lt SEE Electrical VS4Projacts My Workspace CabinetCompare TXT Work on ALL drawings Cancel RR Introdu o P gina 385 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3 gt Set background colour of surplus components 4 gt Work on Open drawings Click the Work on Open drawings or the Work on All drawings button to define the pages which will be processed The differences are displayed and the corresponding components appear selected 5 lt Del gt If you wish to delete all the marked components press the Del key onthe keyboard Do not click on the drawing before that because this will cancel the selection on all the surplus components The Undo Redo command is available only in case you work on the open drawings Please consider this before executing the Cabinet Functions 1 Components Comparison command on your workspace lf you do now wish to d
236. etry which represents the cross reference for example IL Introdu o Pagina 283 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados With the text with the attribute cable reference LAST or cable reference NEXT you can control the position on which the cross reference symbol appears Use the following keywords to do so v Mode 0 and other values the Cable reference symbol is not drawn v Mode 1 the reference symbol is moved to the end of the grouping line of the target routing If the collecting line of the target routing gets an offset then both cable reference symbols get the same offset v Mode 2 the reference symbol symbol is moved to the end of grouping line of the terminal routing If the collection line of the terminal routing gets an offset then both cable reference symbols set the same offset v Mode 3 the Cable reference symbol is not moved relative to the cable name In the template the following flags control the behaviour If the cable name left id 180127 and cable name right id 180130 in the template each contain the substring 1 Cable then the cable name is shown only once at each terminal row each graphical cable has only one core grouping Cable core routing The macro group for the left cable routing contains 2 core groupings which each contain a Cable core Number Left id 180128 together with 3 lines building the cross lf the Ca
237. ex o entre o primeiro jogo de contatos NA e os bornes 6 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de desenho Dicas C Introdu o P gina 25 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 Ao mover o cursor uma visualiza o din mica da conex o e pontos de conex o aparecer permitindo a voc verificar se os fios que esta tentando desenhar est o sobrepondo outros j existents ou mesmo se h algum problema com relac o a s mbolos j inseridos Neste caso o desenho verificado automaticamente pelo SEE Electrical quanto as conex es poss veis Exerc cio 3 8 Desenhar o fio faltante ente o potencial PE e o borne X2 7 Modificar o estilo da linha e cor do fio da conex o entre o potencial PE e o motor M2 1 Use a fun o Diagrama El trico Conex o dos fios 1 Fio conforme descrito para criar a conex o faltante entre o potencial PE e o borne X2 7 2 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse sobre o fio entre o potencial PE e o borne X2 7 e selecione Propriedades a partir do menu suspenso As propriedades do fio aparecer o na aba Properties no lado direito da janela do SEE Electrical 3 gt Estilo da caneta 4 gt Selecione o estilo Tracejado 5 gt Cor da caneta 6 gt Selecione a cor verde A cor e estilo do fio ser o modificados dinamicamente Repita a mesma opera o para o fio entre o bo
238. fer ncia cruzada sera gerada automaticamente poss vel inserir s mbolos de referencia cruzada ao final de conex es feitas com o comando Diagrama El trico 0 Conex o dos fios 1 fio Para inserir um simbolo de refer ncia cruzada ao desenhar o fio d um duplo clique ao final dele O s mbolo de refer ncia cruzada aparecer automaticamente Exerc cio 6 7 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar F Introdu o P gina 51 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados F 2 USANDO S MBOLOS DE TEXTO DE INFORMA O Em determinada situa es o uso de s mbolos de texto de informa o podem ser necess rios z wires cross reference symbols Has L3 Ei 1 31 Fy Fa tado E Eri 2 E N PE i Mm He ino text symbols supply 227 supply LZ supply LI Supply M supply PE Com o uso de tais s mbolos compostos da parte gr fica ponto de conex o e nome do componente ao final do fio tanto ele como o borne ter o um destino Os textos de informa o est o dispon veis na biblioteca EN61346 2UK P gina 52 F Introdu o sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados F 3 NDICE DA P GINA comum a necessidade de inser o de p ginas entre as j existentes em um projeto por conta das mais variadas situa es
239. ged into another connector By default the attached connector is always shown on the right side of a pin so cables are not necessary here Bridges are not required in the Connector Matrix or in the Connector plan so there are no placeholders in the page template More information about this you can find in the Manual JJ Introdu o Pagina 287 Zaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados JJ 3 DRAW MORE THAN ONE CONNECTOR PER PAGE Plugged lo Plugged lo E pm 8 oo sm o D E E oa oa a ca ca gt Cc female connector male connector Connection Comec lion Descrip fon Descrip ion London trad Gemo project In BEE Electica Generating the Page template PogeBredak 0 Lines 8 Connector Matrix Connector Connector 2 o 2 E S o Descrpion IGE P gina 288 JJ Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 Group the geometry and texts from the title block as Page Template Title Block symbol 2 Generate all geometry and texts that show information that belongs to the Connector 3 Place a text with the attribute Connector 4 Generate all geometry and texts that show information that belongs to the pin The geometry and texts that are not changed have to be grouped as Graphical symbol 5 Place a text with the
240. gina 40 m Ti a ee pp ee ee eee E E Movimente o cursor para a arvore Simbolos D um duplo clique na pasta Relay contacts NC para abri la Clique no s mbolo 7 pole NC Movimente o cursor para a area de desenho O simbolo aparecera ligado ao cursor Solte o s mbolo no local sobre a bobina na coluna 3 A conex o ser interrompida A caixa de di logo do contato NF sera mostadada Componente 2K4 Conexao 00 21 Insira o n mero do contato Conex o 01 22 Insira o n mero do contato OK Clique com o bot o direito para sair do modo de inser o D Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exerc cio 4 14 Copiar os componentes e conex es na coluna 4 coluna 3 2 3 4 5 gt f gt Li T md l Ds o e a a ea aby e O aeaa a aeaea en ed er ey ane en aae aae tta aia ToO T T Defina o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo de forma que o borne superior esteja dentro dele na Defina o segundo ponto do ret ngulo abaixo do grupo presente na coluna 3 Todos os componentes dentro do ret ngulo ser o destacados Ap s selecionar os componentes e fios clique na conex o superior da bobina Mantenha pressionada a tecla CTRL o bot o esquerdo do mouse e movimente o Arraste a c pia do grupo na coluna 4 Solte a c pia e a tecla CTRL As caixas de di logo para os bornes e o contato aparecer o A sequ ncia de
241. gs for the horizontal and vertical wires you need to create two symbols one for the horizontal wire and one for the vertical wire Each symbol has to contain one line which represents the wire and the texts for the wire number the potential name wire size and colour the text have to have the text attributes ID for wire number potential name wire size and colour The text properties such as text font width and height colour and angle will be used when you create the wire properties If there is no text representation in the symbol for one of the wire properties the default settings will be used if the property will be displayed The position of the wire property on the wire will be taken from the position of the corresponding text inthe symbol The value of the text defines how will be treated the position in relation to the wire The following values are possible W gt the position of the text will be calculated from the left extremity of the wire For example the position of the text dX dY in relation to the extremity of the line in the symbol is 5 mm The W gt value is defined in the text with the ID for the wire number When the wire number is created in the wire it will be places at 5 mm from the extremity of the wire regardless of the length of the wire Example Wire numbering potential Wire number Wire color FE OEE Wire size lt W the position of the text will be calculated from the right ex
242. gt Separator 2 ID 3 ID Examples Combine 2 types inthe Product List Separator FU 160040 160041 Combine Page description 1 and 2 in the Document List Separator space FU 120100 120110 The number of Some formatting attributes have been introduced to allow the digits and the formatting of information displayed in the graphical lists none of length of the text these formatting attributes can be combined with another one of can be controlled these attributes In the Terminal Matrix and Terminal Plan as well as in the Terminal Row Picture Cable Plan and Products Assembly this option is not available Attention only one of this formatting attributes can be used Numerical values Control the number of decimal places Add to your template a text placeholder with Normal text attribute that contains the command lt ID of text attribute gt lt n gt f or lt ID of text attribute gt d Add this if three decimal places are necessary for the amount ID 180040 in the part list The result for the amount in the part list is 5 004 180040 d Add this no decimal places are necessary for the amount ID 180040 in the part list The result for the amount in the part list is 5 For example 180040 3f Add this if three decimal places are necessary for the amount ID 180040 in the part list The result for the amount in the part list is 5 Control the decimal places and add static text Add a te
243. guia Simbolos Feche a pasta Switchgear one pole clicando no sinal de subtra o esquerda do nome D um duplo clique na pasta Relay contacts NO Clique no simbolo 1 pole NO Movimente o cursor para a area de desenho O simbolo aparecera ligado ao cursor Solte o s mbolo na posi o desejada na coluna 2 Componente Na sequ ncia ser preenchido o nome do componente ao qual o contato pertence 102 Clique no bot o presente no campo Componente A janela Componente fun o localiza o aparecer e nela estar o os componentes com depend ncia de contatos Selecione o componente a partir da lista Conex o 00 13 Digite o n mero Conex o 01 14 Digite o n mero OK Feche a caixa de di logo Voc tamb m pode selecionar s mbolos a partir da vista gr fica D Introdu o P gina 33 asd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Clique com o bot o direito na pasta desejada Ative o comando Vista Gr fica E Simbolos i 1 pole auto retum 1 pole cont auto trip pole NO i 1 pole NO contactor t pole NO delay 1 pole NO delay activ Ss K VA 1 pole NO delay de act 1 pole NO detent 1 pole NO early Avance ou retroceda entre os s mbolos clicando nos bot es lt lt Retornar e Avancar gt gt Clique no s mbolo para seleciona lo Pagina 34 D Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento
244. h ad Alias information tab If something is defined here it is assumed that you use alias names Range if used Sheet name From Column Alas name To Column for Alias lookup column From The first field of the Excel sheet that contains relevant information about alias names To The last field in the Excel sheet that contains relevant information about alias names PP Introdu o P gina 325 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados P gina 326 Sheet name For example Alias name of the Excel sheet if you wish to change the sheet names of your Excel table you must enter valid names here Column alias name Enter the letter of the column in the Excel table that contains the alias name for example Component Name Column for Alias lookup column Enter here the letter of the column in the Excel table that specifies in which columns of the Excel spreadsheet the texts for the components must be searched HT for alias name Component Name in our example PP Introdu o ry electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ LISTS AND LABELS EDITOR Advanced QQ 17 CREATING LABEL TEMPLATES Exercise 39 1 Create a template for labels Only one label can be edited When you print this label it can be multiplied according to the specified number of lines and
245. h Color C Formating values Wire number type HN M umber Wire Part Target list PC S ioe Hark target as Potential C Colour Target Separator Pretix Postfix ET Tupe Potential frit neyo ee POTENTIAL i 0 Signal P Potential Post ire Part it Post ire Post yireL ist fs oe WwireList EN Testhle and E scel Wire list Excel Wire list Wire Part Control define the attributes and Sorting Number of columns in each row Potentials first NEST 0 Sort by name N Number S Size C Colouy T Tupe U Signal P Potential Report 7 Report to text file Tx Report to ESCE L le L5 E programss5EE ElectricalyProjects stest wiringList Cancel Specify inthe area Text file and Excel Wire list which information is to be displayed and in what order it is to appear Testile and Excel Wire list Wire Park Control define the attributes and Sorting Potentials first NEST Sort by name W Mumber S Size C Colour T Type O Signal P Potential In the example above the information about wire number wire colour wire section and wire type will be display ed in the specified order v If you tick the Potentials first option you can define if potentials should appear at the beginning of the wiring list or not v If you tick the Sort by name option you can define whether the wires should be sorted by wire direction or by wire name Z Introdu o P gina 211 electrical
246. h IEEE circuit diagrams make sure that the number and the position of the sections are equal in the old and in the new template If you select different kind of documents a message appears informing you that it is not possible to change the template unless selecting documents of the same kind DD 1 9 REDLINING OBJECTS LIST Callouts are shown in the View Redlining list with the text they contain and the page where they are found Because of this callouts can be used to keep an overview about the revisions made in a workspace The View redlining list gives you the possibility to navigate to the redlining in the page via the pop up menu lf the database list is already open and you need to refresh it please close and reopen it If the database list View Redlining is opened there is a question if the existing Redlining list shall be opened or if anew one must be created This database list can then be inserted into a page using the List2drw command or inthe Advanced level a user defined graphical list can be created Where Export_ 4212 DD Introdu o P gina 237 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE ADVANCED PROCESSING OF A PROJECT Advanced FE 1 NAVIGATION IN THE PROJECT Two ways of navigation exist in SEE Electrical v Navigation via cross references This method of navigation allows you to go from one page to another with the help of the
247. h function group P 3 GENERATE COVER SHEETS FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS All graphical lists can generate a cover sheet if necessary This is done with the text CoverSheet lt template name for cover sheet gt text attribute normal text inside the page template of the graphical list Example for document list CoverSheet Cover Document List The page template for the cover sheet CoverDocumentlist TDW must be located in templates folder In the properties for the graphical list is defined the template to use for list generation and not the one to use for the cover sheet The cover sheet for the list is always loaded Inside a coversheet no data source will be used So the coversheet is a static drawing where only the default objects are shown and project attributes are read Pagina 132 P Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Q EXTERNAL DATA TRANSFER Q 1 DATA TRANSFER THROUGH DWG DXF DXB FORMAT Data transfer between various CAD systems is possible through the DWG DXF DXB format However it is not possible to transfer data about electro technical logic while transferring data through these formats Exercise 16 1 Import data into SEE Electrical Create a new empty page first 1 CA File 2 CO Open 3 CO AutoCAD DWG DXF DXB Drawing 5 gt Files of Type 6 gt AutoCAD DXF files dxf Select the desired type of file f gt Look in Sele
248. he command and define the appropriate settings Define background of a symbol v Use background for a symbo Select background color id a Background width OU arn 0K Cancel The Use background for a symbol checkbox allows you to enable the functionality when you process drawings with scanned information and disable it when you process drawings created directly in SEE Electrical By default the background colour is set to white but you can define a different colour within the Select background colour pull down list The Background width option defines the width of the filling area for the background i 2 Click OK to validate the selected settings VV Introdu o P gina 409 ea c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados VV 2 TOOLS FOR MAKING DXF DWG IMPORTED DRAWINGS MORE INTELLIGENT VV 2 1 DEFINING PATTERNS DEFINEPATTERNS COMMAND The command allows you to exchange patterns found in the diagram with symbols that are made following the rules for components terminals etc Potentials and standard sheets can also be recognized In this way for example drawings imported by DXF DWG import can be converted to good working SEE Electrical circuit diagrams that produce terminal plans etc This means that drawings which do not contain any logic can be changed into ones with electrical logic You need the
249. he current day QQ Introdu o Pagina 343 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Double click on it Functions E a fA Minute Date gt Number ft Month HD ate gt Number fb Month Date gt String A Now gt Date JA Second Date gt Number fb Timef String gt String DE Today gt Date oof woy AD atelliNumber gt Number A Year HD ate gt Nurmbert i A eim a Da O q 1 The function is transferred to the text line created datef QQ 3 6 FILTERING IN THE LISTS It is possible to define multiple filters By means of some examples the definition of frequently used criteria will be explained QQ 3 6 a LIST OF PARTS FOR A PARTICULAR MANUFACTURER 1 lf the fields of the list template have been defined List of parts define then the filter using the Project Filter 2 Double click the Fields folder in the left window s area to open it and double click the field code you like to define a filter for In the example this is the manufacturer and the code is F 12000007 P gina 344 QQ Introdu o re Edit Filter Saelectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Varables fi b b b b b b b b b EA Ee Ee a EE ee Condition E x and Functions Functions Test Condi Catei FStr l
250. he following definitions are used P Links identified via potentials 0 Links identified automatically via wires main link type 1 Link type 1 you can assign it instead of the Wire type for example inlaying link 2 Link type 2 etc up to 10 Link type 10 Exercise 21 3 Switch to page 2 of your training workspace Place a new terminal X2 11 beneath the terminal X2 1 Define the link type between the terminals X2 1 and X2 11 1 CA Electrical 2 CO Properties Wires panel 3 Identify the wire whose LINK type you want to change Wire prop erties Value Wire size Wire color Wyire number 4 gt LINK Type The value Wire in the LINK type line means that a link type is not defined In the training the LINK type Wire must represent inlaying links Bridge type 1 would represent wire links 5 gt Bridge type 01 Select another link type 6 gt OK The link type has been changed and you can identify the next wire or close the function W Introdu o P gina 173 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 4 GRAPHICAL WIRE NUMBERING The graphical wire numbering is frequently requested SEE Electrical standard provides this feature T 4 Io 2 e NE NE Espe See be A i rn ae 9 i Y2 The functions for automatic numbering and removing wire numbers are available in the Elec
251. he text for the target left no target symbols will be displayed only the component text is used as target If Circuit diagram symbols must be placed 2 routes and 1 text are required for the position of the symbol look in the List of Construction set symbol library Cable plan with graphics folder Define the distance between different cables on one page You can define the distance via the texts Cable core in the Cable core information and Cable name in the Cable information You can define the direction in which cable and cable cores appear in the template by means of the distance between the texts Target left and Number of lines in the Cable core information direction of cables cable cores distance between cables target lei 25 lines E Co Save the page template Assign the new page template in the Properties of the Cable plan Here you cannot use all of the settings options available via the template For more details see chapter Graphical lists in the Help topics uno colour mn T Target right Y Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Y 3 SHOWING NOT USED CABLE CORES IN CABLE PLAN Spare cores can only be shown if the cable got a type and the number of cores is defined inside this type lf you want to show the spare cores the template must be changed Just add a text with attribute normal and conte
252. his right click within the Symbol explorer and select the Properties pop up command In the window that appears customize the visibility of the symbol databases ON or OFF and click OK E Symbol Databases Properties lt ar ET Name Circuit diagrams EN Installations Cabinets Synopsis Froject cover sheet F amp ID Single line diagram Graphical lists Circuit diagrams EN Installations Cabinets Sr Se Se Mis S Se Se Be Se Be Be Cancel This also means that the appearance of the Symbol Explorer typically displayed in a more simplified and limited way will vary depending on the module that you have activated since all non relevant symbol databases are left out M Introdu o P gina 103 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Several components including wires and potentials such as Reverse circuit breaker interlock can be saved in the symbol database In this way you can save time working with repeating circuit groups Before saving the group in the symbol database you can choose its performance v Loose group The single symbols wires and potentials of the group are available for single manipulation that is they can be moved copied or deleted Component group The component group must remain grouped i e it can be moved or deleted as a whole After ungrouping the single symbols wires and potentials in the group c
253. holders exist in the group see topic Create symbols above inthis chapter Da S ia Microsoft Excel iii Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View B1 fe Code 4 wi A J D E F electrical Component name Function 2 Supply1 AatogenMain O oa 1 f 3 motort AatogenMain TCC 4 Alarm 1 AatogenMain 1 1 5 st left ight1 AatogenMain 1 1 Cd 6 motor control 2 AatogenMain TT 7 st ast slow2 AatogenMain CTC 8 lrelais at plc AatogenMain TT 44 gt gt Symbols Pro jec P ge ms c ji ns a i A E ET O EO gt y Add the groups to be used and delete the unnecessary lines Column A Symbolname The column includes the names of the existing symbols This name must be available in the SEE electrical symbol database Column B New page If you type the letter s a new page will be created while inserting the group indicated in this line regardless of whether the new group fits into the current page or not Column C Page template Define the page template to use if a new page is required Next columns Here you can define texts for the components The texts will be inserted by using the automatic generation function if corresponding text placeholders are available in the groups Pagina 316 PP Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 4 4 DE
254. ible to display this text in one line in the product list P Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Component Properties PREP anna a e eer eee eer am O A A o reer Properties Freyiew Value Sho H1 2 Product to Description OO maximum 7 MO x mu pe speed Sp pp E pearen H ype Teo ned EE E Connection OU 1 F a rir LAANA Pa If for example the text description 00 is to be split in three lines in a component to fit the space available in the circuit diagram it is possible to display this text in one line In the product list In the Terminal Matrix and Terminal Plan as well as in the Terminal Row Picture Cable Plan Connector Matrix Connector Plan and Products Assembly this option is not available To output multiple lines in one single line the page templates must be enhanced in the following way The ID for the Description 00 text is 160030 If inthe template for the product list is present the 160030 SingleLine Placeholder the text is displayed in one line maximum speed reached If no separator is defined a blank one is used after each linebreak lf a separator is defined it is used If in the tempOlate for the product list is present the 160030 SingleLine placeholder the text is displayed with a as a separator Maximum speed reached Use word wrap in Itis possible to use a lin
255. ical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Press the button to open and load the desired folder and then type name of XML 5 file Close the folder window with the help of the Open button If you select an existing XML file a question appears asking you if you want to add the results of the new scan to this XML file or if you want to start again If you add the new results to the existing file you can benefit from the mappings already done and you will be sure that you use the same definitions for all your data 7 Press the Scan projects for texts button to start the scanning process 8 CO FontT oolMapFont 9 Choose the first XML file with the results from the scanning of your data 10 Change the settings for New Font Name New Font Height New Font Width and New Font Distance for each of the different fonts and the combinations of text attributes In case you need to use a different code page than the default one it is possible to choose the appropriate script when defining the font The script you defined appears in the New Font Script field but cannot be changed 11 Save your changes with the help of the Set font mapping button 12 Close the window with Cancel 13 CO FontToolChangeProjects 14 Press the cai button within the Projects area to define the projects to scan for fonts 15 Press the x button if you want to remove a project fr
256. icklist you have to follow the rules for drawing cables If you want to insert cable cores at different places you can take the first cable core from the Picklist but after that you have to draw the other cable cores via the Electrical Cable Cable command as the cable disappears from the Component Without Graphic list as soon as the first core is inserted OO Introdu o Pagina 309 Zaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP AUTO DIAGRAM Advanced PP 1 INTRODUCTION The automatic generation of circuit diagrams is executed by using special symbols groups anda Microsoft Excel spreadsheet To use the Autodiagram function you need to have knowledge about Microsoft Excel and about working with SEE Electrical especially about creating symbols and page templates PP 2 CREATING SYMBOLS GROUPS You can create symbols easily as they include regular components their texts and wires and two additional text placeholders to indicate the start point and the end point of the group 1 Create the groups as usual by using components and wires or insert an existing group ungroup it if it is a fixed group if the elements have been grouped using Edit Block Macro Group EQ Power Component name description and type must be replaced with texts from the Excel spreadsheet by executing the Autodiagram function for the automa
257. ields gt FROM lt table in Access database gt ORDER BY To sum the length of cables of equal types sort the list by cable type first Use the ORDER BY clause To sort then the cables by name specify the name as second parameter Syntax ORDER BY lt value gt The value must be defined under the following form lt table name gt lt field name gt Multiple sorting criteria must be separated with commas 2 Define Sum variables To calculate the cable length define a sum variable You can define sum variables using Project menu O Sum variables QQ Introdu o P gina 355 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example Calculate cable length Sum ariables Available sum varables Page sum Name Sums Over 4 E Valf 60101 Edit Expression Is correct Cancel 3 Specify a Group header Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 1 1 Line HoE dh BBa a i Header Line Data Line Footer Line Group Header Line Definition 2 Line Location Functon Mame Description Line 2 P gina 356 Fa e ectrical QQ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 Data line must include the cable length 5 Define a Footer line Calculation of cable length for multiple cable types is performe
258. ile generating the terminal plan if necessary Only vertical or horizontal lines are allowed 2 Second route The route defines the distance between the terminal row and the last remote object _ distance PE If several connection lines exist this route defines the distance between the connection lines to be more precise the difference between the x and y values defines the distances between the connection extension lines 3 The text The text defines where the reference point of the component is placed _ Text for symbol position The routes and the text have special identifications Insert the Routing symbol from the List construction set symbol database into the Terminal plan and change it if you want to create a completely new Terminal plan Il Introdu o Pagina 277 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Routing If the connection of a symbol is not located on the top side of the symbol the connection lines are drawn on the right side round to the symbol If you insert the RT1 text in the text placeholder for the left target the connection lines are drawn directly to the symbol connections with AT1 without t RT1 F u F Symbol scaling SF SX and or SY in the text placeholder for the left target defines the Symbol scaling in the Cable plan SF defines a scaling factor in X and Y direction Example
259. imprimir Usar visibilidade Spe Co E Nenhuma 9 6 Insira o texto no desenho clicando na posi o desejada A caixa de di logo Texto continuar aberta 7 Movimente o cursor para o campo Texto novamente 8 Modifique o texto existente ou digite um novo posicionando o em seguida no desenho 9 gt Clique no bot o para fechar a caixa de di logo Texto Exerc cio 6 11 Modificar o texto inserido anteriormente 1 CA Editar 2 CO Editar Texto painel Texto Pagina 56 F Introdu o sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Voc tamb m pode clicar no cone Al 3 M Clique no texto que deseja modificar Controle do motor 1 Pesquisar qualquer parte do texto BO de Tradu o Propriedades Propriedades B sicas Atributo Texto nomnal Fonte N mero fonte vetorial 1 Altura 350 Dist ncia 0 70 Angulo ooo Largura 250 i Distancia da Linha E i Po rr RE xibi propriedades avan adas o ema RAE A Tae ag os a tk do o E g mia do ea e a o eS Te fam 4 Movimente o cursor para o campo Texto 5 lt Texto gt Modifique o texto de Controle do motor 1 para Motor 1 A mudan a poder ser vista diretamente no desenho 6 gt Se voc quiser clique na caixa de verifica o Exibir propriedades avan adas e modifique os atributos desejados como tamanho cor e alinhamento esquerda centralizado
260. in a circuit diagram In case the Enable Function Location database option is active in the Workspace Properties window you can access the Function Location Management window and select the desired function location for the pages and components in your workspace To select a function location for a page 1 Execute the Home L Information Page command and click the button in the Function field P gina 224 CC Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Properties E Mame Value a Function Location 5 1 Fage The Function Location Management window appears allowing you to select a function and or a location for the page To select a function location for a component 1 Double click the component to open the Component Properties window for example ka Component Properties Value Show Function B1 Be Auto Location 44 Db Auto Product Fi a Description 00 2504 wf Type Hide Connection oo Connection 01 Connection 02 4 i Show Component Information W Show Connection Information Show Slave Information 2 Click the Et button in the Function field The Function Location Management window appears allowing you to select a function and or a location for the component
261. in generally numbers as texts QQ 6 2 d FSTR Fstr lt value gt HHHE HH This command allows formatting numbers QQ 6 2 e ASKSTRING AskString lt variable name gt lt when does the question dialog appear gt lt suggested value gt lt max number of characters gt The variable AskString allows you to execute a dialogue with a text question and enter user defined texts while creating the list Arguments lt variable name gt This text will be shown when the question appears The text must be placed between double quotation marks AskString ad lt When does the question dialog appear gt List of products AskString Projectname By selecting F you specify that the question dialogue is executed only once at the beginning of the list lt suggested value gt P gina 366 QQ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Enter the value to be automatically suggested The text must be placed between double quotation marks lt max number of characters gt Enter the max number of characters expected for your text QQ 6 2 f LEN LEFT RIGHTS Len gives the length of the strings Right or Left cut the right or the left characters from a string The following expression divides the strings into 2 parts if the length of strings exceeds a determined length Using this you can for example split the com
262. inal matrix as a template in the properties of Terminal matrix X Introducao Pagina 189 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados X 3 2 DRAWING GRAPHICS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH TERMINAL ONE GEOMETRY FOR ALL TERMINALS This allows you to draw the geometry for all terminals belonging to the terminal strip 6 k E O E iL Praja Drorsing m Fav IG EJXAO Lair tea 1 Corp Hreinsa pE 00 001 Pagina 190 X Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Generating the page template 1 Position all the elements of a terminal matrix or a terminal plan as already described Do not position the place holder for terminal number You can use an existing template and delete the geometry texts that you do not need Path j Sheet EE Cale type Cobledesc right Colblelype right Coblenome right E 9 coblelines Torget right Terminal Matrix Terminal Strip Torget lett Cable dest Left Coble type lefi Coblename leti 9 coblelines Note Cable type Cablename anna Cable RE as 7 Logo ee ee ea PE 2 Generate a Block Macro Group symbol from all these elements except for the terminal number if there is one Generating the geometry for each single terminal 3a Draw the geometry for the first part of the terminal
263. ined Cables 12 M 6 3 Settings for Cables 12 M 7 INFORMATION ABOUT COMPONENT INSERTION 12 M 7 1 a Relay Coils 12 M 7 1 b Terminals 12 M 7 1 c Assigning a Component Name 12 M 8 INFORMATION ABOUT SYMBOL DATABASES 12 M 8 1 Creating a New Database 12 M 8 2 Directories and Names 12 M 8 3 Working with Symbol Folders 12 M 8 4 Working with Symbols in the Database 12 M 8 5 Favorites Symbol Folder 12 M 8 6 Symbol Database Connection to Modules 12 N GROUPS 12 N 1 CREATING A GROUP 12 N 2 UNGROUPING SELECTED ELEMENTS 12 N 3 MOTOR TERMINALS AND SIMILAR COMPONENTS 12 N 4 CONNECTORS USING SEVERAL PLUGS AND JACKS TOGETHER 12 O BASIC OPERATIONS WITH TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS 12 O 1 CREATING A STANDARD SHEET 12 O 2 CREATING A PAGE TEMPLATE 12 O 3 CREATING A WORKSPACE TEMPLATE 12 0 4 QUICKREFERENCE TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS 12 P TEMPLATES AND STANDARD SHEETS FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS 12 El CREATING TEMPLATES FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS 12 P2 FORMATTING TEMPLATES FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS 12 P 3 GENERATE COVER SHEETS FOR GRAPHICAL LISTS 12 Q EXTERNAL DATA TRANSFER 12 Q 1 DATA TRANSFER THROUGH DWG DXF DXB FORMAT 12 Q 2 PIXEL IMAGES TRANSFER 12 R PROCESSING A WORKSPACE 12 R 1 ADDITIONAL OPTIONS FOR CROSS REFERENCES 12 R 2 PLC FUNCTIONALITIES IN THE STANDARD LEVEL 12 P gina 4 A Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados R 2 1 Using the PLC database R 3 AD
264. inha 01 5 Diagrama de for a 6 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada O SEE Electrical abrir uma nova p gina de diagramas el tricos As informa es preenchidas anteriormente ser o inseridas automaticamente na p gina caso os campos existam no formul rio Nos passos a seguir voc come ar a desenhar o esquema el trico C Introdu o P gina 19 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados C 2 GRID Usando o grid voc poder alinhar precisamente elementos geom tricos textos e componentes poss vel ligar ou desligar a visualiza o do grid clicando no cone ti Ida aba Desenhar Ap s clicar no bot o Mi uma lista de valores de grid aparecer TEF 882 5 00 NR o0 0 50 1 00 125 E 250 Iv 5 00 10 00 20 00 40 00 o0 00 Dukra Escolhendo a op o Outro poss vel definir manualmente o valor do grid Dica Tamb m poss vel fazer com que valores personalizados apare am no menu de de grid Para fazer isso necess rio modificar o arquivo CAEGridSettings xml que est na pasta raiz de instala o do programa Este arquivo n o pode ter mais de dez valores de grid P gina 20 C Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados C 3 P GINA 1 Exerc cio 3 2 Inserir a entrada de alimenta o Cliqu
265. ion will be displayed in this field In the same way you choose the additional symbol to be used at the middle core and the additional one for the last core of the cable Their names descriptions are displayed respectively in the Middle Symbol and End Symbol fields The definition is saved in CABLESNEW MDB The file must be located in your Templates folder The definitions are available for all workspaces In the Angle field you have to specify the fixed rotation of your cable at the insertion Because the symbols are used the angle is fixed If an angle of O degree is used the cable cores are created from left to right If an angle of 180 degree is used the cores are created from right to left The same is applied for 90 and 270 degrees Hints 1 For creating cable definitions the various cable symbols must be present in the symbol database Symbols must have all the necessary cable symbol properties assigned 2 The symbols must be created at such angle as it is defined for use 3 The defined cables are to be stored in the Template CablesNew mdb database The cables from this database are available for all projects When you want to use or add a user defined cable a dialogue listing all pre defined cables appears Example Cables Setup Hame _ StartSymbol Middle Symbol EndSymbol Angle Cables Symbols Di Db CablestS ymbols Di Cables Symbols Db O Diagonal Co Cablest ymbot Di Db Cables Symbols Di Db Cab
266. ionado sera copiado 4 Cole os dados no MS Excel ou MS Word teclando CTRL V Pagina 64 J Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 9 4 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar J Introdu o Pagina 65 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados electrical K LISTAS GR FICAS K 1 GERANDO UMA LISTA GR FICA As listas gr ficas permitem colocar as informa es auxiliares do projeto em formato padr o Exerc cio 10 1 3 CO Criar a lista grafica de componentes do projeto Expanda o n Listas Gr ficas a partir da rvore do Projeto Listas Gr ficas o Documentos Po Componentes ip Conectores Cabos Descri o dp Condutores do Cabo o Operandos CLP Pp Fios Conex es dp Conex o Fios com Destino Fios Descri o Po Componentes i Simplificado eo Componentes Expandido o Componentes t Compras o Componentes Reposi o Po R gua de Conectores q Gr fico de Cabos o Gr fico Cabos Conex o eo Componentes F amp L eo Componentes FAL ordenada o Componentes Simb Gr fica Aspecto de Fun o aspecto de Localiza o o Condutores do Cabo t Especial R gua de Conectores Interliga o py Desenho R gua Conectores Mulicondutores GY Multicondutores Conex o De acordo com o nivel e idioma usado no software diferentes Listas gr fi
267. iption If you define a component code you can use the Renumber command to renumber the components later on if necessary To add components The Add Component command is also available in the right pane of the window EO You can also assign a type to the component in the right pane Add Terminal Connector Hotkey SHIFT gt adds a terminal connector to the selected product This command is also available in the right pane of the window 9 After you execute the command a window appears where you can define the number and sorting of the terminal connector Define how many terminals or connector pins willbe generated in the Amount field In Offset field you can define the spacing between the values in Terminal Connector sorting To copy paste and delete products Use the available pop up commands to execute the different actions Pagina 226 CC Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados How to avoid inserting components with the same product aspect The Unique Product aspect on component The functionality is available in the right part of the window only incase a circuit diagram page has been opened It is used to avoid inserting components with the same product aspect twice You can use the Mark unused command to find which products are not used In case you want to use one component at two different places disable the setting and pl
268. ist of more than one line The list titles cannot contain parts of SEE Electrical projects Such as project name project created date editor etc QQ 2 3 HEADER LINES Header lines in a table are used to define column titles if you are not working with a group structure Header lines can contain paris of SEE Electrical projects such as project name project created date editor etc QQ Introdu o P gina 335 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 2 4 GROUP HEADER Groups are used for structuring the list for example if all the products of a manufacturer must be printed consecutively and the name of the manufacturer has to appear as a group header You must define a condition for the group change in the header i e if data in the specified field s change a new group starts You can choose whether to continue on a new page and show the group header again or not The group header may consist of more than one line for example a title and column titles QQ 2 5 GROUP FOOTER LINES If you structure the list using groups the group footer line can contain the article total price or the article total length Besides it can contain only texts QQ 2 6 DATA LINES Data lines contain fields that must be entered in the list The available fields depend on the chosen database list of SEE Electrical However the available fields vary in the database lists too Fo
269. ition Channel Definitions Drawing types Connection ID Symbol Reference Symbol 00 DORAN ae sic MAIN NO Sus aE SU conincis MANNS poi NO Types Mirrors MainContact NO3 a o ae sa s NO 3 EN61 346 2UK Relay contacts NO 1 pole NO Types Mirrors NO 9 Cabinets 21 22 Relay contacts NC EN61346 2UK Relay contacts NC 1 pole NC Types Mirrors NC 5 al Cancel Exercise 18 6 Copy the type you have just created and copy a different channel information 1 gt Click the type in the type database 2 gt 2 M Functions 3 M Copy Selected Type A copy with the type name Copy of lt type gt appears now it is Copy of Type 1 Now copy a new channel definition for this type Make sure the type to add the channel definition to is selected In the Functions menu of the Type database manager window choose the Copy channel from other type command 6 Select the type to copy the channel information from like you select a type normally Only one type can be selected here 7 Terminate your selection Doing this the channel information is copied 4 gt You can close the Type Database Manager window by clicking the Close button Pagina 146 T Introdu o gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados T 2 USING TYPES IN THE CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS Use the newly defined type in the current circuit diagram Exercise 18 7 Switch to page 2 of your training workspace a
270. l trico EM 0 0001 Diagrama de for a 0 000 Diagrama de comando q Instala o Predial Painel El trico a uiro Do cu mentos Listas Gr ficas Banco de Dados 2 CA Origem 3 CO Novo painel Pagina O SEE Electrical abrir a caixa de di logo Informa o da p gina 4 gt Descri o da pagina Linha 01 5 Outras informa es 6 gt P gina O n mero 1 ser sugerido automaticamente N o o modifique T gt Data de cria o da p gina A data atual ser sugerida Voc pode preencher outras informa es se necess rio 8 gt K A caixa de di logo ser fechada A caixa de di logo Inserir objeto aparecer permitindo a escolha de outro documento a ser inserido Nela est o os aplicativos Windows instalados em seu computador que suportam a tecnologia ActiveX 9 gt Escolha um dos aplicativos mostrados 10 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada As fun es do aplicativo selecionado estar o dispon veis para edi o do documento 11 Edite o documento Exerc cio 11 2 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar L Introdu o Pagina 69 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M CRIANDO S MBOLOS Os s mbolos para diagramas el tricos devem ser criados de acordo com regras r gidas de forma que as conex es sejam reconhecidas e para a correta administra o dos componentes utilizados isso influir diretamente na respectiva lista M 1
271. l Hatch Area NS Parallel A kl br Td The command is added to the user defined Draw panel P gina 398 TT Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 5 gt In the Customizer window select the Electrical Draw panel of your Electrical Training category 6 gt In the left pane of the window explode the Basic Commands node and select the Electrical Wire Connections sub node 7 gt Select the 1 Wire command 8 gt Click the button Definition of categones Select module Circuit diagrams EN H S Electrical 4 TT Introdu o EH Potential EL Wire Connections al Orthogonal Wiri eg iii Wire rubberband e Connect Between H Wires Cable H Multicore mm ia a E H Auto Connection g User Defined Categories H Hlectrical Edensions ES Training E Draw 2 aa artical pu LEU P gina 399 see e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The command is added to the user defined Electrical Draw panel E Customizer Definition of categones pesa e Select module Circuit diagrams EN Load E Ag User Defined Categories H Electrical Extensions EEE H Potential EI Wire Connections a Training Orthogonal Wiring ED Draw 1Wire q Circle If 3 Wire as 15 Blec
272. l de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 5 SIGNAL PROPERTIES Signal properties It is possible to assign Signal properties when drawing wires for example for control circuit or for power circuit For each Signal type you can define different attributes such as wire colour or size First it is necessary to activate the Signal types for wires option inthe Wires tab of the Circuit Diagram Properties window available after executing the Properties pop up command for Circuit diagrams inthe Workspace Explorer Afterwards click the Signal type setup button to define the desired signal properties For the standard level only 4 Signal properties are possible pa Name of signal Start no Step potential Show potential Step wi N 1 Default Control ji 1 1 1 Power 1 1 1 F 1 Record 1 rir 4 of Potential name and Wire number formatting values v Propagate potential line names Number S Page Path amp Name of signal type Show potential names on cable cores Ignore numbering definition in symbols Global signal numbeing Global wire numbering Activate Format Start no 1 o on e Pore H Number Page Change wire properties per Net Different options are available here For more information refer to the software s help If you work with signal properties you can select the signal property from the menu inthe Electrical catego
273. l type for example Component or Coil The size of the automatically created symbol depends on the default distance used for drawing potentials af Size y ak Se 142 sjzey SIZE xX U Introducao Pagina 159 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Position the newly created type via one of the commands Functions Component Add Functions Other Pick list or by using the Component Explorer A black box is automatically created The example above generates the following result l 2 4 P gina 160 U Introdu o sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados V ADDITIONAL HINTS ABOUT THE TYPE DATABASE Standard V 1 SEARCHING AND COPYING IN THE TYPE DATABASE Searching Inthe Type Database Manager window the Functions Find Type command is available It opens the familiar Type Database Browser dialogue allowing you to search for a type na Type Database Browser mn e Database r Selected Filter ES x E Manufacturer Drag a column header here to group by that column J Goods Group Collapse Properties Settings v Copying Inthe Type Database Manager window the Functions Copy Selected Type command is available By generating a copy of the selected
274. lable InStr expression is available too InStr InSTR checks whether the string in the defined field contains a pattern string Syntax InStr lt field gt lt pattern string gt Example Component names must contain the letter M WHERE InStr Export 8010 160010 M QQ 6 2 COMMANDS IN LISTS AND LABELS QQ 6 2 a CONDITIONS IF Syntax If Contains lt field gt value lt result if the condition is satisfied gt lt result if the condition is not satisfied can be omitted gt Example Print labels in one line it doesn t match more than 4 characters a page break can occur but only when an empty character is found F_160010 gt 3 Left F_160010 3 Right F_160010 4 F_ 160010 If the component name is gt 3 characters long it is split into 3 characters on the left and 4 characters on the right with one space between If the component name is lt 3 it remains whole QQ Introdu o Pagina 365 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 6 2 b UPPER LOWER Upper lt VALUE gt This command converts the letters case into upper so that it is possible afterwards to be compared with the value after Upper this value must always be written in uppercase The LOWER command changes the letters case into lower QQ 6 2 c VAL Val lt field gt VAL transforms a text into a number The fields in SEE Electrical databases conta
275. le Rogle E RT 1 _ LL ou the horizantol line hos to be on the some height os the end of The minimum connection Line Torget P gina 280 Il Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Part 1 Generate routing information from cable to the target No The part for the routing information from the cable to the target consists of v the text placeholder for cable core number left ID 180128 for example No v the text placeholder for cable core square ID 180138 optional v the minimum connection line black horizontal line ID 180125 As in the terminal plan the line shows a connection between the positions where later the texi for the first cable core is found to the position where the component symbol is found Eventually the line is extended to the position where the first contact point of the component is found when generating the plans v line for cable core number lilac horizontal line ID 1 shown dash dotted here v vertical line used to connect all cable cores ID 1 shown blue here This line crosses the other two lines in their common endpoint Block all these objects as Block Macro Group Part 2 Generate cable Mto Des 5 Type 5 The part for the cable contains v The geometry for the cable Generate the geometry like you normally do You can add normal texts if you want Block all as
276. les Symbols Ob 0 Diagonal Conr Cables Symbols Di Db Cables Symboals Di Cables Symbols Db 0 Shielded Cable dashe Cables Symbols S Bb Cables Symbols Sh Db Cablest ymbols Bb 0 Shielded Cable Cables Symbols S Db Cables Symbols Sh Db Cables Symbols4 Ob 0 l4 4 Record 1 ejm a If no use defined cable exists yet possible list empty no list will appear In case you choose a user defined cable it will be inserted Otherwise if you cancel the dialogue SEE Electrical will add a basic cable Pagina 98 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 6 3 SETTINGS FOR CABLES Circuit diagrams EN Properties Eb General i Reference si Coil Ls Wires pi Cables Cables Remove cables entirely during printing Cables Setup 4 Rearrange text information on cables Exclude selection from defined cables Rotate cable core Attributes Cable Attributes Setup Cable name used as default altemative to selection Component code for automatic cable numbering f Component code is empty the manual numbering for cables will be used Type attribute tor cable dimension If you have created user defined cables but you do not want to use them in a workspace you can tick the Exclude selection from defined cables option lf you have created user defined cables and y
277. lete commands Insert the Power supply 2 group Select the power supply All of the elements can be selected only together If you wish to select a single component the group must be ungrouped first 1 CA General 2 CO Normal Select panel 3 Select the group 4 CA Edit 5 CO Explode Actions panel The single elements are accessible again symbols potentials and wires Select the switchgear again It is accessible now N 2 UNGROUPING SELECTED ELEMENTS lf a single symbol such as a wire potential must be moved or deleted after inserting the group the group has to be ungrouped This does not apply to loose groups Click to select the group Execute the Edit Actions Explode command The group has been ungrouped N 3 MOTOR TERMINALS AND SIMILAR COMPONENTS If several terminals together are frequently needed such as terminals for a motor then those terminals must be defined as a group For the second terminal and every next terminal you can disable the view of the terminal strip using the Edit Component command N Introdu o Pagina 107 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados N 4 CONNECTORS USING SEVERAL PLUGS AND JACKS TOGETHER If you group several connector symbols as a macro group a Component Properties dialogue appears listing all pins of this group that belong to the same connector Example Two macro groups
278. ll C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R E Sort index 4 Sort index 10 Sort index 16 Sort index 22 Sort index 28 Sort index 34 Sort index 40 Sort index 46 Sort index 52 Sort index 58 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R z Sort index 5 Sort index 11 Sort index 17 Sort index 23 Sort index 29 Sort index 35 Sort index 41 Sort index 47 Sort index 53 Sort index 59 Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R Cell C R 20 If you want to change the name of a column or row now just double click its header and make your changes Like this it for example is possible to have characters from F to A in the rows instead of A to F EE In this case it could be necessary to change the sort order too 21 Click OK to close the window 22 23 Now setup control the other page properties as usual Keep in mind the positions for the first top and bottom potentials in relation to the section borders The position for the first top potential is set relatively to the top border of section the position for first bottom potential is set relatively to bottom border of section The margins for the left and right potentials are also relative to the section borders O Introdu o P gina 117 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 0 2 CREATING A
279. ll Then the placing continues in the next row Horizontal is the default value lf vertical is chosen the placing of components starts on top and goes to the bottom until the column is full Then the positioning continues in the next column Add a text with the attribute Graphical visibility ID 180178 for example show graphic This text determines if the graphical symbols are shown inside every component or not In order for the graphical symbol to be displayed the content of this placeholder has to be show graphic If this is not the case the graphical symbol will not be shown Add a text with the attribute Graphical offset ID 180177 for example graphical offset 5 This text defines the offset from the boundary rectangle to the graphical symbol The software looks for the sign and takes the value after it to generate the offset Add texts to control the position of the component name description and type If no definitions for component name function and location are made the texts appear at their default positions Add a text with attribute product to the block for the component inside the template if you want to define the position of the component name or the look of the text yourselves the attribute is found in the Component section in the Text Attributes You have to define the position of the component name if you want to define description type and or function location
280. ll as in the Spare parts list In the Spareparts simple list each element of the fuse appears on a separate line Look in the Parts list You only find the main type too In the Parts simple list the parts are on separate lines Once determined the types for components with subtypes must not be changed again lf a fuse sometimes has a splash guard and sometimes not the type for the splash guard can be defined as a second type for the fuse lf you need a 16A fuse now but you need a 4A fuse later define two types with different subtypes etc T Introdu o P gina 151 aa e ectri cal Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados U ADDITIONAL HINTS ABOUT COMPONENT MANAGEMENT IN THE TYPE DATABASE Standard U 1 CABLE MANAGEMENT SEE Electrical can manage information about Cable cores in the type database and Cable cores used in a cable Exercise 19 1 Define a cable type E Open the type database and create a cable type as usual 2 In the Property pane find the Number of cores attribute Properties Type Description Goods Group Type 1 Relay col AC Training Auxiliary Contactors Manufacturer Cable 1 Training Cable oe Training r WJalRecord 3 gt ri a Property Manufacturer Symbol name for terminal ro Assign sub types 3 Define Channels b Number of cores gb YY User setting 4 3 Click the gt icon and define a co
281. ll components on all pages command in the Product editor If you inserted or removed terminals you can change the terminal number and sorting via the terminal editor executing the Renumber all shown terminals command found in the pop up menu Through the pop up menu inthe Contact list is available the Renumber all contacts on all shown components command which allows you to renumber all the new contacts The renumbering of the contacts can be made only if the contactors relays components with auxiliary contacts have a valid channel definition This is necessary because the connection information is extracted from the channel definition even by renumbering The renumbering starts on the first page then continues page after page and on each page it begins from the upper left to the lower right corner If you use a filter for example for one page the contacts of all contactors relays components with auxiliary contacts located on the page will be renumbered i e the master symbols are always decisive If you filter on a single contactor relay component with auxiliary contacts only the contacts on this will be renumbered S Introdu o as selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados T CONTACT MIRROR AND TYPE DATABASE Standard In SEE Electrical standard you can choose to add cross references between a relay coil and its related contacts using either a contact mirror or
282. lly 12 EE 4 2 Display Cable Cores a Second Time 12 EE 5 ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY FOR POTENTIAL NUMBERING 12 EE 6 COPYING PAGES 12 EE 6 1 Copy Single Page in the Same Workspace 12 EE 6 2 Copy Single Page in the Same Workspace or in Different Workspace 12 EE 6 3 Copy Multiple Pages Between Different Workspaces 12 EE 7 CHANGING PAGE TEMPLATES 12 EE 8 TRANSLATING A WORKSPACE 12 EE 8 1 Displaying Several Translations at the Same Time 12 EE 6 2 Translation of Part Strings 12 EE 68 3 Updating Translation Text in a Sheet 12 EE 6 4 Looking up Texts in the Translation Database 12 EE 8 5 Exchanging the Source Languages of a Workspace 12 EE 9 CHANGING THE FONTS AND ATTRIBUTES FOR ALL TEXTS IN THE WORKSPACE SYMBOL LIBRARIES OR PAGE TEMPLATES 12 EE 10 PLC FUNCTIONALITIES INTHE ADVANCED LEVEL 12 EE 11 GENERATE GRAPHICAL LISTS IN ONE STEP 12 FF CUSTOMIZING THE WORKSPACE PAGE INFORMATION WINDOWS 12 GG CUSTOMIZING THE WORKSPACE TREE 12 GG 1 HIDE UNNECESSARY DATABASE AND GRAPHICAL LISTS 12 GG 2 SORTING OF DOCUMENTS IN THE WORKSPACE TREE 12 HH USER DEFINED SQL QUERIES 12 HH 1 1 Creating an SQL Query for Adding a Database List in the Workspace Explorer 12 HH 1 1 Definition of Graphical Formulas 12 P gina 6 A Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados I TERMINAL PLAN IL 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL PLAN IL2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A TERMINAL PLAN 1 2 1 Drawi
283. location if needed The changes apply to all of the selected components The Renumber all components on all pages function is available as a pop up command and allows you to rename all the components on all the pages as long as the user defined Component Numbering setting is not activated from standard level DD 1 2 TERMINAL EDITOR You can edit one or more records The Renumber all components on all pages and Renumber all shown terminals filtered functions are available as pop up commands Edit multiple records The sequence of defining the sorting criteria is important The criteria are shown in the headline of the window a Change the terminal names for the whole terminal strip Select all terminals in the terminal strip Change the terminal names b Renumber all terminals in the terminal strip Select all terminals in the terminal strip In the Terminal number field enter the following 1 gt 1 start from terminal number 1 increment 1 or 1 gt 10 start from terminal number 1 the next terminal has an increment 10 therefore it is 11 This method can also be used for terminal index DD Introdu o P gina 233 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados c Renumber the terminals in a terminal strip as follows all the terminals on page 1 in the top line first then all the terminals below starting in column1 etc 3 55 H SA ER 4 A 3 i
284. lour and a cross section for the cable cores P gina 152 U Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados he Cable cores x Properties Cable Type Cable 1 Number of Cores l4 4 FRecord 3 r k SSS ok 4 Click OK to finish the definition 5 Close the type database Exercise 19 2 Draw a new cable Use the defined type Properties O Vahe Product WR Description 00 Type Length Cable Dimension Cable core Mo 1 Cable core Mo 2 Cable core Mo 3 Cable core Colour Cable core Colour Cable core Colour Assign the newly defined type to the cable The number and cross section for the cable cores are filled in automatically as defined in the type database lf you wish to change the order of the cable cores delete all the core numbers then click the button in the first Cable core No line U Introducao Pagina 153 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A database opens where all the free cores of the current cable are displayed You can choose a core here Cable Cores LCrossS ection 1 5 1 5 Cancel 1 5 Select the desired cable core and click OK lt appears in the first Cable core No line Proceed in the same way to assign the other cable cores too Exercise 19 3 Draw another cable with more cable c
285. lows you to insert manual components that do not have any graphical representation and are not inserted in the circuit diagram pages Quick guide Inserting components without graphics 1 Open the Component without graphic Editor 2 Right click and select the Add new component command The following dialogue appears Block Component definition Cabinet Cable channel Cabinet Panel cs Cabinet Fail C Cable eo Component notin lists except as target Component with Aus Contacts Component with Aus Contacts with Contact Cross PLC Main Relay Coil Relay Coil Neutral Not m lists Relay Coil Slow Operating Relay Coil Slow Release Terminal Test Information target test Potential Transparent Component 3 Select the desired type for the element without graphics and click OK The element is inserted in the database list even if it does not exist in the circuit diagram You can modify its properties in the right pane of the Editor OO Introdu o P gina 303 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Hint If you right click on a row containing a component and you execute the Add new component command the new component will be a copy of the existing one To create a different kind of component right click the headline of the Component Without Graphic Editor In the right pane of the Editor you can v assign a name Function
286. lt page index gt The page index has values in the range from A to Z The numbering is executed in the same way as the numbering for the Excel columns For example PageBegin 10 A gt the result is pages 10 A 10 B 10 C P Introducao Pagina 125 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PageBegin 10 AA gt the result is pages 10 AA 10 AB You have to make sure that the number of pages does not exceed the number of digits given for the index Example The X1 X2 X50 terminal strips are used in a workspace The index that is used is A B After the creation of Index Z the next terminal strip is generated on a page with index AA but in the project tree the AA page is sorted after page A and the sorting will be the following PageBreak A new page will begin if the defined value changes lt value gt Example List of Products PageBreak 140020 140050 Each time the Function 140020 or Location 140050 changes a page break is inserted and the list continues on a new page The list can be sorted by the function in this way LineBreak An empty line is inserted if the defined value changes lt value gt ColumnBreak The ColumnBreak command allows you to switch to the next lt values gt column if the given value changes if a PageBreak command exists and the value defined in there is the same defined in HColumn Break the page is changed
287. m Trabalhando com o zoom para mais detalhes P gina 14 A Introdu o sea electrical A 2 ARQUIVOS E PASTAS Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O SEE Electrical utiliza as seguintes pastas e arquivos lt pasta SEE Electrical V7 gt PROJECTS SSYMBOLS TEMPLATES TEMPLATES LABEL SETTINGS Cont m os arquivos do programa SEE Electrical Nesta pasta s o armazenados por padr o os projetos do SEE Electrical Os arquivos de projetos possuem a extens o SEP Nesta pasta s o armazenados os bancos de dados de simbolos do SEE Electrical As bibliotecas de s mbolos possuem a extens o SES O banco de dados TYPES SES necess rio para os n veis Standard e Advanced tamb m armazenado nesta pasta Tenha em mente que a biblioteca SYSTEM SES necessaria pelo o programa internamente e nao deve ser removida desta pasta Se o modulo de Layout estiver dispon vel o arquivo IndexTable SES usado para criar tabelas de indexa o Esta pasta cont m modelos para projetos e formul rios e modelos para listas e etiquetas As fontes tamb m s o salvas nesta pasta SEP Modelos para projetos TDW P ginas modelo CABLESNEW MDB ou CABLESNEWIEEE MDB possuem os padr es para cabos DAT Fontes Arquivos SLS usados para criar etiquetas no formato de diversas impressoras Al m disso o SEE Electrical Advanced utiliza os seguintes arquivos TEMPLATES
288. m diagrama el trico com o mesmo n mero e indice A diferencia o entre eles ser de acordo com a camada e o numero em cada camada 1 g 6 A fo ge A indice A Camada 1 Todos os elementos de um borne multi camadas possuem um mesmo tipo Na lista de componentes nivel sfandard apenas um registro aparecera No modulo de Layout apenas um simbolo estara disponivel A diferen a entre bornes multi camadas e normais que o primeiro precisa de textos adicionais para identificar o n mero da camada e seu nome assim como um separador entre o n mero do borne e o nome da camada Propriedades do Componente Propriedades Componente po W Tipo Separador de Nivel Ea Nome do Nivel Gi Ordenar Nivel 1 N mero do Conector E N mero de Ordena o 9 Simbolo Plano Gr fico M 5 4 TOMADAS Tomadas necessitam de textos espec ficos Na cria o de uma tomada os textos de Nome do componente Descri o Tipo Nome do terminal e Id do terminal Ordenado s o gerados automaticamente P gina 86 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O Nome do terminal cont m o nome do terminal definido pelo fabricante A Id do terminal Ordenado determina a sequ ncia na qual os terminais ser o adicionados automaticamente ao esquema el trico Se voc quiser um nome diferente do sugerido automaticam
289. mation exists the individual items are arranged in the order in which they are inserted into the diagram lf wire numbers are defined in the circuit diagram they will appear on the wires inthe assembly list as well Example Fa 2k4asd Pra ject Drowing no Rev Init IGEXAO y wre dL Dote Page 01 10 2009 la MM Introdu o P gina 295 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados chao IF Connection text kz kaa Component from diagram The page template controls the distance the orientation and the layout of the generated graphical list P gina 296 MM Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados MM 7 GENERATING A TEMPLATE FOR THE PRODUCT ASSEMBLY LIST Besides the ordinary placeholder texts in the page template the following special placeholder texts are necessary Start reference ID 180174 Target Name ID 180171 Placing distance 1D 180172 fe SO show graphic graphical offset 5 Placing order ID 180173 Signal Name lD 180170 Cx E Graphical visibility ID 180178 Connection text 1D 180169 defines height of the symbol rectgngle Graphical offset 1D 180177 Graphical symbol ID 180180 Signal line ID 180175 You find all the different text attributes in the Other area in the text attributes list Add a text with the attribut
290. mber 1 Mechorhont number 2 Mectorfont ber 3 Asia na AaBbCcDdEeFfGg Mechorhont number 5 W ectortont number 6 Mectortont number 7 Script Mectortont number 3 Cyrilic Blackadder ITC Bodoni MT Bodoni MT Black Bodoni MT Condensed Book Antiqua Bookman Old Style Bookshelf Symbol 7 Al Bradley Hand ITC UR Cancel The Load texts button allows you to load texts from the current workspace into the translation database The Show only source texts that exist in project button allows you to concentrate on the texts currently necessary Clicking on the Component text filter button opens a window in which you can set the texts to be translated or not selecting them by their IDs Attention The Edit Text Edit Text command shows texts always in the source language If the translatable text must be changed change the source text if it is incorrect or change the text in the target language in the translation database Then run the translation process again EE Introdu o Pagina 251 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 8 1 DISPLAYING SEVERAL TRANSLATIONS AT THE SAME TIME all levels and Viewer It is possible v To show different translations in one line in different lines If you wish to display them in one line you can choose a separator in the respective field Languages can be moved to the desired position inthe L
291. mento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados F 4 TEXTOS Exerc cio 6 10 poss vel inserir coment rios em uma p gina Insira os textos Controle do motor 1 e Controle do motor 2 na p gina 2 Be s Controle do motor 1 Lantrale do mator 2 o o 102 104 o Be yio x3 x 252 EN 253 FA OS Pi a E nf 43 43 43 1 CA Desenhar 2 CO Novo Texto painel Elementos Voce tambem pode clicar no icone Al o cone Ei permite a cria o de um novo texto enquanto cone Al permite a edi o de textos existentes F Introdu o P gina 55 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Pesquisar qualquer parte do texto BO de Tradu o Propriedades Propriedades B sicas Atributo Testonomal Fonte N mero fonte vetorial 1 atua 350 Dit ncia 070 Anglo 000 Largura 250 J Dist ncia da Linha Exibir propriedades avan adas esac ectrical 3 Movimente o cursor para o campo Texto 4 Controle do motor 1 Digite o texto 5 gt Clique na caixa de verifica o Exibir propriedades avan adas e selecione os atributos de texto necess rios como tamanho cor e alinhamento a esquerda centralizado direita Exibir propriedades avan adas Propriedades Avan adas Al Proporcional Esq Justificado Sublinhado Traduzivel Centro Justificado Sobre Linha t tico C Dir Justificado Quadro Pr prio para
292. mmand P gina 164 V Introdu o gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados v Insert symbols directly from the Component Explorer If the channel definition is correct the symbols to be used in the Circuit diagram module are visible in the Component Explorer and can be dragged into the drawing usilar Contactors y A 201080 Tia Note If you add a new type in the Type Database you need to refresh the Component Explorer view to be able to access the new type in the Component Explorer To refresh the view click the s icon V Introdu o P gina 165 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados V 4 IMPORTING AND EXPORTING ARTICLE MASTER DATA You can receive article master data from the component manufacturer or from another source and use it SEE Electrical offers the possibility to import data with ECAD or Excel format in the type database You can find both functions inthe Type Database Manager window in the Import Export menu Here you are also given the opportunity to import types from a XML spreadsheet file for example created with a Microsoft Excel application However a XML file may be generated from many other external programs As well exporting types to a XML spreadsheet is possible The XML spreadsheet represents an ASCII formatted text file presenting the d
293. move the components on another rail Exercise 40 11 Create index It is possible to insert an index table into the cabinet drawing The index is created with the help of user defined templates The templates are located in the IndexTableSymb ses symbol library by default If you activate the command ona page that has components on it SEE Electrical offers all templates that are present a Symbol browser a x Symbols as Filter EE x El 62 IndexT ablesSymb H O 1 Column Tables EE 2 Colums Tables cen gy Example 2Columne SLines IndexT able 2C 5L B2T vee w IndesT able Columns 10Lines Gg IndexT able 2Columne SLines Mo lines 5 5 8 Columns 45 ES tor to pe 14 THAD SIG OO TO H E 3 Column Tables OK cancel Make your choice in the Symbol browser and click OK The Index table is generated and you have to insert it with the cursor lf the number of components exceeds the number of the places available in the template an error message appears Delete the index and choose another template The index can be deleted like any other object If an index is already present in the drawing the Index components command updates the existing index The component name is replaced by the ordinal number from the index The component name is still present in the component but it is automatically hidden In the Cabinet Properties there is a setting that allows you to define if each terminal is show
294. mprimir O Visualizar impress o Exerc cio 8 2 Visualizar impress o 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Imprimir Visualizar impress o A visualiza o da impress o da p gina ativa ser aberia ua Tuna SEE Electrical Meu Projeto 0002 ni a Origem Geral Editar visualizar Desenhar Fun es Diagrama El trico Legendas e Detalhes Estilo 7 7 i EE Mowa Ca Excluir Jal Anterior Projeto T M dulo Er Projeto El Componentes E visualizar ES Abrir ER Fechar Col Pr xima ey Pagina faa Pagina a Simbolos EE Comandos ZT Propriedades P gina Informa o Propriedades visualizar 4 6 MeuProjeto 0002 Lennie do rar 1 kiire da olor Y Para ajuda pressionar Fl E MOM GCE 3 gt Clique no bot o para ampliar a visualiza o 4 gt Clique no bot o Fechar para sair do modo de visualiza o OU Tecle ESC Pagina 62 Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados J LISTAS DE BANCO DE DADOS Exerc cio 9 1 Visualizar as listas de banco de dados do projeto Clique na guia Projeto A estrutura em rvore do projeto ser aberta De acordo com o n vel basic standard ou advanced o n mero de listas dispon veis pode variar Banco de Dados o Documentos o Componentes eo Componentes Simplificado o Componentes Compras o Componentes Fun o ocaliza o o Componentes FAL Ordenados Y Conectores o Ca
295. n set the scaling factor The dimensioning scale must be changed Font size can be maintained Choose in Page Properties whether to work with a scale or not RR 1 1 WITH THE CABINETS MODULE Standard The following exercises illustrate the creation of a cabinet scaled 1 10 Exercise 40 1 Create a new page within the Cabinets module and load an appropriate page template Create the new page in the known way Select the Cabinets module in the Workspace Explorer The default page template for Cabinets loads The scale for drawing and the symbol scaling are 1 10 by default Pagina 368 RR Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 2 Draw a panel 800 x 1600 mm Logo Se Osby Pl In the Status bar to the right under the drawing area the dimensions are shown while drawing lines and rectangles Set a grid size at least 10x10 mm You can draw a Panel 1 CA Cabinet 2 CO Panel Elements panel 3 Select the starting point of the panel 4 Press the space bar 5 gt dX 6 800 7 gt dY 8 1600 RR Introdu o P gina 369 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 3 Draw a Cable Wire Channel with a width of 60 mm and a length of 800 mm 1 CA Cabinet 2 CO Cable Wire Channel Elements panel 3 gt Width 4H 60 D gt Length 6 800
296. n by double clicking on 0002 beneath Terminal Row Picture Plan inthe Workspace Explorer KK Introdu o Pagina 293 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados LL CABLE TERMINAL ROW PLAN Advanced The Cable Terminal Row Plan is a plan which allows you to generate various views of the cables and the terminals in the circuit diagram according to the selected template For further details on how to generate a page template for the Cable Terminal Row Plan please consult the Graphical Lists chapter of the Help files Pagina 294 LL Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados MM PRODUCT ASSEMBLY LIST Advanced This list gives a complete overview of the entire component by collecting all master and slaves information and presenting all information in one symbol The Product Assembly list is generated using the same symbols for the components as used in the circuit diagrams A rectangle is created automatically around the symbol For the components which consist of master and slave symbols like relays for example the master and slave symbols are grouped together ina common rectangle The sorting order inside this group depends on the sort order set in the channel definition for the assigned type Items not present in the diagram are also shown but with empty wiring information If no channel infor
297. n cannot be empty if one term is found twice inthe new source language the second entry will overwrite the first one or it will be refused Make sure to avoid both situations before you activate the command Within the translation database you can manage twenty one languages including the source language Exercise 29 1 Swap the languages in the translation database Make a backup copy of your existing translation database ranslationNew MDB inthe Templates folder of your SEE Electrical installation 1 CO SwapSourceLanguagelnT ranslationDatabase 2 Select the language that shall be the new source language in the Select language to be Source Language field 3 gt Type the language name of the new source language Make sure to use a name not already used as a language column If you have to use an already existing name it will be used only in case it does not contain entries If it contains entries an error message will appear and you will have to delete the entries before you could use the language If you use the name of an existing column a new column Language New will be generated in order to keep the amount of twenty one languages in the language database In case you have duplicated or empty entries in the new source language a list of these entries appears A Swap TranslationSourceL anguage log file is created in the Templates folder that contains the list of entries EE Introdu o P gina 255 Manual de trein
298. n dialogue Click again the Work on Open drawings or the Work on All drawings buttons as desired 6 CA Functions 7 CO Types 8 CO Clear Old Properties You must now delete the information about the modifications of the component types Once a component type has been changed in the circuit diagram the component is marked internally If you have already checked the components with modified types you need to delete the internal marking using the Clear Old Properties command After its execution a report file appears in the Projects directory with the name lt Project name gt _TYPE and the TXT extension In our example the created file is My Workspace_ Type TXT Pagina 386 RR Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 40 23 Create another project similar to your training workspace Copy the cabinet drawing into this project from your training workspace 1 CA Cabinet 2 CO Components Comparison Functions panel 3 gt Rename surplus components 4 gt Work on Open drawings Click the Work on Open drawings or the Work on All drawings button to define the pages which will be processed Components that exist both in the Circuit diagrams and the Cabinet with the same database type but with different names are updated RR Introdu o P gina 387 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reserv
299. n for selection lt Value1 gt lt relational operator gt lt Value2 gt this can be the component name field code 160010 The values must be defined in the following format lt table name gt field name Example SELECT FROM Export 3010A Export 3011 WHERE Export 3010A Name Export 3011 160010 Syntax of ON clause lt table 1 in Access database gt LEFT JOIN lt table 2 in Access database gt ON lt Condition for assignment gt Condition for assignment lt Value1 gt lt Value2 gt It defines which values from both tables must match in order to join the data In this example it is the component name field code 160010 The values must be defined in the lt table name gt field name format Example SELECT FROM Cable001 LEFT JOIN Export_3031 ON Cable001 160010 Export_3031 160010 The ON clause may include several fields The fields must be linked by using logical operators Pagina 362 QQ Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example SELECT FROM Export 3103 LEFT JOIN Export 3010 ON Export 3103 140050 Export 3010 140050 AND Export 3103 160010 Export 3010 160010 QQ 6 1 d ORDER BY This clause allows sorting the list Syntax ORDER BY lt value gt Value The value must be defined in the following format lt table name gt lt field name gt Example SELECT FROM Export_3100 ORDER BY Export_3100 12000007 Multi
300. n in the index table or only one entry for the whole strip Creation of templates for indexes The template is created using geometry and specific texts Lines lt Number of lines gt lt Distance between lines gt This value sets number of lines and distance between lines as well as Top to Bottom or Bottom to Top direction of the drawing negative distance gt Bottom to Top The text has to have the attribute Normal It can be placed at any position in the template Examples Lines 30 4 or Lines 30 4 Pagina 376 RR Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Columns lt Number of columns gt lt Distance between columns gt This value is only necessary if you want to use more than one column The text has to have the attribute Normal It can be placed at any position in the template Examples Columns 2 36 8Start lt formatting attribute for ordinal number gt The text has to have the attribute Normal The 2d formatting attribute formats the ordinal number with minimum two digits for ex 01 02 10 99 100 Add texts with the text attribute Normal and with the component IDs you want to be displayed 160010 component name or terminal name separator number 140020 component function 140050 component location Add geometry You have to put the lines for the single cells that contain the index information on layers 450
301. nd Edit Actions Delete commands It is important that there is nothing on the current page You can disintegrate the existing standard sheet into its single parts later via the Edit Actions Delete command right click and execute the Explode pop up command if you with to edit it and create a new standard sheet Exercise 14 2 Change the properties of your new standard sheet as desired Define the number of columns in the drawing too A standard sheet for circuit diagrams is usually drawn in the A3 or A4 format For cabinet drawings you will need a standard sheet ona scale 1 1 IP Select the page in the workspace tree that you are editing now 2 Right click 3 CO Select the Properties pop up command The Properties window appears in the right pane of the main SEE Electrical window displaying the properties of the current page 4 gt X Extension of Page Type in the new page size in the X Extension of Page field 5 lt new size gt 6 gt Y Extension of drawing Enter the new Y extension of Page 1 lt new size gt Look at the other settings in the dialogue box position for the first top potential etc Change other properties as desired The position for the first top potential must be high enough but within the section defined in the standard sheet The definition of sections is described below 8 gt Press the Enter key to validate the new settings for each of the modified properties The proper
302. nd define a type for the relay coil K2 1 Double click the relay coil F Amnnnar hm Component Properties Value Product k2 os Type iM Show Component Information i Show Connection Information Show Slave Information You can fillin the type in the Type field using the keyboard or you can select the type from the type database 2 gt Click BEL The Type Database Browser window opens 3 gt Open the Training manufacturer 4 gt Select the Type 1 by clicking the field on the left of it Type Al Type 1 5 gt Click the Select button The type is selected and appears in the right pane of the window 6 gt Close the Type Database Browser window by clicking on the Lx 7 gt OK Close the Component Properties dialogue box The contact mirror appears Exercise 18 8 Assign a type to coil K3 You can filter in the type database 1 4 Double click the K3 coil 2 gt Click in the Type field T Introdu o P gina 147 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 3 gt Filter Database Filter STB ES x 4 8 STB Click the EE iconto confirm All the types containing 3TB in their name are displayed Please use types that provide a suitable number of contacis 5 gt Select a type by double clicking in the field left to the
303. ndos que permitem editar e deslocar lembretes Comandos convencionais n o podem ser usados pois os lembretes tamb m est o dispon veis no visualizador do software 1 CA Legendas e Detalhes 2 CO Editar texto painel Editar legendas 3 Clique no texto do lembrete para selecion lo A janela Texto aparecer Voc poder editar o texto H Introdu o P gina 59 Manual de treinamento electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 5 CA 6 CO 7 CO 8 9 Clique no bot o para aplicar as mudan as Legendas e Detalhes Selecionar painel Selecionar legendas Mover painel Editar legendas Clique no lembrete que voc deseja deslocar Clique para definir a nova posi o do lembrete Exerc cio 7 3 Selecionar e apagar o lembrete inserido anteriormente poss vel selecionar e apagar lembretes Comandos convencionais n o podem ser usados pois os lembretes tamb m est o dispon veis no visualizador do software 1 CA 2 CO 3 4 4 CA 5 CO Pagina 60 Legendas e Detalhes Selecionar painel Selecionar fel A apar6encia do cursor sera esta Clique no lembrete para selecion lo Voc pode selecionar v rios lembretes ao manter pressionadas as teclas CTRL ou SHIFT durante a sele o Legendas e Detalhes Apagar legendas painel Selecionar legendas As legendas ser o apagadas Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para cancelar a fun o H Introdu o ad e ectrica
304. new symbol folder 6 CA General 7 CO Normal Select panel 8 Select all the components of the power supply using a frame Two ways exist for selecting part of the drawing lf you wish to process only elements that are located entirely within the area move the cursor from left to right The cursor graphic becomes 2 lf you wish to process all objects that are even partly included in the area move the cursor from the right to the left The cursor graphic becomes Ro Select the components in the desired way 9 Drag the selected symbols into the newly created Power supplies folder Hold down the left mouse button while dragging the symbol Component Properties Name 0K Cancel 10 gt Name 11 4 Power supply 1 Type the group s name N Introdu o Pagina 105 see electrical Manual de treinamento 12 gt Exercise 13 2b COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados OK The group has been stored in the symbol database For example if you delete page 3 in your project using the General Select O All and Home Page Delete commands you can insert the group you have just stored Afterwards the switchgear can be selected and deleted separately The group can be manipulated as a whole only if all the elements are selected within a frame beforehand Now save the group as a component group Before saving you must block th
305. nformation entered in the Page information window for each page If the applied norm sheet contains appropriate text placeholders then the texis are displayed in the circuit diagrams too Dia Bla Microsoft Excel 0X a Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Data Review View KFI E C D G H 1 JTEXTID escritor Info only Description to use on page 2 oag OT too TT o 12002 ndex o 1 4 120050 Page Created Date EMT a e teses 5 f2005iPageRev Date po S o e 6 120060 Page Created B gt 7 ___ 120100 Page Description line 01 ADA 8 120110 Page Description line 02 N 9 _ 120120 Page Description line 03 rr e ey E 10 120130 Page Descri Hion line 04 11 120140 Page Descri E E E A 12 120150 Page Descripiondineos O Io po 13 120160 Page Descri Es ES 14 120170 Page Descri De O eee ees 15 120180 ge Descri O O ns 16 120190 P scri E Ps CE 17 _ 140020 F or A E A 18 140050 L o IS Ho 4 CE Symbols A eee Page g Selections alias s Ea Ready Do not change the TEXTID column in any case PP Introdu o P gina 315 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 4 3 SELECT SYMBOL SYMBOLS Specify the groups to be used in the current project Specify also whether you want to insert special texts for example in the component names and also a description or a type You can do this if appropriate text place
306. ng Graphics Associated with Each Terminal II 2 2 DESENHANDO CABOS as a Grouping of Cable Cores 1 2 3 DESENHANDO CABOS Geometry on Both Sides of the Terminals 1 2 4 Showing that Cable Cores are Used on Previous Next Page 1 2 5 Symbols for a Terminal Plan JJ CONNECTOR MATRIX AND PLAN JJ 1 GENERATING A CONNECTOR MATRIX JJ 2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A CONNECTOR MATRIX JJ 3 DRAW MORE THAN ONE CONNECTOR PER PAGE JJ 4 CONNECTOR PLAN KK TERMINAL ROW PICTURE PLAN KK 1 GENERATING A TERMINAL ROW PICTURE PLAN LL CABLE TERMINAL ROW PLAN MM PRODUCT ASSEMBLY LIST MM 1 GENERATING A TEMPLATE FOR THE PRODUCT ASSEMBLY LIST NN MULTICORES NN 1 USING MULTICORES OO INSERTING COMPONENTS NOT IN THE DRAWING VIA THE DATABASE EDITORS 00 1 EDITOR FOR COMPONENTS WITHOUT GRAPHICS OO 2 INSERTING SPARE OR GROUND TERMINALS VIA THE TERMINAL EDITOR 00 2 1 Handling Cables Without Graphics 00 3 INSERTING SYMBOLS FOR COMPONENTS WITHOUT GRAPHICS IN THE DIAGRAM PICK LIST PP AUTO DIAGRAM PP 1 INTRODUCTION PP 2 CREATING SYMBOLS GROUPS PP 3 PAGE TEMPLATES PP 4 EXCEL SPREADSHEET PP 4 1 Project Data Projectinfo PP 4 2 Page Data Pagelnfo PP 4 3 Select Symbol Symbols PP 4 4 Defining Alias Names PPS AUTOMATIC GENERATION OF CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS PPA The Autodiagram Command QQ LISTS AND LABELS EDITOR QQ 1 CREATING LABEL TEMPLATES QQ 1 1 Files for Label Templates QQ 1 2 Changing Label Templates 00 1 5 Printing Labels QQ 2 CREA
307. ng style menu Pagina 388 SS Introducao as selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados SS 2 REORGANIZE WORKSPACES All data in SEE Electrical is saved as Windows Compound Files within a Microsoft Access database Occasionally data within the database is out of synchronization with the content of the drawings The Regenerate Database functionality refreshes the contents of the Microsoft Access database 1 Opena page from the workspace 2 File O Regenerate Database 3 dialogue box appears asking you if you want to update the database from the pages and then store your project or if you want to update the pages from the database Yes Cross references are updated automatically from the database Entries in the database lists are created automatically too If you establish that errors have occurred i e automatically created entries do not correspond to the information in the drawing the database has to be regenerated The workspace will be automatically saved afterwards No If you have changed something via a database editor and your modifications do not appear automatically in the drawing then the drawings must be updated from the database Cancel Aborts the process SS Introducao Pagina 389 Zaa ce ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados TT SETTINGS TT 1 SYSTEM SETTINGS The system set
308. nhas que estejam curtas 1 CO Extender Ative o comando a partir do painel Editar Alterar elemento 2 Clique no extremo da reta a ser prolongada 3 Clique no outro extremo da reta para fazer o prolongamento Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para cancelar a fun o Exerc cio 12 13 Desenhar o detector de fuma a qu a Desenhe as flechas com ngulo de zero graus Desta forma elas podem ser desenhadas simetricamente Use o comando Editar A es Rotacionar para girar os elementos Para girar as flechas 1 Selecione a parte grafica da flecha 2 CO Rotacionar Ative a fun o a partir do painel Editar A es 3 Defina o ponto que ser o centro de rota o 4 Defina o eixo de rota o eid 5 Movimente o cursor Os elementos ser o rotacionados 6 Posicione os elementos selecionados no ngulo desejado P gina 82 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 4 CRIANDO COMPONENTES A PARTIR DE OUTROS Exerc cio 12 14 Criar um novo s mbolo de l mpada com sinaliza o usando o s mbolo de bot o NA com retardo ao abrir a partir da pasta Switchgear one pole e o s mbolo de l mpada a partir da pasta Lamps e 2O SAQ 1 Insira os s mbolos necess rios a partir da biblioteca Desagrupar o primeiro s mbolo 2 Selecione o s mbolo 3 Clique com o bot o direito do
309. nt Page Function Page Location Product Page Index Page Created Date Page Circuit diagrams EN Circuit diagrams EN r 22 10 00 0 1 Shelly L h o o e Set Filter On gt Kind of Document Document list piada 4 Produ 1 03 04 2013 5 Termi Set Filter On gt Kind of Document 1 03 04 2012 5 Termi 2 03 04 2013 a sort ascending on row gt Kind of Document T Termi 3 03 04 2013 a n Cable al Sort descending on row gt Kind of Document 1 03 04 2013 9 Cable EEE 1 03 04 2013 I0 Wires i a 1 03 04 2013 Co Wires toad Filter Sort from File 2 03 04 2013 12 Wires eon 3 03 04 2013 13 Wiring ee nee 1 03 04 2013 da Wiring E DE gt 03 04 2013 15 Paris 1 03 04 2013 16 Termi Go to the Page 1 03 04 2013 17 Termi J 03 04 2013 Change page template 18 Termi 3 03 04 2013 Select the pages you want to change the template for Right click and select the Change page template pop up command If you have selected only one document a message appears asking you if you want to clear the entire page or if you want to change only the template P gina 236 DD Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados If you have selected multiple documents a message appears asking you if you want to clear the drawing or change the template only onthe active page or on all of the selected pages If you work wit
310. nt Spare or Spare 1 lf a text with content Spare 0 is found no spare cores are added to the cable plan Y 4 CABLE PLAN WITH SHIELD INFORMATION FOR CABLES If you use user created cable symbols for shields inside the circuit diagram you may want to show these symbols in the graphical cable plan as well This is possible with the following 3 steps ney 1 Circuit diagram Each cable for the circuit diagram needs to contain one symbol with a component text with the Cable Shiela attribute This means you have to add this text to your cable symbols and then redraw existing cables if you want to use cables with shield in your cable plans lt is recommended that you change the cable symbol which contains the shield change This coble symbol ESC pc AA E SD W1 W Y Introdu o P gina 203 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados ha Component Properties Properties Preview Value Show o if Hide Cable Dimension Name locked According setting Cable core No 2 7 Cable core Colour Cable core Size 0 00 Cable Shield C 0 MW Show Component Information M Show Connection Information M Show Slave Information Cancel The component text Cable Shiela can contain the following keywords S Name of the symbol folder in the Cables SES symbol library
311. ntrodu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Result CABE MRE BE Ti ee ae ee ee ee ee ee e 2 bo vcs Zoo cs ls a 7 7 Te i WEE R eE qo a Pee IO Ta o 1a 15 16 117 Moo G9 ATO Gago ATO GO Go oO i ya a ns an Up pu TRE JUTTI PE JUTT WT PE 2 1 TM E The rule is stored with the symbol you defined it for lf the Ignore numbering definition in symbols option inside the Signal setup dialogue Circuit diagrams Properties window Wires tab the numbering definition from the connection is ignored and is used the definition from the signal type Propagate potential line names Show potential names on cable cores Ignore numbering definition in symbols EE Introdu o Pagina 245 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 6 COPYING PAGES EE 6 1 COPY SINGLE PAGE IN THE SAME WORKSPACE If you select a page inthe Workspace Explorer and you right click with the mouse a pop up menu appears allowing you to copy the current page You can later paste it in the active workspace When the command is activated the Page information dialogue appears It contains all page information texts existing in the copied page Assign the new page number modify any page information and click OK Component names are either automatically adapted or you are asked to confirm their names if the Compon
312. o a partir da aba Projeto e ent o clique em Origem O P gina O Nova A caixa de di logo Informa o da p gina aparecer 3 gt Descri o da p gina linha 01 4 Diagrama de comando 5 gt P gina O n mero 2 sugerido automaticamente N o o modifique 6 gt Data de cria o da p gina A data atual ser mostrada nesta linha 7 gt Clique em OK para fechar a caixa de dialogo O SEE Electrical abrir uma nova pagina de esquema el trico Agora voc poder iniciar o desenho da segunda p gina de esquema el trico P gina 28 D Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados D 2 P GINA 2 Neste cap tulo voc desenhar os potenciais L1 e Ne inserir components e conex es Exerc cio 4 2 Desenhar o potencial L1 1 CA Diagrama El trico 2 CO Superior na barra Potencial 3 gt Componente 4H L1 Digite o nome do potencial 5 gt OK Feche a caixa de di logo A refer ncia cruzada com o mesmo potencial da p gina 1 aparecer automaticamente em seu lado esquerdo Exerc cio 4 3 Desenhar o potencial N Antes modificar o estilo e cor da pena Pontilhado e azul 1 A partir da barra Estilos presente na categoria Desenhar clique na seta do icone Selecione Pontilhado 2 Na barra Estilos da categoria Desenhar clique na seta do cone Fam Selecione Azul D Introdu o P gina 29
313. o do mouse 4 M Nova pasta 5 Bobina Digite o nome da nova pasta de s mbolos 6 CA Geral 7 CO Componente painel Selecionar elementos M Introdu o P gina 73 Sa aelectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 8 Selecione o s mbolo 9 Arraste o s mbolo para a nova pasta criada no banco de dados de s mbolos Mantenha pressionado o bot o esquerdo do mouse ao arrast lo Ao arrastar o s mbolo use a conex o superior esquerda como refer ncia Tal ponto ser usado como refer ncia ao inser lo no desenho Propriedades do Componente Home Descri o 10 gt Nome 11 Bobina Digite o nome e a descri o do s mbolo 12 gt Clique em OK O s mbolo ser salvo no banco de dados de s mbolos P gina 74 M Introdu o Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 2 MODIFICANDO S MBOLOS EXISTENTES M 2 1 APAGANDO ELEMENTOS Exerc cio 12 4 Desenhe um diodo Agrupe o s mbolo como Componente Utilize as fun es j conhecidas O diodo receber 4 conex es por conta dos extremos das linhas Exerc cio 12 5 Modificar o s mbolo do diodo Primeiramente desagrupe o Selecione o s mbolo Clique com o bot o direito do mouse Desagrupar Execute o commando a partir do menu suspenso Agora poss vel modificar individualmente as partes do component
314. o one page If not a new page is automatically created PP Introducao Pagina 311 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados P gina 312 Use the marker B Text gt Attribute gt Other Symbol Start Marker and E Text Attribute O Other Symbol End Marker Place appropriate texts select the Draw Elements New text command you will find the text attributes in the Attribute field under Other F Power Create a group Select the objects and execute the Edit Actions Block Block Macro Group command If the group includes relay coils do not select the contact mirrors or the contact crosses within the frame Save the groups in the symbol database which you use only for the automatic generation of Circuit diagrams select the group or the single objects and drag it into the symbol database drag the point of the group where the letter B is placed All of the groups that could be combined with each other must be saved in the same folder of the symbol database PP Introducao see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados PP 3 PAGE TEMPLATES You can use any page templates for circuit diagrams but there must be three columns in the template at least Through the Autodiagram function you must define the X and Y
315. o preenchidos automaticamente quando de sua gera o E Propriedades Nome Atributos Pagina Criada por Descri o da Pagina Descri o da Pagina Descri o da Pagina Descri o da Pagina Descri o da Pagina K 3 GERANDO TODAS AS LISTAS GR FICAS EM UM UNICO PASSO No SEE Electrical voc pode gerar todas as listas gr ficas em uma nica opera o Nos n veis Basic ou Standard do SEE Electrical voc precisar de formul rios espec ficos para a gera o de m ltiplas listas gr ficas em um nico passo No n vel Advanced do software h uma ferramenta espec fica dispon vel para a gera o das listas em um nico passo Para maiores detalhes quanto a isso consulte o cap tulo Criando formul rios para listas gr ficas P gina 68 K Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados L INSERINDO OUTROS DOCUMENTOS Voc pode inserir outros documentos no projeto como do Word ou planilhas do Excel Os tipos de documentos dispon veis depender o dos programas Windows instalados em seu computador que suportem a tecnologia ActiveX Quando voc quiser visualizar tal documento o respectivo programa ser aberto Exerc cio 11 1 Inserir um documento de outro aplicativo Windows que suporte a tecnologia ActiveX 1 Selecione Outros documentos a partir da arvore do projeto Diagrama E
316. o s mbolo antes 1 Selecione o s mbolo Se o s mbolo n o estiver dispon vel no desenho insira o a partir da biblioteca 2 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse 3 CO Desagrupar Execute o commando a partir do menu suspenso Pagina 78 M Introdu o 5 6 CA 7 CO 8 9 M 10 11 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Deslocar o nome do componente Para fazer isso utilize o recurso de Arrastar e Soltar Clique no texto mantenha o bot o esquerdo do mouse pressionado e desloque o para a posi o desejada Depois disso solte o bot o esquerdo do mouse Deslocar um texto de conex o Geral Parcial painel Selecionar elementos O s mbolo e o texto de conex o fazem parte de um conjunto Com a fun o Parcial poss vel selecionar o texto ou o s mbolo separadamente Selecione um texto de conex o Clique com o bot o direito do mouse e ative o comando Mover a partir do menu suspenso Defina o ponto de refer ncia para o deslocamento do texto de conex o Posicione o texto no local desejado Fa a o mesmo com os demais textos de conex o Agrupe o conte do como Componente novamente Exerc cio 12 9 Deslocar o nome do componente 1 CA 2 CO 3 4 M 5 6 Nao desagrupe o s mbolo Geral Parcial painel Selecionar elementos Selecione o nome do componente Clique com o bot o direito do mouse e acione o comando Mover
317. oe Symb amp gi Car P gina 188 X Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Create the symbols as follows Os a ee a Draw the graphics Select the graphics of the symbol Block to a symbol LINK Type 1 or LINK Type 2 or LINK Type 6 Drag the symbol into the symbol database Delete the graphics used for the symbol Pull the symbol out of the database and insert it After you have created and inserted all symbols A ee Select 6 symbols and the text for the bridge Block as Macro Group Move the symbol into the symbol database Delete the graphics Pull the symbol out of the database and insert it For each LINK Type you must create a text placeholder see the picture above for example bridge placeholders for P O and 1 If a LINK Type is not defined in the template then a LINK Type O is used lf a LINK Type P is not placed bridges identified via wires are not displayed In this case the target terminal is shown Here you cannot use all of the settings options available via the template For more details see chapter Graphical lists in the User Manual Exercise 22 3 1 CA General Save the template Select O All 2 CA Edit Actions Block Group the elements as Page Template Title block symbol 3 CO File Save as 0 Page Template Define a name for the template and save it Set the new term
318. ogue appears displaying your SQL query string Click OK to close it Click the Save query button to save your new defined SQL query give it a relevant name ex Product Amount and exit the SQL Builder Your query is added to the list in the Select Query Table dialogue window Select Query Table Mame Description GU Product Amount E cTestlds 1 Drawing Types ObjectT Pagina 272 HH Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Define now a new List Definition Database list in the Workspace Properties window and choose for query the one just created 4285 View Mutticore wires Export 3285 wf 4 Ff 4501 Product Amount by Description LU Product Amount oO Tick the check box in the Show column and click OK to save the changes Close the workspace When you re open it the new database list will be displayed in the Workspace Explorer User defined Database Lists must receive an ID number within the range 4501 4999 The number for user defined Graphical lists must be within the range from 3501 to 3999 In this new database list created with the user defined query described above all Descriptions 00 concerning the various items are listed and what is more all products with the same description are counted and their total number is displayed for each description
319. om o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de desenho 5 Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair da fun o P gina 70 M Introdu o 8 CA 10 CO 11 12 18 14 15 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Desenhar Linha painel Elementos Desenhe duas linhas de conex o acima e abaixo do ret ngulo Estas linhas devem ter 5 mm de comprimento O comprimento das linhas mostrado abaixo da area de desenho Clique o primeiro ponto da linha Clique o segundo ponto da linha Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para encerrar o desenho Depois disso desenhe a segunda linha Clique o primeiro ponto Clique o segundo ponto etc Clique com o bot o direito para finalizar o desenho da ltima linha Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de desenho Exerc cio 12 2 Agrupar o s mbolo A parte gr fica deve ser definida como s mbolo 1 CA 2 CO 3 4 5 6 M Geral Selecionar painel Selecionar elementos Clique para definir o ponto de onde a sele o come ar O ret ngulo deve englobar toda a parte gr fica do s mbolo Mantendo o bot o esquerdo do mouse pressionado abra o ret ngulo e solte o em seguida Clique com o bot o direito do mouse Selecione o comando Agrupar a partir do menu suspenso A caixa de di logo Defini o grupo componente aparecer M Introdu o P gina 71
320. om potenciais representados por fios Os s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada consistem da parte gr fica e textos de Componente e Refer ncia folha coluna caixa de di logo Texto Atributos Componente e um texto de conex o Nestes s mbolos h um texto de conex o que determina se um s mbolo de refer ncia cruzada deve ser reconhecido como origem texto de conex o 1 ou destino texto de conex o 0 As refer ncias cruzadas ser o geradas se houver um par de s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada com o mesmo nome onde um tenha o atributo de origem e o outro de destino Um s mbolo de origem sempre buscar o pr ximo destino com o mesmo nome na pr xima ou em qualquer outra p gina na sequ ncia Isso permite que as refer ncias cruzadas funcionem mesmo que uma p gina seja inserida ou removida Os s mbolos de destino fazem a busca em p ginas anteriores a atual M 5 6 S MBOLOS DE TEXTO DE INFORMA O S mbolos de texto de informa o permitem administrar os destinos em listas como as de bornes cabos cabos vias fia o multicondutores apenas no n vel advanced A designa o dos s mbolos de texto de informa o n o feita modificada automaticamente S mbolos de texto de informa o consistem da parte gr fica texto de Componente e s mbolo de conex o O texto de conex o deve ser apagado deforma que apenas o s mbolo de conex o permane a tecle F6 para ativar o comando Selecionar parcial e apagu
321. om the channel definition 441 U Introdu o P gina 157 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Thenyou can insert the addresses PLC description PLC comment The connection texis are displayed i Az 4 P gina 158 electrical Sheet Path Reference 4 5 4 5 Eos U Introdu o gga e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados U 4 BLACK BOXES U 4 1 ASSIGNING OF TYPES TO INTELLIGENT BLACK BOX SYMBOLS If a type is assigned to an intelligent black box the connection texts are filled from the channel definition as usual In this case you must draw the wires in the sort order the connection texts are defined in the channel definition to make sure the correct connection is attached to a wire Please choose intelligent black box when defining the channel information in type database U 4 2 CREATING A BLACK BOX FROM CHANNEL INFORMATION Symbols for Black boxes can be generated automatically if you define the necessary values in their channel definition If you use this way of generating black boxes a symbol of component type is generated and NOT an intelligent black box Connection 1 234 Fillin the appropriate number of connection texts in the Connection field separated by comma In the ID Circuit diagrams EN field select the desired symbo
322. om the list 16 Choose the XML file to take the mapping information from in the Set XML file to export tex field 17 Press the C n button to open and load the desired folder and then select the XML file 18 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button 19 Press the Replace projects text button to start the replacing process Exercise 29 5 Finding and changing all fonts used in a single or in several libraries 1 CO FontT oolReadS ymbol 2 Press the cai button within the Symbols area to define the libraries to scan for fonts 3 Press the x x button if you want to remove a library from the list 4 gt Define the XML file to write the font settings into in the Set XML file to export tex field 5 Press the button to open and load the desired folder and then type name of XML file 6 Close the folder window with the help of the Open button If you select an existing XML file a question appears asking you if you want to add the results of the new scan to this XML file or if you want to start again If you add the new results to the existing file you can benefit from the mappings already done and you will be sure that you use the same definitions for all your data 7 Press the Scan symbols text button to start the scanning process 8 CO FontT oolMapFont 9 Choose the first XML file with the results from the scanning of your data 10 Change the settings for New Font Name New Font Height
323. omatically adapted or you are asked to confirm their names if the Component Numbering is set to Free References are automatically updated R Introdu o P gina 137 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados S EASY EDITING IN DATABASE LISTS standard In SEE Electrical standard there are editors available in the Database lists You can change data via these Editors The changes are saved in the circuit diagrams Exercise 17 1 Make changes in the Product Editor 1 2 3 P gina 138 Select the row of the record you want to change for example the component Q1 The component information is displayed in the pane on the right In the right pane select the row you want to change for example Circuit breaker Text Value Product a2 Description OU Circuit breaker Type 3WE1010 Connection connection Connection Connection mon be wR Connection Connection Circuit breaker Type in the desired text Click the next component you want to change Look at the page of the circuit diagram where the changed components are located The modifications are visible If you have changed the way of automatic numbering of the components or you want to rename all the components and the Automatic numbering has been selected gt Circuit diagram properties General tab Component numbering you can rename them by executing the Renumber a
324. once in the root of the Commands Explorer and once in the selected group Electrical information about not connected connection points Information about contacts without component contactor This function enables you to check if the connection points of all components in the workspace are connected In addition the contacts not assigned to a contactor or to a component with auxiliary contacts can be displayed Exercise 43 1 Call a function from the Command Bar 1 Click with the cursor within the Command Bar 2 gt ETINFO Double click the command in the list to execute it Electrical Information Function Location Name Conn Page Function Page Index Cell Show not connected connectionpoints Show slaves without a master Show reference without target 3 gt Show not connected connection points Click the button corresponding to the desired function such as Show not connected connection points in the example above UU Introdu o P gina 403 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 Click OK to close the dialogue Delete elements outside drawing bounds lt can occur that an element is inserted outside the current drawing area for example by mistake while dragging Then you will see that nothing is shown about a component in the Producis list Exercis
325. ontacis List of PLC List of wires List of potentials List of paris List of spare paris List of paris simple List of spareparts simple Combination of list of terminals and list of wires List of products without components from Cabinets and less columns Terminal list with x y coordinates and type List of cable wires with x y coordinates List of Aspect Functions List of Aspect Locations Multicores Multicores wires List of products without Cabinets with type ld Type Information QQ Introdu o ea e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 6 STATEMENT SUMMARY AND COMMANDS IN LISTS AND LABELS QQ 6 1 SQL STATEMENTS QQ 6 1 a SELECT The SELECT statement selects data from a database Syntax SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt table in Access database gt Fields The fields might be explicitly defined under the form lt table name containing the field gt lt field name gt If you know the right field name you can type it directly behind the dot operator The field codes must be placed between square brackets and J Multiple fields can be separated with commas Select all of the fields in the table using an asterisk Examples SELECT ComponentTypes Device ComponentTypes Location or SELECT Export_3001 180015 Export_3001 180018 or SELECT Table in Access database You can type the name of one or more tables where the data comes from
326. operties Circuit Diagrams Properties Ed General i Reference iss Coil i Wires ale Cables Page Template Circuit diagrams EN 0 9 Logo Component Numbering PageCodePath Terminal Separator Separator Between Strip and Number PLE PLC Address Numbering Method Connections Connection Points Node Size Cancel Here you can choose the page template the component numbering method and the text parameters for the cross references creation Under SEE Electrical standard you can set to display cross references for relay coils in contact cross or contact mirror and whether to show wire numbers in the drawing or not You can choose which format for the cross reference will be used The circuit diagram properties can be changed at any time for example if another page template must be used for some projects The page template will be used then for creating a new page It is not recommended to change the setting of the component numbering during the project processing because the components numbered before making the change keep their old numbers unless they are renumbered The modification of the Component numbering property must be made before drawing the circuit diagrams Pagina 392 TT Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados TT 4 PAGE PROPERTIES The page properties apply to a page of the project The page proper
327. ores than available according to the assigned database type You will receive an error message Look in the Cable editor to see which cable has too many cores 1 Open the Cable editor 2 Right click 3 Select the Check cables pop up command Pagina 154 U Introducao gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados U 2 MANAGEMENT OF CONNECTORS The Pin Numbers property allows you to define the pin numbers present in a connector ka Connector pins x Properties Connector Female 4 Number of Pins 4 Pin Hame If the pin numbers are defined correctly SEE Electrical suggests automatically the pin name and controls the overbooking if there is an overbooking an error message appears The pins can get names such as 1 2 3 or 1A 1Z 1a 1z 2A 2Z etc The Pin Id has to be a numerical value The sort order of the pins have to follow the sort order of the pins in the connector The pins have specific sort order in the connector determined by the manufacturer or by the way the pins have to be connected to the cable Start with the pin in the middle and go to the ones in the outer parts If the Pin Id has been determined in the correct order the pin names are suggested in the right sort order at the insertion of the connector in the circuit diagram When the pin numbers are defined in the type SEE Electrical controls that no pin is used twice an
328. oria O Z o gt S CO Sele o de um comando S M O Sele o apartir de um menu suspenso _ _ p Sele o de um elemento com o cursor o o Entradapeloteciado S O o gt Sele o de campo em uma janela Digita o de texto ou sele o de um elemento Sele o de aba E Sele o de cone na barra de ferramentas A Introdu o P gina 11 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados A 1 PROJETO Um projeto do SEE Electrical nornalmente cont m diagramas el tricos As listas gr ficas s o geradas automaticamente usando as informa es dos diagramas Seguem alguns exemplos Lista de componentes Lista de bornes Lista de CLP Lista de fia o Lista de cabos Lista de documentos etc LNNNN S Os dados do projeto s o usados para gera o da lista gr fica de bornes assim como a r gua de bornes no nivel Standard de cabos e componentes Voc tamb m pode criar desenhos de paineis O SEE Electrical cont m diferentes m dulos que disponibilizam fun es para o desenho de diagramas el tricos instala es prediais ou layout A disponibilidade do modulo apropriado permitir a voc a execu o dos exemplos a seguir Outros documentos podem ser adicionados nos projetos a partir de Outros documentos e podem incluir por exemplo documentos do Word ou planilhas do Excel Por padr o tr s abas aparecer o ao iniciar o SE
329. ou the number the page will receive after copying You can later change that number if desired EE Introdu o Pagina 247 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 6 3 COPY MULTIPLE PAGES BETWEEN DIFFERENT WORKSPACES In the Commands explorer the CopyP command allows you to copy pages from one workspace to another The target workspace has to be closed before executing the command Copy pages x Source workspace Target workspace Electiical projects E xample 1 sep C Programme ge xao SEE Elect Circuit diagrams EN L amp 0001 ep Circuit diagrams IEEE A Installations Ap Cabinets n Synopsis E Project cover sheet New Funckon Hew Location wh alo wy Single line diagram Start Page 2 Start to copy pagel Close Execute the command Define the source workspace Define the target workspace The pages that exist in the target workspace are marked with a lock UM 4 Insert a value in the Start Page field and if necessary information in the New Function and New Location fields You have to make sure that the pages you want to copy do not exist in the target workspace In this case an error message appears The selected pages will be inserted in a temporary target workspace the number of the first new page will be the one you defined the numbers of the other new pages will
330. ou are going to work with function and location in your new workspace 1 Click the workspace name in the Workspace Explorer 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Properties The Workspace Properties window appears 4 gt Use Function Location management Tick the option The Group pages according to function option is automatically activated Leave it ticked 5 gt Choose the linetype to use for the function location box 6 gt OK lf you have chosen to Group pages according to function you must change the settings for the generation of cross refereneces as in this case you might have duplicated page numbers so the function must be included in cross reference too 7 Click Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer 8 Right click with the mouse 9 Openthe Refrences tab Circuit diagrams EN Properties m Eb General Reference z5 Coil 5 Wires x Cables General Reference Format Page Reference Format W Show Function i Show Function Show Location Show Location i Show index page Eq Prefix i l Separator Location Page W Show index page Show other Function Location only iM Show prior next page in other Function Separator Page Cell Custom format Custom format Use custom reference formal Use custom reference format Define Define 10 Enable the Show Function option 11 OK P gina 216 AA Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os dir
331. ou direita T Clique no texto que necessita modificar Controle do motor 2 para Motor 2 A caixa de di logo Texto permanecer aberta 8 Movimente o cursor para o campo Texto novamente 9 Modifique o texto existente 10 gt Clique no bot o para fechar a caixa de di logo Texto F Introdu o P gina 57 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados G HIPERLIGA ES G 1 ADMINISTRANDO HYPERLIGA ES Os comandos a seguir permitem administrar hiperliga es endere os da web ou arquivos em diferentes p ginas do projeto Voc pode adicionar uma hyperliga o a cada objeto presente nos desenhos do SEE Electrical E poss vel visualizar quais objetos possuem uma hiperliga o por meio do comando Hiperliga o a partir da categoria Editar Se voc adicionar uma hiperliga o a um s mbolo o link ser armazenado na biblioteca juntamente com ele Todos os arquivos de imagem BMP JPG TIFF etc arquivos PDF ou do MS Office podem ser vinculados com um objeto Ative o comando Definir e cole o link do seu navegador caso seja um endere o da web ou o caminho para um arquivo que voc queira vincular com o objeto Voc pode usar o comando Definir caso queira modificar a hiperliga o Clique em uma hiperliga o e ative o comando Abrir para abrir um link Caso queira apagar uma hiperliga o clique e ative o comando Excluir P gina 58 G Introdu
332. ou want to use the same cable every time you can type inthe name of the desired cable inthe Cable name used as default alternative for selection field Cable name used as default alternative to selection Shielded Cable Example M Introdu o P gina 99 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados M 7 INFORMATION ABOUT COMPONENT INSERTION Components can be inserted from the symbol database into the drawing by left clicking with the mouse to select the desired component and dragging it into the drawing the left mouse button should not be pressed The component is attached to the mouse and can be placed in the drawing M 7 1 a RELAY COILS If a relay coil is placed a contact cross appears beneath the component The contact cross can be moved independently if needed M 7 1 b TERMINALS Terminals are named automatically using incrementing numbers after they have been inserted Terminals are sorted using an assigned index The index is usually defined automatically You can change the index as you insert the terminal or afterwards in the Component Properties dialogue For example the index allows inserting PE terminals in the appropriate place M 7 1 c ASSIGNING A COMPONENT NAME You can define the method of assigning component names in the Circuit Diagrams Properties dialogue Right click the Circuit Diagrams module in the Workspace Explorer and select the Properti
333. page such as page size position of the first top potential position of the first bottom potential grid etc Templates for graphical lists You can create your own templates for graphical lists In addition to the graphics of the norm page you can define which records from a database list must be recorded into the graphical list Before creating the graphical list you can choose the template to be used Select the respective graphical list in the Workspace Explorer right click and execute the Properties pop up command Select the new template and close the dialogue box by clicking OK Now the new template will be used if you create the graphical list The template chosen for each graphical list is saved in the workspace template The templates for graphical lists have to be set before storing the workspace template They are used by default for creating the relevant graphical list O Introdu o P gina 109 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O 1 CREATING A STANDARD SHEET Standard sheets are created user specific This chapter will give you general information on how to create a standard sheet Exercise 14 1 Switch to an empty page of the workspace there must be nothing in it except the standard sheet Delete the existing standard sheet using the Edit Select All a
334. plate texis Target Left and Number of cable core lines d 180114 Each cable shield symbol has to fit into the space given by this distance P gina 206 Y Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Z WIRING LISTS standard The WiringList command allows you to generate a wiring list in Excel or Text ASCII format Term definitions In the wiring list the targets for each wire are inserted The wiring list groups all targets which are on the same potential Each wire has properties wire number wire colour wire section wire type signal and potential If several wires are on the same potential the wires are grouped with the same wire properties In this case you can speak of a network If the Potentials first option is active then in the listing of targets the potential is always first if it exists The wire direction is taken into account when the wiring list is created but no distinction is made between the start point and the end point of the wiring Example In the wiring list the elements of the first network can appear either in the order F1 2 F2 L1 F3 L1 or in the order F3 L1 F2 L1 F1 2 In some cases two or more networks may appear even though there is only one network Z Introdu o P gina 207 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example The
335. ple sorting criteria are separated with commas QQ 6 1 e WHERE WHERE NOT The WHERE clause can be used for joining two tables WHERE and WHERE NOT can also be used for filtering Join two tables See JOIN clause Filtering Some examples for using the WHERE clause Perform filtering of articles for one particular manufacturer from the parts list Syntax WHERE lt value1 gt lt relational operator gt lt value2 gt Value 1 The values must be defined in the lt table name gt field name format Relational operators lt gt allowed Logical operators and or not Value2 The values must be defined under a lt text gt form Example SELECT FROM Export_3100 WHERE Export 3100 1200007 Siemens QQ Introdu o P gina 363 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Print labels only for components with specified name value Syntax WHERE Instr lt Field gt value Field The field from the project database must be defined in the following format lt table name gt field name Value Enter text for the field value Logical operators and or and not Examples 1 Only records with defined values component name K or S must be selected SELECT FROM Export_3010 WHERE Instr Export_3010 160010 K OR Instr Export_3010 160010 S 2 Select only records with the defined values component name without M or Q SELECT
336. ponent name and print on two lines althougha line break is not possible within one word Line break is possible only where a Blank character is If Len F_160010 gt 3 Left F_160010 3 Right F_160010 4 F 160010 QQ 6 2 g RELATIONAL OPERATORS The operators lt gt lt gt are available The expression Contains is available too Example for Contains lf Contains F ObjectType 19102 Cable channel Rail This expression defines for object type 19102 print the text Cable channel otherwise print the text Rail QQ Introdu o P gina 367 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados RR CABINET LAYOUT You can construct a Cabinet Layout as a part of the circuit diagram It is possible to use symbols there too Functions for dimensioning are provided with all levels of SEE Electrical RR 1 DRAWING CABINET LAYOUTS Cabinet layouts can be created 1 1 or using a scale Drawing in 1 1 is convenient because you do not have to change the dimensioning scale symbols for components are drawn directly 1 1 and they can be used again afterwards The font size must be adapted You need a page template with a standard sheet where the cabinet layout fits 1 1 Change the dimensions in Page Properties Working with a scale is convenient because you can use the A3 standard sheet later The symbols must be created in another page using the 1 1 scaling For symbols insertio
337. r example the Free Text 01 field appears in the list of products only if at least one component in the current project contains a text with such attribute If a desired field is not available for a data line you must choose another database list or a combination of two database lists see below the definition of SQL queries or you must use a project that contains the needed fields QQ 2 7 FOOTER LINE lf you do not work with groups the footer line can include the total price of all the products or their total length Besides it can contain only texts QQ 2 8 LIST FOOTER LINE TEXT OBJECT Footer lines are generated automatically if you have activated the page numbering option in the Project Wizard Footer lines can contain more than one line Pagina 336 QQ Introducao FJ electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 EDITING LISTS Exercise 39 3 Change the available template 1 CA File 2 CO List and Label 3 gt Select the template to change 4 Right click with the mouse The pop up menu appears 5 CO Design 6 gt Next Changes are to be made in the Layout Preview area as you see here not only the field number as in the Layout area but also the text content of the field You can activate the Layout Preview tab in the bottom window s border EJ Layout Layout Preview Preview QQ 3 1 CHANGING COLUMN TITLES HEADER LINES 1 If you edit a list
338. ribute Choose the kind of text for example File name in the Workspace node of the attributes inthe Text dialogue box If you go out of the dialogue box the question mark that you have entered in step 7 is attached to the cursor and can be placed into the drawing Go into the Text dialogue box again and select the next kind of text in the Attribute field for example Content Page or Content Page Created date Place the question mark again After you have inserted all texts close the Text dialogue box Exercise 14 5 Select all of the elements that belo ng to the standard sheet Group the selected elements to a standard sheet 1CA General 2 CO All Select panel 3 Right click with the mouse 4 CO Block Select this function from the pop up menu 5 gt Page Template Title block 6 gt OK You have now created the first standard sheet To use it for the next pages create a page template Exercise 14 6 Define texts to use in headers for columns and rows in a symbol o bL Example for the vertical symbols Each symbol is made by lines Make sure all three symbols are of the same size for example 10 mm wide and 5 high Each symbol has to contain the text to use Text attribute Column name marker or Row name marker 1 Drag the upper left point to library for all the symbols Lines are extended shortened if necessary The Y size of a column symbol is not changed the same is for the X size of a row symbol Exercis
339. rkspace contains the following structure for the function Ful main function Fu2 sub function in Fut Fus sub function in Fut Fu 4 another main function The page has assigned function Fu1 CC Introducao Pagina 229 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The fuse F1 is relatively referenced this means that it is found in the sub function Fu2 of the main function Ful The box and the switch are also relatively referenced Absolute references show a gt in front The fuse F2 is placed in the main function Fu4 which is not a sub unction of Fu1 So the fuse F2 is absolutely referenced and that is why it has the gt signin front of the function text The lamp is also absolutely referenced to function Fu4 Object Reference Designation Page Ful Lo1 Prt Fuse F1 Ful Fu2 Lo1 Lo2 Pri F1 Fuse F2 Fu4 Lo1 Pri F2 Box Ful Fu3 Lo1 Pr1 Switch Ful Fu3 Loi1 Pri S2 Lamp Fu4 Lo1 Pri P3 gt Fu4 1 ae Progu eel a fe 3 Dole Total sheets Mel sheet uig 7 How to define absolute aspects on components First Case The Aspect database is not used Add the gt sign in front of the aspect you want to define an absolute value for wa Component Properties Value Show Function FZ Aut Location Aut Product Au Pagina 230 CC Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRI
340. rminals have been swapped Exercise 21 2 For terminals with more than 2 connections or Multi Layer terminals you can define more external internal targets 1 Select the terminals whose targets you wish to redefine 2 CA Electrical 3 CO Redefine target s on terminal s Connections panel The following dialogue appears Redefine Target s on Terminal s Connection Sort Extern Target Level Sorting Connection Humber Mids 102 7 20 202 J 301 302 J Set default value Sort Set default value External LIE Cancel 4 gt Use the check box within the Extern column to set the connections as external or not 5 gt Click OK to validate The connections of the selected terminals are redefined Pagina 172 W Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 3 DEFINING A LINK Links are indicated automatically from the SEE Electrical standard level Two types of Links are created Links identified via potentials and links identified via wires You can assign another type to the links as well as the standard type In this way you can differentiate between inlaying links wire links etc In the terminal matrix the different link types can be displayed on various locations T
341. rne X2 7 e o motor 7 Clique no motor 1M4 Suas propriedades aparecerao na respective aba Preencha PE no campo da conex o 03 Tecle Enter para validar o opera o 8 Selecione o borne X2 7 e conforme descrito acima mude seu numero para PE na guia Propriedades A primeira p gina de esquema el trico esta completa Exerc cio 3 9 Salve o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar Salve seus projetos frequentemente Isso tamb m poss vel clicando no icone nl P gina 26 C Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados C 4 TRABALHANDO COM O ZOOM Com muita frequ ncia necess rio trabalhar com uma vis o mais detalhada do desenho Exerc cio 3 10 Efetuando zoom por meio da janela Visualizar Na janela Visualizar 1 Clique o primeiro ponto do ret ngulo da area que voc deseja definir o zoom O ret ngulo definido por dois pontos diagonalmente opostos 2 Clique o segundo ponto do ret ngulo A visualiza o na tela principal ser expandida Voc poder mover a rea expandida na janela Visualizar 3 Posicione o cursor no ret ngulo cinza que define a rea com visualiza o ampliada O cursor ser representado por uma m o 4 Clique e arraste com o bot o esquerdo do mouse o ret ngulo Para desativar o zoom tecle o comando Zoom Original por meio do atalho F3 Exerc cio 3 11 Aumentar a visualiza o de uma parte do esquema el tri
342. roperties pop up command and click the Wires tab Tickthe Show Wire directions option to display wire directions permanently By using wire directions you can change the appearance of the terminal matrix and in the advanced level the terminal plan as well P gina 168 W Introdu o electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example 1 ud C Co t ta E o Li a _ a TE i gt lt E 7 E Lo k ta E a 5 tla im Co fa Ro mm KG dd j a Mp WIFE co SMe _ Conveyor Example 2 bb p JKA r i JES E ooo E Lui ita E Z a E e Ji o r E 56 8 EL gt E _j co TO LC ralo E MA gt Zin e Salmo wa ne o u1 hu PE o M o S Slzla _ Conveyor ej a a ili Pe wa ea ee W Introducao Pagina 169 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Note You can change the default wire directions via the following registry key HKEY CURRENT USERISoftwarelCAE Develooment SEE Electrical Version V7R2 1000 WireDirections or HKEY CURRENT USERISoftwareliCAE DevelopmentiSEE Electrical Version V7R2 1001 WireDirections for circuit diagrams IEEE The possible values are WireDirectionLeftRightDown 15025 15027 15035 and 15037 default EN WireDirectionLeftRightUp 15026 15028 15036 and 15
343. rst place also inthe Documents node you could change the sort order to 3002 GG Introducao Pagina 267 yae ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados HH USER DEFINED SQL QUERIES Advanced SQL is embedded in the SEE Electrical database to allow you to create any kind of form including summarization of different parameters You have the possibility to create your own Database lists and Graphical lists and herewith your own SQL queries However it is not possible to add the Terminal matrix Terminal plan Terminal plan multi level or Cable plan into the Workspace Explorer again Database editors are not customizable either SQL queries are created or modified by means of the SQL Builder HH 1 1 CREATING AN SQL QUERY FOR ADDING A DATABASE LIST IN THE WORKSPACE EXPLORER For accessing the SQL Builder right click first on the workspace name in the Workspace Explorer and select the Properties pop up command to open the Workspace Properties window Then click the icon in an empty Query field within the List definition tab Workspace Properties a General List definition Workspace text Page text Object types Component text P ListOrder 4187 4138 4189 4182 4189 4190 4191 4192 4205 4103 4104 4280 List id Description Query Show 4185 Editor PLC VO Export 3051 4186 Editor Function amp Location Export 3150 4187 Editor Component without
344. ry before you start drawing your potentials The properties as you have specified them for the corresponding signal type are displayed subsequently in the drawing P gina 176 W Introdu o as selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example So a WIPE E number Em WIre Fotential number m w e name c J LJ A Hf Ke You can use various ways to assign the desired values to the wires It is your choice which one to use W 6 WORKING WITHOUT SIGNAL PROPERTIES lf you do not want to use signal properties you can generate wire numbers and define the colour and size for your wires in case you need these values for your wire list The Potential and Unique options in the Wires tab of the Circuit Diagrams Properties window define how the attributes are managed Potential all wires in one net have the same attributes such as colour size and wire number Unique each wire can have its own attributes You can use various ways to assign the desired values to the wires It is your choice which one to use W Introducao Pagina 177 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados W 7 VIEW AND CHANGE WIRE ATTRIBUTES You can control the wire attributes defined for a specific wire The following dialogue appear when you double click a wire Wire properties Value
345. s M 5 8 a EXAMPLES OF PLC COMPONENTS PLC signals Draw the graphics Create the texts Make sure that the texts receive the specified attributes All of the displayed texts including the texts for addresses and descriptions are necessary Connection PLC description Normal texts px qo a Connection Connection Connection PLC address et lamponent Product Connection PLO comment Move the connection texts if necessary Select all the parts of the symbol and create a PLC signal symbol Save the symbol in the symbol database PLC signals to be used in PLC Rack lf a cross reference must go out of a PLC Rack to a PLC signal you should place symbols for PLC signals in the Rack Draw the graphics first Pagina 92 M Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Create the texts Make sure that the texts receive the specified attributes Connection Connection Sheet Path reference 2 3 J Component Product Move the connection text if necessary Select all the parts of the symbol and create a PLC signal symbol PLC Rack Create the graphics first Graphics completed Rack symbol 108 digital input GES7 321 1FFO1 0AAO M Introdu o P gina 93 Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados sea electrical Create the texts Make
346. s Now you must change the available standard sheet General All Select panel Right click Explode from the pop up menu After ungrouping the standard sheet all the elements become accessible again You can add erase and move lines if needed You can also edit erase and add texts There is a difference between unchangeable texts and texts that have to be entered with data from the database lists All of the texts in a template for graphical lists have the Normal Text attribute Texts to be filled in with data from the database lists must be presented always in the format lt number gt such as 120010 for page number You can find a list of the available numbers for text placeholders at the end of this section or in the List Construction Set SES symbol library A special text placeholder Lines 30 7 5 must be presented in the template in order to state the number of lines available in the template for example 30 and the line distance for example 7 5 Enter the text exactly in the following format Lines lt number of lines gt lt line distance gt The point is required as a decimal delimiter in the line distance After you have created the template group it again General All Select panel Right click Select Block from the pop up menu Page Template Title block OK Exercise 15 13 Save the template 1 2 CA 3 CO P Introdu o In the Workspace
347. s A p gina correspondente ser aberta e o componente destacado com um pino Exerc cio 6 3 Visualizar os potenciais na p gina 1 Foram criadas refer ncias cruzadas nos poternciais L1 e N para a p gina 2 Exerc cio 6 4 Ir para a p gina 2 Foram criadas refer ncias cruzadas para a p gina 1 he Para ir a proxima pagina clique no icone E ou tecle Page Down a partir do teclado Exerc cio 6 5 Salvar o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar Pagina 50 F Introdu o gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados F 1 USANDO S MBOLOS DE REFER NCIA CRUZADA Se um fio n o tiver de continuar em outra p gina s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada dever o ser usados Os s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada est o dispon veis na pasta References da biblioteca EN61346 2UK Apenas dois s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada podem receber o mesmo nome para que funcionem corretamente A conex o entre tais s mbolos feita pelo nome do componente Exerc cio 6 6 Inserir dois s mbolos de refer ncia cruzada no projeto de exemplo Abra para a p gina 1 Abra a biblioteca de s mbolos EN61346 2UK Abra a pasta References e selecione o componente Reference right Insira o nome do componente neste caso V1 Abra a p gina 2 Selecione o s mbolo Reference left a partir da biblioteca EN61346 2UK Insira o na pagina e defina novamente o nome como V1 Em ambos s mbolos a re
348. s X 3 3 Drawing Graphics Associated with Each Terminal One Specific Geometry for Each Kind of Terminal 12 X 4 DRAW MORE THAN ONE TERMINAL STRIP PER PAGE Y CABLE PLAN WITH GRAPHICS Y 1 CREATING A CABLE PLAN WITH GRAPHICS Y 2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR CABLE PLANS WITH GRAPHICS Y 3 SHOWING NOT USED CABLE CORES IN CABLE PLAN Y 4 CABLE PLAN WITH SHIELD INFORMATION FOR CABLES Z WIRING LISTS 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 A Introdu o P gina 5 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Z 1 GRAPHICAL WIRING LIST 12 Z 1 l Creating an Excel Text File 12 AA FUNCTION AND LOCATION 12 BB REVISION MANAGEMENT 12 CC ADVANCED FUNCTION LOCATION AND PRODUCT MANAGEMENT 12 CC 1 DATABASE FOR FUNCTION LOCATION AND PRODUCT MANAGEMENT 12 ORA USING NESTED ASPECTS 12 DD COMPLEX MODIFICATIONS OF THE DATABASE LISTS 12 DD 1 1 Product Editor 12 DD 1 2 Terminal Editor 12 DD 1 5 Cable Editor 12 DD 1 4 Connector Editor 12 DD 1 5 Signal Editor 12 DD 1 6 Wire Editor 12 DD 1 7 Function Location Editor 12 DD 1 6 Document Editor 12 DD 1 9 REDLINING OBJECTS LIST 12 EE ADVANCED PROCESSING OF A PROJECT 12 EE 1 NAVIGATION IN THE PROJECT 12 EE 2 WORKING WITH AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED CONNECTIONS 12 EE 3 ORTHOGONAL WIRING 12 EE 4 ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY FOR CABLES 12 EE 4 1 Define Cable Names Automatica
349. s mbolo do bot o 1 Movimente o cursor para a guia S mbolos 2 Feche a pasta Relay coils clicando no sinal de subtra o esquerda da pasta D Introdu o P gina 31 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados ED 1 pole AC relay Es 1 pole contactor 3 D um duplo clique na pasta Switchgear one pole para abri la 4 Clique no componente NO turn detent 5 Movimente o cursor para a area de desenho O simbolo aparecera ligado ao cursor 6 Solte o s mbolo na posi o desejada na coluna 2 D um duplo clique no s mbolo A caixa de di logo Propriedades do Componente aparecer 7 gt Conex o 00 8 13 Digite o n mero 9 gt Conexao 01 10 14 Digite o n mero 11 gt OK Feche a caixa de dialogo Dica Voc pode girar um simbolo 90 graus ou mais antes de inseri lo Tecle ou a partir do teclado num rico enquanto o s mbolo estiver ligado ao cursor O s mbolo ser girado 90 graus no sentido hor rio ou anti hor rio Se voc acionar uma destas teclas mais uma vez o s mbolo ser girado em mais 90 graus Voc pode fazer o mesmo com as teclas X ou Z Exerc cio 4 7 Inserir um contato NA P gina 32 D Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados OT IND 6 8 9 gt 10 11 gt 12 13 gt Dica Movimente o cursor para a
350. s auxiliaries consiste da parte gr fica e os seguintes textos nome do componente descri o tipo textos de conex o etc Al m disso os contatos dispon veis no componente s o necess rios Os itens devem ser agrupados como Componente com depend ncia de contatos usando o comando Editar A es Agrupar M 5 7 c EXEMPLOS DE COMPONENTES COM CONTATOS AUXILIARES Contatos dos componente com contatos auxiliares Se uma refer ncia cruzada tiver de existir entre um componente com contatos auxiliaries e um contato voc deve inserir os simbolos de contato no componente Primeiramente crie a parte gr fica Insira os textos Preste aten o quanto aos atributos utilizados Simbolo de conex o Texto de conex o Nome do componente Refer ncia folhafcoluna Simbolo de conexao Texto de conexao Desloque o texto de conexao se necessario Selecione todos os elementos do simbolo e agrupe o como Contato utilize o tipo correto normalmente aberto normalmente fechado ou reversivel Componente com contatos auxiliares Desenhe a parte gr fica es O ee Pagina 90 M Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Create the texis Pay attention that the texis receive the specified attributes Connection symbol _ connection text Component name E ee ee eee Component description Component type e Connection symbol
351. s cont m entre outras informa es os formul rios que por sua vez possuem tamb m a configura o do n mero de colunas no desenho etc A instala o do SEE Electrical inclui ao menos um modelo para projetos Selecione o modelo Standard Clique em OK O projeto novo ser aberto A aba Propriedades vis vel no lado direito da tela cont m as informa es sobre o projeto Em Nome do arquivo voc poder ver o nome e localiza o do arquivo do projeto lt nome gt SEP Descri o do projeto linha 01 Projeto de exemplo Data de cria o do projeto Se o campo Data de cria o do projeto n o estiver vis vel utilize a barra de rolagem O campo Data de cria o do projeto preenchido automaticamente Digite outra data caso necess rio O SEE Electrical mostrar a data no campo Data de cria o do projeto Se voc quiser usar um formato de data diferente dever modificar as configura es do seu sistema operacional Quando o formato de data do computador for diferente do usado no projeto a convers o n o sera poss vel e o software mudar seu formato para texto simples de forma a garantir que a informa o original possa ser visualizada Projeto criado por Digite seu nome Voc poder preencher os demais campos conforme quiser P gina 17 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados O conte do dos campos da aba propriedades do projeto ser o ins
352. s e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados V 5 MODIFYING EXISTING TYPES IN THE PROJECT lt is possible that you may need to make changes to a type that you have already assigned to a symbol in your project These changes will not affect directly the current project because the types used in the project are stored and cannot change automatically when the type database is changed For example if you negotiated prices for your project a year ago the information cannot be updated automatically To update the current type information execute the Functions Types Update command V 6 DISPLAYING INFORMATION ON THE EQUIPMENT FROM THE TYPE DATABASE You can display information from the type database on a piece of equipment inserted in the circuit diagram In order to do this you must use texts with the respective attributes during the symbol generation The necessary text attributes can be found inthe Type Properties node in the Text dialogue V 7 DEFINE WHICH TYPE DATABASE TO USE WITH A PROJECT Standard and Advanced It is possible to use different type databases in SEE Electrical Because of this each company can name its type database according to their needs lt MyCompanyTypes SES gt If the type database carries the companies name it might be much more convenient to include this file into the process of securing data Customers serving different
353. selected 5 gt Click OK The terminal plan has been created Il Introdu o Pagina 275 as se lectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 32 2 View the terminal plan Each terminal strip is displayed on a separate page 1 0001 Select page 1 of the terminal plan by double clicking on 0001 under Terminal plan in the Workspace Explorer 2 0002 Select page 2 of the terminal plan by double clicking on 0002 under Terminal plan in the Workspace Explorer 1 2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A TERMINAL PLAN Forms for terminal plans represent page templates with special properties In general they are created as forms for terminal matrices Two routes and one text are needed in addition in order to define where the symbols must be placed and how the wires are to be represented hs Connection Number 6 Torget right inimum connection line coblename Left _ Type distance line cobledesc Leff x text for symbolposition Lett 55 Lines Torget P gina 276 Il Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 First route Minimum connection route The route must display a connection between the place where the text of the first terminal will appear and the place where the component symbol will appear This route will be extended to the first connection of the component symbol wh
354. separator has to be inserted between inverted commas With this you can also add blanks Example Sep Controls wire part sorting Example Sort ONCS or Sort 1NCS The number in that parameter specifies if potentials are set at the beginning of the wiring list or not and if the wiring direction is taken into account The first character after Sort is 0 1 2 or 3 and it sets the sorting mode for targets 0 disables sort potentials first disables Sort targets by name ignore wire directions 1 enables sort potentials first disables Sort targets by name ignore wire directions DEFAULT 2 disables sort potentials first enables Sort targets by name ignore wire directions 3 enables sort potentials first enables Sort targets by name ignore wire directions Z 1 1 CREATING AN EXCEL TEXT FILE The files are created via the WiringList command in the Commands tab The command is available only in case a circuit diagram sheet is currently open Execute the command from the Commands explorer Pagina 210 Z Introdu o ad e ectrica Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The following window appears Wiring List YE Texthile Wire list Pre W ireList fd WireList BEGI Formating Values General A new line ft stab Wine Prefire friwtine SH Formating Values Paire fH wire counter Wi ire Part PES tngtNumber t
355. sh to be recorder in the label You can select only ore list Products Next Next Press Next to close the Project Wizard window QQ Introdu o 11 12 gt 13 gt 14 gt 15 16 gt 17 gt 18 gt 19 gt gaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados You can specify whether to use one printer for all pages or to use different printers for first page following pages Next After you have made your choice click Next to close the dialogue box Specify the printer and the other printing options Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next You can define page numbering and add title If you want to add a title specify if it is to be printed on the first page or on all pages Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next Select Zebra pattern for the table to print the lines between rows and columns You can choose the Create summary option The summary displays the number of records only on the last page or on all the pages Specify whether to create summary on all the pages or onthe last page only Next Close the dialogue box by clicking Next Choose the fields for the list Available fields Selected fields W Add column titles The fields in the list depend on the chosen database list example Product You will also find common fields in the list such as project name project editor etc You do not have to select these common fi
356. smo procedimento e aceite os demais nomes sugeridos para os pr ximos quarto potenciais Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o Exerc cio 3 4 Salve o projeto 1 CA Arquivo 2 CO Salvar Exercicio 3 5 Inserir o diagrama de for a P gina 22 C Introdu o see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 1 Movimente o cursor para a guia S mbolos 2 Clique no grupo Three phase motor direct presente na pasta Example 3 Arraste o grupo Three phase motor direct para a rea de desenho conforme a figura acima 4 Solte o grupo na posi o desejada Uma caixa de di logo de nome dos bornes aparecer 5 gt Componente 6 O nome X1 ser sugerido Utilize X2 7 gt OK Os pr ximos bornes ser o vinculados automaticamente a essa r gua A caixa de di logo para os contatos de for a NA aparecer 8 gt Componente 9 4 1Q2 Voc pode inserir o nome neste contato mas nao o modifique agora pois ainda nao sabe a qual componente pertence 10 gt OK Clique com o bot o direito do mouse para sair do modo de inser o Exerc cio 3 6 Inserir os s mbolos do Segundo diagrama de for a 2 C Introdu o ee ae ae ee Se cia ce rio io me eee Lj CAN a Movimente o cursor para a guia S mbolos Abra a biblioteca EN61346 2UK P gina 23 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos
357. so are added to the graphical terminal lists at that position defined by their terminal sorting For further details about importing data from an Excel file see also Erro Fonte de refer ncia nao encontrada OO Introdu o P gina 307 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Note You can insert these terminals in the Circuit diagram as well by using the Pick List command from the Functions category OO 2 1 HANDLING CABLES WITHOUT GRAPHICS Quick guide Inserting cables without graphics 1 Right click a line inthe Cable Editor list 2 Select the Add new component pop up command 3 Type in the desired values into the input fields on the right pane If you want to add a name for the cable the name must be unique If you do not define a name you can define an amount of cables The amount of cable cores is not managed in the case of a cable without graphics This means that when you insert at least one core in the circuit diagram the cable disappears from the list of components without graphics The same happens if you rename an existing cable in the diagram with the name of a cable existing only in the Editor Excel import When cables are imported from an Excel file and a cable with the same name already exists the new imported cable receives an extension to its number separated by For example if a cable W1 already exists the W1 cable imported gets th
358. space Explorer 2 0002 Double click the page 2 beneath Terminal Matrix in the Workspace Explorer Pagina 182 X Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados X 2 HANDLING MULTI LAYER TERMINALS You can handle multi layer terminals in the Circuit diagram as follows Place the multi layer terminals Enter the needed texts Single levels are connected together when the terminal name terminal number and terminal sorting are equal The terminal number can be also empty nmannnnnanannnanan A a oo quemsmgeemameman a on eH oma Jeri CO A a a a Da Component Component Properties Properties Value Value Product Kio Product kio Type Type Level Separator Level Separator Level Mame a Level Mame h Level Sorting 1 Level Sorting 2 Terminal Number 1 Terminal Number 1 Terminal Sorting 1 Terminal Sorting 1 Terminal Plan Symbol O05 sDe Terminal Plan Symbol 05 30 Connection OO Connection 01 Connection OO Connection 01 Wire Transparent d lt mx Wire Transparent 1 4 tl Select the answer Yes to the question if the components are to be combined In the terminal matrix the terminal number the level separator and the level name are entered together in the text placeholder for the terminal number X Introdu o P gina 183 Zaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os
359. symbol database or a symbol folder is selected you can right click and choose the New Folder pop up command in order to create a new subgroup for components Type in the name of the New Folder The new symbol folder is arranged in alphabetical order in the tree of symbol folders lf you wish to Delete Folder or Copy Folder select the symbol folder right click and choose the appropriate command from the pop up menu To rename a symbol folder choose the Properties pop up command and type in its new name A warning message appears before deleting you must confirm this process The symbol folder has been deleted including all symbols within it The renamed symbol folder can be relocated to another place within the database because the symbol folders are arranged alphabetically After copying a symbol folder it can be pasted into another place by using the Paste Folder command from the pop up menu M 8 4 WORKING WITH SYMBOLS IN THE DATABASE Select a symbol and right click to choose the respective pop up command in order to delete rename and copy the symbol A renamed symbol can be relocated to another place within the database because the symbols are arranged alphabetically After copying a symbol it can be pasted into another symbol folder by using the Paste Symbol command from the pop up menu M Introdu o P gina 101 Zaa e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados
360. t F Cable001 160010 RN 7 ep G Cable001 160010 OF Cancel a The group must change when the cable name changes field code 160010 that comes from table Cable001 QQ 4 2 FILTERING DOUBLE RECORDS You can filter double records using the SQL statement SELECT with the predicate DISTINCT Example A list including functions and locations on the pages must be created Each combination must be displayed only once QQ Introdu o Pagina 353 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 4 2 a LIST OF FUNCTIONS LOCATIONS ON PAGES 1 Define a SQL query SELECT DISTINCT Export_3001 180015 Export_3001 180018 FROM Export_ 3001 SELECT DISTINCT The SELECT statement selects data from the table Each combination of the selected data is displayed only once by using the predicate DISTINCT Syntax of the statement SELECT lt fields gt FROM lt Table of Access database gt As the fields here do not have names enclose the field code in square brackets and 2 Place fields for function and location QQ 4 3 SORTING A LIST To sort lists in a specific way use SQL statements Examples If you want to receive an order list from the part list the list has to be sorted by manufacturer If the lengths of equal cables must be added the list must be sorted by cable type before addition QQ 4 3 a ORDER LIST lf you want to re
361. t if you enter an article number as a cable type you can type the text such as NYM J 5x1 5 in the cable dimension Cable desc left on the left if you type a dash the cable description is not displayed Cable core Number left for example c on the left The texts with the attributes Cable core umber Left ID 180128 and Cable core Number Right ID 180131 are used to display a lot of information The first letter in the text allows you to define the information to be shown for a cable core and the second letter allows you to set the text to be shown for a wire displays nothing displays the number default displays the number default displays the colour if existing displays the colour if existing and the number of the colour does not exist E always displays the colour also when number is not used o 0Z If you need more information you can position a text with the Cable core Number left and Cable core Number right attributes a second and a third time and thus display the information for signal type and signal name Q displays information about the signal type P displays information about the potential name Cable core section left on the left The cable core section can be entered for cable cores and or wires too Two signs are needed here again The combination Q creates the section for cable cores but not for wires Q creates the section for wires but not for cable cores For the Numbers of
362. t list Cable list Cable wire list Terminal list In Terminal Matrix and Terminal Plan as well as in Terminal Row Picture Cable Plan and Products Assembly this option is not available List of Documents 2180015 190018 12001 120020 180010 12 0100 Output multiline text in a single line in lists P gina 128 lf two or more columns have to be generated the page template must contain a text with normal attribute and the following content Columns lt number of columns gt lt offset for next column gt For example columns 2 150 like in the example shown above The second column needs to contain the geometry and the texts for the headline but no placeholder IDs such as 180015 The ColumnBreak command allows you to switch to a new column if the defined criteria is executed if PageBreak exist it has a higher priority Syntax ColumnBreak lt Value gt The rules are similar to the ones valid for the PageBreak Additionally there are commands that allow you to define in which direction will be filled the columns RightThenDown place the first entry in the first line place the next entry in the first line of the next column DownT henLeft default if nothing is defined fill all lines in the first column then start with line 1 in the second column If for example the text description 00 is to be split in three lines in a component to fit the space available in the circuit diagram it is poss
363. t to right 17 gt The content of the text field is used if the cell column row information will be used in the names of the components or cross references If you want to use thus value you can define the cell information If you do not want to use the cell information in the component names or cross references leave the default value in the Text field 18 Now define the number of columns and rows you want to have Example 1 only columns Nothing is defined in the header of the rows You will define only the Number of columns and will leave the Number of rows value to 1 Use the Refresh button to generate the number columns Example 2 columns and rows For example 5 rows and 10 columns will be defined it is important to create the rows first and then the columns if you want to sort your objects in the database lists from the top left corner of a sheet down first and then to the right like it is done in the default templates delivered Define the rows r Use the Refresh button tz to apply the value Define the columns Use the Refresh button Dea to apply the value The columns and rows are automatically made The rules for name of first column and row are used for the automatically made ones 19 Please control the names of the columns and rows and the order and names of the cells If you made a mistake you can change the rule for each of the columns or rows but it is easier to start with step
364. terminal has been changed PageBreak 140020 or PageBreak are used to start a new page if the function has been changed PageBreak 1 40050 or PageBreak X Introdu o P gina 197 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Are used to start a new page if the function has been changed Additionally you can define how to manage the function and location information in the terminal strip lf you add the text DLO to the PageBreak command the terminal strip name is always extended with the function and location information even if the terminal strip has the same function and location information as the page where it is located If you add the text DL1 to the PageBreak command the terminal row name will contain only the function and location information in case they are different from the ones on the page 3 Generate a Page template symbol from the inserted elements except for the terminal number and terminal strip name 1 The terminal row header part has to be created in the following way All the geometry and texts that show information that is never changed have to be groupd as a Graphical symbol The graphical symbol and a text with the attribute Terminal number have to be grouped as Macro Group Terminal Strip A 5 All the geometry and text that show information about the terminal that is never changed have to be grouped as a Graphical s
365. texts Terminal number Id 180112 this text is obligatory Terminal connection text left Id 180152 and right Id 180153 optional Terminal type ld 180140 optional Terminal description ld 180142 optional Terminal free texts 1 2 and 3 Ids 180180 180181 and 180182 optional And the page reference texts Terminal Page Function Id 180146 Terminal Page Location Id 180148 Terminal Sheet Id 180115 Terminal Sheet Index Id 180143 Terminal Cell Id 180116 optional Note The size of the terminal symbol graphics has to fit the line distance given for the terminal plan distance between the text for Target left and the text for Number of lines for terminals The size and distance must be the same Where is the symbol placed in the terminal plan In the template the position of the first line is marked by the Terminal number placeholder text Id 180112 lf the terminal symbol has a normal text with the contents FSybPos this text is put on top of the placeholder text Terminal number Id 180112 in the template including the line offset If no SybPos text is found in the terminal symbol the Terminal number placeholder text from the template is used to position the terminal symbol The search is faster if the Terminal number placeholder text in the symbol contains the SybPos text Which symbols are used for the terminal X Introdu o P gina 193 sea electric
366. the icon to insert a field The Edit Table window appears You can double click the Fields folder in the upper left pane and double click the desired field code to select it Fa Edit Table Varables and Functions fm Fields Click OK to close the Edit Table window You must afterwards double click the column header line in the table insert the corresponding record and put it in the right place QQ Introdu o Pagina 339 sd e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados QQ 3 3 CHANGING THE LIST TITLE 1 You can edit the list title by double clicking on it 2 The following window appears Paragraph Properties ES ees eee x M Paragraphs a Pa do fel y ES Ei o ElAppearance Font Arial El Behaviour Unerasable False o El Layout Alignment T left Blank Optimization True ves Justified False o Line Spacing T O pt Line rap True rap Paragraph Spacing 0 O pt Appearance ARIAL Cancel You can change the alignment of the list to appear centred make the font Bold or Underline change the type and size of the font see properties under Font or Layout in the right area of the window You can delete the list title by clicking on the icon You can insert an additional list title by clicking on the Pa P gina 340 QQ Introdu o ad e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 4 If
367. tic generation of circuit diagrams Replace the texts at the component with texts from text placeholders Pagina 310 PP Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados You can define placeholder texts in one of the following ways 2 Specify the column from the Excel spreadsheet where the right identification is included if the column E includes the component name then a placeholder with format E is required instead of the component name F2 ae 104 3 Specify an Alias name Alias names allow entering descriptive names instead of the column names such as Component instead of HE You can assign the names of the Excel columns to the alias names in the Alias sheet within the Excel spreadsheet By using alias names the Exce columns can be changed without changing the texts in the components groups In this case the Alias sheet must be adapted The use of alias names facilitates the implementation of text placeholders However it is not compulsory to use alias names If you work with alias names you have to choose free identification for the component names and to use function location Component TOA 4 Each group needs a marker for the start point and a marker for the end point Over the end marker of the first group the start marker of the next group is placed etc The groups follow each other in a chain The programme can evaluate whether a group fits int
368. ties are changed dynamically Exercise 14 3 Construct the graphics for your standard sheet use the commands from the Draw category to draw a line rectangle etc Draw the geometry for the columns too The complete standard sheet or your Logo can be imported using the File Open O CADdy Classic Drawing s or AutoCAD DXF DWG Drawing commands You can find information about importing DXF DWG DXB drawings in the relevant chapter of this training manual Pagina 110 O Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados You can insert the company logo as a pixel image by using the General Insert Picture command You can find information for inserting Bitmap Objecis in the relevant chapter in this training manual Exercise 14 4 Insert the texis you need into the norm sheet such as project name page name etc There is a difference between unchangeable texts and texts customizable to the current project or page You can fill in the data of the current project as texts into the standard sheet using text placeholders For example you can write a sign there First insert the unchangeable texts 1 CA Draw 2 CO New Text Elements panel 3 gt Attribute The unchangeable texts must have a Normal Text attribute 4 gt Text 5 lt Type the text gt 6 Insert the text O Introdu o P gina 111 Manual de treinam
369. ties are specified when you create a page template When you create a new page the page properties are loaded from the page template and then they are stored for this page within the project You can select the Page properties function in two ways Select a page under Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer and then select Home Properties Page Select a page under Circuit diagrams in the Workspace Explorer right click with the mouse and select Properties The page properties are displayed in the Properties pane Properties x Name value CCADDoOC Extension of Page Y Extension of Page Grid size in X 5 000000 Grid size in Y 5 000000 Position for the first top potential of OO00000 Position for the first bottom potential 20 000000 Margin potential left side Margin potential right side Distance from potential to contact refere Scale 1 000000 Symbol scaling 1 000000 Grid X Origin 0 000000 Grid Origin 0 000000 Orientation grid X 0 000000 Orientation grid 0 000000 Print in landscape On Scale factor for print line 1 Top potential margin for autoconnect 25 000000 Bottom potential margin for autoconnect 25 000000 Page template file name Page template sections Object Property specifying the object kind Here you can specify the number of columns in the current page and the dimensions of the drawing It is possible to specify different numbers of columns for the
370. tings apply to the system i e to all projects and drawings The system settings are stored in the Windows registry The File System Settings function is available only when no project is open Choose inthe System Settings window whether to make automatic Backup of Pages or not and set the maximum number of opened document views System Settings E General EB Folder A Colour and layout E Licence Backup Automatic Backup of Pages Automatic Backup Interval in Minutes il Documents Maximum Opened Document Views 10 Note Min value is 2 Compress Equipment Database Ta Compress drawings before storing Use SEE AP Equipment Database Hoating Style Menu 4 Show floating style menu Click the Folder tab to define the folders where to store your templates projects and symbols for example they could be stored in the network Use the settings in the Colour and Layout tab for the colours for the background for the cursor etc P gina 390 TT Introdu o sea electrical TT 2 WORKSPACE PROPERTIES 1 Workspace Properties General List definition Workspace text r Revision Change Revison Date Automatical c Function 7 Location Use Function Location management i p p T Online Messages v Activate Messages Component properties Behavior for merging component Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Page text O
371. tion field 6 02 Fillin the new value in the Location field 7 gt OK The input box closes 8 gt Yes Confirm the renaming of all the components inside the Function Location box The new identifications have been assigned to all components located within the drawn rectangle In the Workspace properties there is a setting that allows you to define if the function location boxes will change the names of the cable cores or slaves found inside the box too AA Introducao Pagina 217 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Exercise 25 6 If the name of the Function Location box has to be changed proceed as follows 1 Double click the Function Location box whose texts you want to change 2 Type in the correct names in the corresponding fields 3 gt OK The input box closes 4 gt Yes Confirm the renaming of all the components inside the Function Location box All the components inside the Function Location box are renamed The size of a function location box can be changed with the help of the trackers The size of the texts belonging to the box is not changed If after a modifiction a component is not located inside the box any more it will show its function location texts If a component is found inside box after modification that has not been inside before it will also show its function location texts Please disable trackers directly when you do not nee
372. tions 4 Record 6 gt rif 4 gt Exercise 40 7 Use several cabinet symbols in one component It is possible to insert cabinet symbols for all types of components in case more than one type of component has been added In the channel definition inthe Cabinet symbol field you have to define a symbol for the cabinet or the size of the rectangle or circle to be generated The sizes are defined in the following way 33x30 for a rectangle D30 for a diameter or R15 for a radius If subtypes have been used the symbols attached to them in the channel definition are also used lf a component has multiple types and in the channel definition a cabinet symbol or a dimension has been defined for more than one for these types all the symbols rectangles for the component can be inserted in a cabinet In this case you can select only one component and insert the single paris There is no general rule how the other types have to be inserted in relation to the first one If you select multiple paris and use horizontal or vertical automatic placing the automatism is interrupted when you use a component with multiple symbols You have to insert allthe symbols for this component and after this for the next component to define where to start the automatism again Then the automatism continues Example if acoil consists of the coil itself and two add ons one to be mounted on left and the other to be
373. to change the names of copied terminals in the diagram or via the Terminal Editor as they are duplicated to the ones onthe original page If you copy the page to a different workspace this may not be necessary since the terminals may not exist there before copying v If you copy a page within the same workspace you have to change the names of copied cables in the diagram or via the Cable Editor as they are duplicated to the ones on the original page If you copy the page to a different workspace this may not be necessary since the cables may not exist there before copying If you exchange the name of the cable on the copied page only the cores of this cable receive the new cable name as there is no link between the objects on the original page and their copies in the same workspace v For contacts and PLC I Os if the master is on the copied page too the link is still valid and the name of the master is inherited by the slave lf the master is on a different page you have to assign the correct name We recommend that you display the Component Properties dialogue and make sure the right name is assigned v The names of components are treated as defined by the selected component numbering method This means if Free is chosen for component numbering you have to change the names otherwise they are changed automatically Note A message box appears informing you that only saved information will be copied It also shows y
374. tors Plugged lo Plugged lo Connector Matrix Connector Connector Em o _ o pak E mm o o pak E pak male connector Connection Comec lion lese p ton Descr p ion E catenam TT TTL Exercise Generate a connector matrix 1 Select Connector matrix from within the Graphical Lists in the Workspace tree Expand the Graphical Lists 2 Right click with the mouse 3 CO Generate In the Select Terminal Row dialogue choose the connector s for which you wish to generate a matrix for example X2 and X3 4 gt X2 X3 5 gt OK The Connector matrices have been created P gina 286 JJ Introdu o sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados JJ 2 CREATING A TEMPLATE FOR A CONNECTOR MATRIX Templates for connector matrices are page templates with special properties A Connector Matrix provides similar possibilities which you know from Terminal Matrix That is why the template creation follows similar rules too Differences in the text place holders between Terminal Matrix and Connector Matrix or Terminal Row Picture and Connector Plan Terminal Matrix and Terminal Connector Matrix and Row Picture Connector Plan Header Terminal strip Connector ID 180110 Row E 180112 ID 180137 In a Connector Matrix or a Connector Plan cables are entered only on the left side of a pin because the plug on its second side will be always plug
375. tremity of the wire The alignment will be from the right extremity of the wire lt W gt the position of the text will be calculated with the percent between the position of the wire property in relation with the wire W Introdu o P gina 179 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Example wire numbering potential Kee onder Coa Symbol used Length of line 10 mm BT gt gt RS Size Results for wires with different length E i JE z 1 5 g H 1 5 62 Hk 5 1 5 The symbol for the horizontal wire is supporting Movimenteble x coordinate and the symbol for the vertical wire is working with Movimenteble y coordinate Important After you change a symbol you have to restart SEE Electrical The symbols have to be defined in the registry of Windows in the following way lt symbol database gt lt symbol folder gt lt symbol name gt The registry value for the horizontal wire symbol is 1000 WirePropSettings The registry value for the vertical wire symbol is 1000 WirePropSettingsV The setting is used for Circuit Diagrams EN and IEEE This way of defining the symbol properties is valid for all wire modes The registry settings Settings Text DefaultWireProperties Font and Settings T ext DefaultPotentialNameFont Pagina 180 W Introducao am c ectrica Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos r
376. trical Wires Numbers subpanel It is important that the terms net wire wire segment are clearly defined in case signal types of wires are not used In case you use signal types of wires you have to understand well the terms signal type net wire and wire segment Signal type Signal types can be Power Control N PE Data bus etc For each signal type you can define attributes colour size line width and visibility for wire texts You will find detailed information in the next chapter Pagina 174 W Introducao sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Net In the example shown above is present one net that links the switch with the two lamps A net can connect different connection points from different components A net consists of different wires If you use the signal type different nets can have the same signal type Wire The wire is the physical object that always links exactly two components The net shown in the example above consists of two physical wires One wire is connecting the S1 switch with the H1 lamp One wire is connecting the H1 lamp with the H2 lamp The wire directions inthe net are very important Wire seqment Wire 1 contains two segments and Wire 2 has three segments The segment between lamp H1 and the direction node is common for both wires W Introducao Pagina 175 electrical Manua
377. trical Training E Bectrical Draw gaga 1 Wire ey Signals TT Auto Connection iii Wire rubberband lt x H H Connect Between HI Wires H Cable H Multicore Li I l Ea Li ol mi ra fl m mmh uu em If you want to remove a command select it and click the lt button Exercise 42 5 Add commands from the Commands explorer to the user defined categories 1 Open the Customizer exe 2 gt Define the basic settings All necessary files are stored by default in the SEE Electrical folder 3 gt Next 4 gt Select the General category from the pull down list 5 gt Click the Load button 6 gt Right click on the User Defined Categories node and select the Add Category pop up command P gina 400 TT Introdu o ad e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados f gt Type in the name of the new category Training and click OK Edit Category x Name Training OK Cancel 10 To add a panel to your category right click it and select the Add Panel pop up command 11 Type inthe name of the new panel inthis case Tools 13 gt Explode the Commands node in the left part of the window 14 gt Scroll down to find the ETINFO command and select it 15 gt Select the Tools panel that you created 16 gt Click the _ button The ETINFO command is added to the user defined category 17 gt Click the Save button Open SEE
378. ts with the attribute Cable name Description Type etc Optional A text of the form Type s provides the result for instance Type NYY 5x1 5 3c Group the Graphical Symbol and the texts for the cable as a Block Macro Group symbol 4 Define the view of the data for the Cable core number 4a Group the graphics and the text with the normal text attribute as a Graphical Symbol 4b Insert texts for Cable core number c colour number or C only colour or only number or nothing Other cable attributes colour cross section potential name signal type of wire Y Introdu o P gina 201 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Ac ha ob Pagina 202 Position a text with the cable core colour or cable core square attributes Type the code given below into this placeholder The text is replaced by the associated text S cable core square Q signal type of wire P potential name for wire Maximum five instances of the text for cable core colour and cable core square can be used for example three times colour and two times square Function Location Sheet Index and Column where the Cable core is located optional Group the selected elements as a Block Macro Group symbol Define the targets left and right You need texts with the attribute Target left or Target right If you type in NoSymbol into t
379. two motor protective switches on page 1 1 2 3 gt 4 gt 5 gt 6 gt Double click one of the motor circuit breakers The Type Database Browser window opens Click in the Type field Manufacturer lt Manufacturer gt Select as manufacturer IGE XAO Click in the field where you want to group e g Goods group and drag it with the mouse button pressed in the Drag a column header here to group by that column position If necessary drag another field in this position Through the Collapse button you can close the folder of all grouping at once Close the Component Properties dialogue box The contact mirror appears lf you want to cancel a grouping click on the appropriate field and drag it with the left mouse button pressed in the area of the column heading Release the mouse button when you can see red arrows lt Type gt Select the 3VE1011 Type for the motor circuit breaker You can find the type in the Q goods group Select the type through double click on the gt area in front of the type Close the Type Database window with the Lx button OK Leave the Component properties window Exercise 18 11 f contactors or components with auxiliary contacts have a type with a channel definition the contact numbering is performed automatically If no free contact of the relevant type is available in the component an error message appears 1 T Introdu o Place a new contact and assign itto
380. u o as selectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados When you rename multi layer terminals where there is more than one terminal with the same name number and sorting a message appears asking you whether to rename all components Click the Rename All button to make sure all single levels of multi layer terminals remain combined DD 1 3 CABLE EDITOR Multiple records can be edited at the same time By selecting the Check cables pop up command you can check out overfilled cable cores Cables can be automatically renumbered if a component code is defined for them in the Cables tab of the Circuit Diagram Properties window and if an automatism for renumbering of components is enabled The renumbering is possible in the Editor cable database list via the Renumber all cables on all pages command DD 1 4 CONNECTOR EDITOR The Editor Connector allows you to change the information for the connectors and their pins Multiple records can be edited at the same time In the editor you can change the name and the type of the connectors as well as the pin ID The name of the pin cannot be changed here it is defined in the channel definition of the type If a type is assigned to a connector and the pin ID is changed the pin name is updated directly from the type information Pin Ids or pin names can be changed only if one pin is selected in the editor DD 1 5 SIGNAL EDITOR Multipl
381. uct list The text is truncated after 30 characters If for example are used 50 characters only 30 are displayed Generate all desired graphical lists in one step Within SEE Electrical you are able to generate all desired graphical lists in just one click Using internal codes within the graphical lists you can define a chain reaction at graphical lists generation The internal codes also allow you to specify consecutive page numbering valid for all lists e g the first document obtains page number 1 the next 2 and so on until completed This enables more flexible handling of graphical lists The following attributes must be specified within the list NextList List ID Example NextList 3100 There are no brackets allowed For this example the next list generated will be 3100 This code must be inserted in the first list that you generate The first list starts a chain reaction i e this code will automatically call and generate the next kind of graphical list in this example list type 3100 The IDs for the types of graphical lists are as follows 2000 Other documents 3001 Documents list 3011 Products list 3020 Terminals list 3025 Connector list only Advanced 3026 Connector Pin list only Advanced 3030 Cable list 3031 Cable core list 3050 PLC I O list 3060 Wires list 3100 Paris simple list 3101 Paris list Simple 3102 Spareparts list from Standard 3103 Spar
382. ue nos contatos de for a que est o na coluna 2 A janela Propriedades do componente aparecer 1 gt Componente 2 4 1Q2 Clique no botao do campo Componente A janela Componente Fun o Localiza o aparecer listando os componentes com depend ncia de contatos presentes no projeto Selecione a bobina 2K2 a partir da lista 3 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada D um duplo clique nos contatos de for a que est o na coluna 4 A janela Propriedades do componente aparecer 4 gt Componente 5 2K3 F Introdu o P gina 49 see electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Clique no bot o do campo Componente A janela Componente Fun o Localiza o aparecer listando os componentes com depend ncia de contatos presentes no projeto Selecione a bobina 2K2 a partir da lista 6 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada D um duplo clique nos contatos de for a da coluna 5 A janela Propriedades do componente aparecer 7 gt Componente 8 4 2K4 Clique no botao do campo Componente A janela Componente Fun o Localiza o aparecer listando os componentes com depend ncia de contatos presentes no projeio Selecione a bobina 2K4 a partir da lista 9 gt OK A caixa de di logo ser fechada A refer ncia cruza ser mostrada Dica Voc pode navegar entre os components e p ginas clicando na refer ncia cruzada dos s mbolo
383. ull down list 4 gt Click the Load button T a pt ze 3 General H A Draw H A Functions H a Bectrical 3 RedLining er Ag Commands 5 gt Right click on the User Defined Categories node and select the Add Category pop up command 7 To add a panel to your category right click it and select the Add Panel pop up command TT Introdu o P gina 397 electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados 8 Type inthe name of the new panel inthis case Draw Add New Panel x Name Draw Ko Cancel 9 Repeat the steps to create an Electrical Training category and an Electrical Draw panel in it Exercise 42 4 Add commands to the user defined categories 1 gt In the Customizer window select the Draw panel of your Training category 2 gt In the left pane of the window explode the Basic Commands node and select the Draw Elements sub node 3 gt Select the Circle command 4 gt Click the button E Customizer olx Definition of categones BS Select module Circuit diagrams EN Bements User Defined Categories eg Line H Eectical Extensions ke _ Rectangle EL Training i La Draw de Ane H Blectrical Training of Ellipse C Blectrical Draw hk Parabola eee 4 Bezier ps Spline a Free hand j 5 Polygon Area E Fil
384. up menu to specify that the dialogue with the question will appear only once at the beginning of the list Move the cursor forward to the position Projeciname F Enter the value to be suggested automatically for example Name as the entry of the project name is expected The text must be within double quotation marks Give the max character number for the text We suppose 200 characters for the project name Move the cursor to the position between the characters List of products AskString Frojectname F Name 200 Now the variable for the question about project name or another user defined text before generation of the list has been defined 4 Click OK to finish editing the first header line QQ 3 5 LIST TITLE WITH GENERATION DATE Enter the date of generation in the title of the list Double click the title Double click onto beneath the line of the list title Products AskString Projectname F Name 200 Paragraphs Es Wo j e List of products AskString Projectname F Name 200 You will go into the window again where you can edit the texts For example type the text created on the keyboard in the text area Click then behind the text position the cursor behind the text Open the Date functions folder in the Functions area by clicking the plus sign Scroll the suggested variables until you see Now gt Date This variable shows t
385. vailable 5 gt Click within the Goods Group column The zl icon appears If you click this icon a list with the available goods groups opens Select the desired goods group in our case Auxiliary Contactors The goods groups are used for structuring the goods information For example in SEE Electrical Standard and Advanced levels you can enter data about types for all kinds of components i e switch gears terminals relay coils etc But when you assign a type to a component only the relevant type is to be shown The goods groups enable this pre selection 6 gt Expand the Training manufacturer The goods groups assigned to this manufacturer are shown i e Auxiliary Contactors 7 gt Expand the Auxiliary Contactors goods group The new type appears now in the Type Database Manager too 8 gt Select the type you wish to assign information to by clicking it inthe Manager pane in the left part of the window Training 88 Auxiliary Contactors ia EN In the bottom right pane of the Type Database Manager window all the default properties of a type are displayed T he default properties can be changed via the Functions Settings command which opens the Settings window Pagina 142 T Introdu o gaa c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Property Value p itho Height 9 Description Description Price Order number Manuf
386. wing symbols If you want to display the name for the next symbol again press the H key again It is possible to switch on or off the displaying of the name in the Component Properties Exercise 40 8 By means of a section delete again all components in your circuit diagram Exercise 40 9 Draw the rails in your cabinet 1 K Cabinet 2 M Rail in the Elements filed 3 gt Width 4 35 5 gt Length 6 700 7 gt OK 8 Place the rail 9 Place the rail a second time and if necessary a third time 10 Through the Pick list command place components on the rails Exercise 40 10 Delete the components from the rails and move components from one rail to another Components are fixed on the rails you cannot select them directly 1 Right click The context menu appears 2 M Select a single element in the component gro up 3 Click the component to be selected 4 Press the CTRL button if you want to select more components 5 Delete the components RR Introdu o P gina 375 sea electrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados If you want to select more components you can do this by the means of a section as you do the following 1 Simultaneously press the SHIFT and CTRL buttons on the keyboard 2 Define the first point of the section 3 Define the second point of the section 4 Through the Move selected elements pop up command now you can
387. working with product database If you want to change the name of a component you should select the name in the Components area select the correct aspects for the component and apply them with the Change aspect command If the Unique product aspect on component option is enabled no component with the chosen product aspect can exist If it does you have to delete it first If you use the Change aspects command all appearances of the component in workspace for example linked slaves etc also change their names If you just select another name for a component that has several appearances in the workspace the names of the other appearances are not changed If you want to attach a slave to another master you have to select the new name Types with channel definition the Symbol Explorer section If a channel definition is properly defined for a type used on a component in the lower right part of the aspects manager window are displayed the symbols defined in the channel You can double click a symbol in this symbol explorer section and place it in the current drawing After a symbol is placed it is greyed out and the page and cell it is found in are displayed on mouse over CC Introducao Pagina 227 Es e ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Filter d Circuit diagrams EN Installations Cabinets b A1 1 E E NE PI C P1 K1 NEN F1 K1 ee Ma dh I4 Channelooo Function
388. xt placeholder with Normal text attribute to your template that contains the command lt ID of text attribute gt lt n gt f lt text gt For example 160101 2fmeter Add this if two decimal places are necessary for the length of the cable ID 160101 inthe cable list and the text meter must be inserted after the value The result is 5 45 meter Use full integer formatting Add to your template a text placeholder with Normal text attribute that contains the command lt ID of text attribute gt 0 lt n gt d For example 120010 03d Add this if three integer values are necessary for the length of Pagina 130 P Introdu o Ea c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados the page number ID 120010 in the Document list If are present the pages 5 11 123 and 444 the result is the following 005 or 011 or 123 OR 4444 The lt ID of text attribute gt 0 lt n gt d command states that the 0 is added to the value as often as necessary to reach the minimum length of the string defined by lt n gt Is a value exceeds the minimum length it does not change Text strings Control the length Add to your template a text placeholder with the Normal text attribute that contains the command lt ID of text attribute gt lt n gt s For example 160030 30s Add this if only 30 characters fit into the field available for the Description 00 text ID 160030 in the Prod
389. y lf the original cable core is deleted a appears on the copy of the cable core It has to be deleted manually EE Introdu o Pagina 243 ea c ectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados EE 5 ADVANCED FUNCTIONALITY FOR POTENTIAL NUMBERING With the Define Signal Number Electrical category command you can define the way of numbering of the signals for each connection This is possible if you use the Signal type property lf two components connected to one wire define different rules for the numbering one is taken by random Make sure you do not set up a rule for the wire numbering that generates duplicated numbers How to define a definition Select an entry from the Components texts area and move it to the Signal number definition area using the button lf you want to remove an entry from the Signal number definition use the button How to remove a definition Use the Delete definition button Example of a rule Define Signal Number yr T q Component texts Signal number definition fy ke Mame of signal type Auto Number no my Mame of signal type Connection d A Auto Murer Separator G Bel t K ie E E J T Lut ee E ee a T re Lu CL IPFE 4 Delete definition OF Cancel The separator can contain any text string for example or a text such as Wire number Pagina 244 EE I
390. y using sorting filtering defining first page page break after changing the defined values The control is realized via the page template using some keywords defined with the sign Pogebegin 100 PogeBreok 140020 140050 Orderby 140020 140050 160010 HLines 30 7 5 WHERE 140070 47 AND 120910410 Function Location Product PageBegin The graphical list will start from the defined page number lt page Example for List of Products number gt PageBegin 100 The first graphical List of Products always begins automatically from page number 100 PageBegin Each time you generate the List of Products a question about the start page number will appear Using PageBegin lt List ID gt it is possible to assign consecutive page numbers to all graphical lists Example First the Document List is created The page numbers of the Product List will be followed on seamlessly to the last page of the Document List So the placeholder Page Begin 3011 is required in the Standard sheet symbol of the page template for the Product list For the IDs of the various lists see the chapter Generate all desired graphical lists in one step below It is possible to define one page number and different indexes for pages that are generated for one kind of a graphical list In this case the page number will not be changed The definition has to be made in the following way PageBegin lt page number gt lt separator gt
391. ymbol The graphical symbol and a text with the attribute Terminal number have to be grouped as Macro Group FEED O Humne Eee A A A ALWE LAGE ALELA QE jaays Ed 6 Group all elements as a symbol of the type Graphical symbol 2H1 41 Ag 14 2 13 EE SE 2H4 41 15 A2 18 ci eee le 7 Insert the text for the terminal number 8 Group the four symbols and the text for the terminal number as a Block Macro Group symbol 9 Group all symbols the macro group for the standard sheet and the macro group for the single terminals as a Page Template Title Block symbol 10 Save the new page template Pagina 198 X Introdu o asse lectrical Manual de treinamento COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados Y CABLE PLAN WITH GRAPHICS standard The Cable plan with graphics enables a clearly presented documentation of the cable cores and their targets Y Introdu o P gina 199 Manual de treinamento sea electrical COPYRIGHT O 2013 IGE XAO Todos os direitos reservados The targets of the cable cores can be displayed as text information or graphics Examples Typ NYY 5x1 5 verbindung Mator z L nge 5m zza al mm Kobel we Tyo Nrt 5x15 Yerbindung Matar Longe 5m Oar a aean aa aj aera Text on both sides Pagina 200 aes Nr Med EPE 2 50pm oS T mE A E 1 U TH Fon One target as graphi

Manual de treinamento - EGV

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents